508XT V2 1 Functional DRAFT

XT
508
T
AF
Functional Manual
R
Vol. 1
D
V2.1
Ref. 10048016 AA February 5, 2020

My Sercel > 2
My Sercel
For a complete library of Technical Documentation please visit the My Sercel
customer Extranet.
My Sercel provides the latest:
• User Manuals
• Software Updates
• Engineering Updates
• Maintenance Procedures
• E-mail notifications for the latest technical updates.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 2-1 My Sercel Homepage
Click here to request a My Sercel account. http://customer.sercel.com or use the

following QR code
2
To contact Sercel
Europe North America
Nantes, France Houston, Texas, USA
Sales; Customer Support; Manufacturing & Repair Sales; Customer Support; Manufacturing & Repair
B.P. 30439, 16 rue de Bel Air Tel: +1 281 492 6688, Fax: +1 281 579 7505
44474 Carquefou Cedex Hot-Line: +1 281 492 6688
Tel: +33 2 40 30 11 81, Fax: +33 2 40 30 19 48 E-mail: sales.houston@sercel.com
Hot-Line: Land: +33 2 40 30 58 88 HOU_Customer.Support@sercel.com
Marine: +33 2 40 30 59 59 HOU_Training@sercel.com
Navigation: +33 2 40 30 69 87 HOU_Customer.Repair@sercel.com
E-mail: sales.nantes@sercel.com Tulsa, Oklahoma, USA
customersupport.land@sercel.com Tel: +1 918 834 9600, Fax: +1 918 838 8846
customersupport.marine@sercel.com E-mail: support@sercel-grc.com
customersupport.navigation@sercel.com sales@sercel-grc.com
repair.france@sercel.com
streamer.repair@sercel.com Middle East
www.sercel.com
Dubai, U. A. E.
T
St Gaudens, France Sales; Customer Support; Repair
Vibrator & VSP Customer Support; Tel: +971 4 8832142, Fax: +971 4 8832143
Vibrator Manufacturing & RepairAF Hot Line: +971 50 6451752
Streamer Manufacturing & Repair E-mail: dubai@sercel.com
Tel: +33 5 61 89 90 00, Fax: +33 5 61 89 90 33 repair.dubai@sercel.com
Hot Line: (Vib) +33 5 61 89 90 91
(VSP) +33 5 61 89 91 00
Far East
E-mail: customersupport.vib@sercel.com
customersupport.vsp@sercel.com Beijing, P. R. of China
Research & Development
Brest, France Tel: +86 106 43 76 710,
R
Sales; Customer Support E-mail: support.china@geo-mail.com
Tel: +33 2 98 05 29 05; Fax: +33 2 98 05 52 41 repair.china@geo-mail.com
E-mail: sales.nantes@sercel.com
Xushui, P. R. of China
D
Toulouse, France Manufacturing & Repair

Sales; Customer Support Tel: +86 312 8648355, Fax: +86 312 8648441
Tel: +33 5 61 34 80 74; Fax: +33 5 61 34 80 66 Singapore
E-mail: support@metrolog.com Streamer Manufacturing; Repair; Customer Support
sales.@metrolog.com Tel: +65 6 417 7000, Fax: +65 6 545 1418
info@metrolog.com
Russia
Moscow, Russia
Customer Support
Tel: +7 495 644 08 05, Fax: +7 495 644 08 04
E-mail: repair.cis@geo-mail.org
support.cis@geo-mail.org
Surgut, Russia
Customer Support; Repair
Tel: +7 3462 28 92 50
Regulatory Information >
Regulatory Information
European Union Statement
508 products meet the essential requirements of Directives RED 2014/53/UE (Radio), 2014/
30/UE (EMC), 2014/35/UE (Low Voltage) and 2011/65/UE (ROHS).
WARNING
The 508 products are class-A devices. In residential areas, the user may be requested to take
appropriate measures in the event of RF interference caused by these devices.
FCC US Statement
T
SERCEL products comply with U.S. FCC according to FCC CFR47 Part 15.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and
AF
(2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation
Note Sercel products has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This system generates, uses, and can
R
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this system in a residential area is likely to cause
D
harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
IC Canadian Statement
SERCEL products comply with Industry Canada EMI Class A requirements according to
ICES-003 and RSS Gen.
Les produits SERCEL sont conformes aux exigences Classe A de l’Industrie Canada selon
les normes NMB-003 et CNR Gen.
Note These devices comply with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) These devices may not cause interference; and
(2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
4
Regulatory Information > 4
China Regulation
508 Products comply with China ROHS 2.
T
AF
R
D
5 February 5, 2020
License Agreement > 5
License Agreement
By downloading, installing, copying or otherwise using the present software and its
associated parts or items (« Software »), you, as licensee (“Licensee”) agree without
signature to the terms and conditions of the present software license agreement
(“Agreement”) issued by us (“Licensor) governed and judged by the French Laws and
French Courts in case of dispute resulting from its enforcement.
License.
The Software is copyrighted and licensed but not sold.
The license (“License”) is a non-exclusive, non-transferable, revocable license (with no right
to sub-licence) to use the object code version of the Software solely for the Licensee’s own
internal use for an indefinite period of time or during the term indicated by the Licensor, if
T
any.
The Licence allows copy for back up purposes only and does not authorise the Licensee or
anyone else to:
AF
(a) Copy, reproduce, translate, adapt, vary, enhance or modify, merge, reverse engineer,
reverse assemble, decompile, or disassemble the Software or use the Software parts or items
separately;
(b) Remove from the Software any labels or notices (including copyright notices) as to the
Licensor’s ownership of the Software or any other intellectual property rights;
R
(c) Distribute, publish, transfer, licence, sublicense, sell, rent, lease, lend or make directly or
indirectly the Software or program documentation in whole or in part (including but not
limited to object code, source code and source program listings) available to other
organisations, entities or persons;
D
(d) Use or exploit the Software commercially or for the benefit of others;
(e) Create or attempt to create derivative works from the Software;
(f) Use the Software to violate the terms and conditions of any other software licensing
agreement between the Licensee and any third parties.
If Licensee is located in a country which requires a specific export licence or registration of
software licenses with government authorities, Licensee shall be responsible at its own cost
for meeting all requirement of such registration.
Import and Export.

Licensee is solely responsible for obtaining the necessary import licenses and any other
official authorizations and to carry out all customs formalities necessary and for paying all
associated costs, taxes and duties.
6
License Agreement >
Licensee acknowledges that Software and any related services and technology, including
technical information supplied by Licensor or contained in the Software or associated
documents (collectively “Items”), is or may be subject to export controls of any government
or community including but not limited to the U.S. government or E.U. Community (
collectively “Controls”). The export controls may ban or restrict or require licenses for the
export or re-export of Items from the United States or E.U. or any other countries. As a
consequence any delivery schedule and performance of any of Licensor’s obligation are
subject to the enforcement of any Controls and the obtaining of any licence if any, and
Licensor shall not be liable to Licensee for any damage and loss resulting thereof. The Parties
agree to provide each other with any reasonable assistance, in particular for the issue of any
document that may be required by relevant administration, to comply with the obligations of
this Agreement and the Controls and for this purpose the Licensee will complete the end user
statement submitted by the Licensor.
Warranty.
T
Licensor warrants that Software was developed with reasonable diligence and skill and that
it substantially conforms to published documentation.
AF
Except as expressly provided above, Software is deemed to be accepted "AS IS", without any
further warranty of any kind, express or implied. The Licensor excludes, without limitation,
the warranties of merchantability, of fitness for a particular purpose and of non-
infringement. The Licensor does not warrant or assume responsibility for the accuracy or
completeness of any information, text, graphics, links or other items contained with the
Software.
R
Liability.
In no event shall the Licensor be liable for any claim or any damages including, without
limitation, direct, indirect, compensatory, special, incidental, punitive, exemplary or
D
consequential whether bodily, material or immaterial (such as, but not limited to loss of
profit or anticipated profits or revenues, loss of sales or data, contract, production, or
bargains, interruption of business, damage to goodwill or loss due to any delay) howsoever
caused including without limitation use or inability to use of the Software, breach of contract
(negligence included), breach of warranty, breach of duty (statutory duty included), tort or
otherwise even when Licensor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
Confidentiality.
Licensee acknowledges and agrees that this Licence Agreement, any financial, business,
technical information, trade secret and Know How proprietary to the Licensor and contained
in the Software and/or in the documentation shall be deemed to be “Confidential
Information” and as such shall not be disclosed directly or indirectly by the Licensee to any
third party. Any breach of this provision by Licensee would cause Licensor to suffer
immediate and irreparable harm. In the event of such breach, Licensor shall have, in addition
7 February 5, 2020
License Agreement > 5
to any and all remedies at law, the right to an injunction, specific performance or other
equitable relief. Licensee’s obligation of confidentiality under this provision shall survive
expiry or termination of this Licence Agreement.
Intellectual property rights, patents and copyrights to Software.

Licensee acknowledges and agrees that all intellectual property rights and all Confidential
Information (whether existing or future) in and to the Software and in and to the associated
documentation belong or are licensed to Licensor and that Licensee only rights pertaining to
said intellectual property rights are these defined in this Licence Agreement. No title or
ownership of Software is transferred under this Agreement. Licensee shall take no action that
might impair any right, title or interest of Licensor as owner or as licensee in or to the
Software. Licensee shall not have any rights in or to any trademark or trade name owned by
Licensor with respect to the Software. Any breach of the provision here above of the present
T
provision by Licensee would cause Licensor to suffer immediate and irreparable harm. In the
event of such breach, Licensor shall have, in addition to any and all remedies at law, the right
to an injunction, specific performance or other equitable relief.
AF
Termination.
The Licensor has the right to terminate this Agreement and Licensee's right to use this
Software upon any material breach by Licensee. The Licensee agrees to return to Licensor
or to destroy all copies of the Software upon termination of the License.
R
D
8
5
License Agreement >
T
AF
(Page intentionally blank)
R
D
Revision History >
Revision History
Date of Chapters or Description of revision or reason

Revision
revision pages affected for change
Jan. 2020 AA Initial Release 508XT v2.1
T
AF
R
D
10
> 1
My Sercel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1 Getting started
508XT System Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Opening a user session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
508XT Launcher bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2 508XT HCI Perspectives
T
Graphic Interface Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
GIS Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
AF
GIS Display elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Status Messages Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
System Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Working with Perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
R
3 Setup Parameters
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
D
Configuration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Instrument Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Survey Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Layout Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Operation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Export Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
VE464 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
VibOther Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
11 February 5, 2020
>
4 Dashboard Perspective
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Dashboard Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Action Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Contextual Menus (Right-click). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
5 Field Perspective
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Instrument View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Concentrator View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
T
Analog Sensor View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Digital Sensor View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Completion Acquisition view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
AF
Completion Test View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Histogram Instrument View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Histogram Sensor View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
History View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
R
6 VE464 Perspective
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
D
Set Vib Fleet view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Set Servo View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Get DSD View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Get QC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Get QC Graph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Get Radio Similarities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Update Firmware view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Normal Acquisition views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Statistics View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Local Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
12
> 1
Update Custom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Vibrator Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
7 Admin Perspective
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Download View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Firmware updates for LRC-508 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
8 Custom Perspective
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
T
9 QC Analyzer
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
AF
QC Analyzer Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
QC Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
QC Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
R
10 Test Functions
DSU1-508 Test Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
FDU-508 Test Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
D
11 VP Report 508
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Operator Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
12 FT-508 Software
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
FT-508 Application Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
13 February 5, 2020
>
13 Data Harvester CX-508

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Connection of the DH CX-508 to the Central Unit . . . . . . . . . 540
Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
14 Sercel 508 Launcher Application

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
15 DT-508 Software
T
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
AF
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
16 IT-508 Software
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
R
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
17 Admin 508
D
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
User Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Server Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
License information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Start/Stop Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
18 Reference information
Geophone strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
14
> 1
19 Case Study: Autonomous Functionality in 508XT

Autonomous Functionality in 508XT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Working with LRC-508 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
20 Case Study: Use of 508XT Transition Zone

Transition Zone Operation with 508XT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
508TZ Line Cut Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
21 Index
T
AF
R
D
15 February 5, 2020
Chapter
T
1 Getting started
AF
This chapter includes the following sections:
R
• 508XT System Documentation (page 17)
• Opening a user session (page 18)
• 508XT Launcher bar (page 23)
D
508XT Functional Manual

Getting started
508XT System Documentation >
508XT System Documentation

Documentation included with the 508XT system is available on the accompanying USB key
provided with your system (ref. 10040994) or on the My Sercel Extranet. If you do not have
a My Sercel account please click the following link to request access.
My Sercel account request
Documentation for the 508XT system consists of the following manuals:
• Installation Manual: provides an introduction to the 508XT system, installation
information, a few instructions for the operator to get started, and reference information
that will help you select a 508XT configuration tailored to your needs.
• Functional Manual Volume 1: describes the parameters displayed on the 508XT
system’s Graphic User Interface (GUI) and how to use each window.
T
• Functional Manual Volume 2 (DCM): describes the Data Completion Manager (DCM)
application.
• Data Format Manual: contains information on logged data and on interfaces
AF
(description of Input/Output formats, including the SEGD format).
• Technical Manual: contains maintenance and repair information, including operating
instructions for using the system’s testers.
R
D
17 February 5, 2020
Getting started
Opening a user session > 1
Opening a user session

This operation assumes you have correctly installed the 508 Server hardware and software
components, see the 508XT Installation Manual. To open a user session:
- Double-click on the 508XT Client icon on your desktop.
Figure 1-1 Start Client shortcut button
- Wait until the launcher bar appears.
T
AF
Figure 1-2 Launcher Bar
All icons in the launcher bar (except the connection icon and the Help button) are dimmed
until you are connected.
R
Right-clicking on the “Connection” icon causes a menu to pop up, prompting the following
commands:
D
Figure 1-3 Connection menu
• Connection: used to log on to the server. See Connection (page 19).

• Settings: see HCI 508 (page 24).
• About: provides system version information. See About (page 23).
• Exit: closes the 508XT Client application.
18
Getting started
Opening a user session > Connection
Connection
This command is selected by default on a left-click on the connection icon in the launcher
bar. It opens a connection window:
Click here to
connect
Figure 1-4 Connection button
Remote Connection
T
To connect to the server, click on the Remote Server tab,
AF
1
2
R
3
4
D
5
Figure 1-5 Remote Server
1. Choose the type of connection: “Local user” if you are opening a user session on
the server computer itself or your PC is attached to the crew’s local network
(172.27.128.x), “Remote user” otherwise.
2. The Label field is used to enter a name for your connection profile. Choose a name
that will clearly identify your connection profile (e. g. your name plus the product’s
name).
3. In the URL field, type the desired crew address, for example:
19 February 5, 2020
Getting started
Opening a user session > Connection 1
- localhost if you are connecting as “Local user” on the server computer

itself, or 172.27.128.1 if you are connecting as an extra “Local user”.
4. In the Login and Password fields, type your Login name and Password (supplied to
you by the System Administrator). By default:
• Login: observer
• Password: pwd
5. Click Connect. The 508XT launcher bar icons on your desktop should no longer be
dimmed.
Note Only one 508XT Client can be launched per connection. In order to launch a
second client a new connection to the server must be established.
Advanced Parameters
T
If your machine uses a Proxy server, click on the Advanced Parameters tab to set the Proxy
configuration. AF
Choose “Enabled”, then enter the same configuration (Host name and Port) as in your Web
browser (see the Internet connection options in your browser).
R
D
Figure 1-6 Advanced Parameters
20
Getting started
Opening a user session > Application Settings
Application Settings
Look & Feel

Right-click on the connection icon, this allows you to choose the interface to use. The
Default UI is selected, you may modify this to a Windows UI if desired.
T
AF
Figure 1-7 Look & Feel
Regional settings
R
Allows you to choose the interface language.
D
Figure 1-8 Regional Settings
21 February 5, 2020
Getting started
Opening a user session > Application Settings 1
Desktop
As you close the 508XT application window (by selecting “Exit” from the connection icon in
the launcher bar or by clicking the usual close button in the upper right corner), the system
may or may not save the desktop configuration, depending on which option is enabled in the
“Desktop” settings window.
T
AF
Figure 1-9 Desktop
• None: with this option enabled, the default window layout is used each time you open the
508XT application.
R
• Last session: with this option enabled, the 508XT application opens with the window
layout you were using when you last closed the launcher bar (with the same user account
on the same computer).
• Snapshot: with this option enabled, clicking “Apply” saves the current window layout
D
on your computer. The windows that were open at the moment you clicked “Apply” will
automatically open, with the same window layout the next time you open the 508XT
application with the same user account on the same computer (until you change your
desktop preference option).
22
Getting started
508XT Launcher bar > About
About
The About window displays information about the installed system version.
T
Figure 1-10 About
508XT Launcher bar

Connection
AF
HCI
508
Observer
Report
Shared Memory
Explorer
R
D
Administration Configuration Remote Server Control
Figure 1-11 Launcher bar
The 508XT launcher bar allows you to configure and manage all elements regarding your
operation. The functions of the launcher bar icons are defined below.
• The Configuration 508 icon is used to set the crew’s basic parameters, provide
information on the hardware and software configuration of the system, specify how your
SEGD files must be recorded, and enable/disable communications with the Control
Module.
• The HCI 508 icon allows you to open the 508XT Human Computer Interface. See HCI
508 on page 24.
23 February 5, 2020
Getting started
508XT Launcher bar > HCI 508 1
• The Observer Report icon is used to display and generate observer logs in different
formats. See VP Report 508 on page 486.
• The Shared Memory Explorer is only to be used by Sercel for debugging purposes.
• The Administration icon is intended for a user with Observer or Senior Observer
privileges to register users, manage passwords and sessions, etc. See HCI 508 on
page 24.
The launcher bar can be customized:
• You can have the launcher displayed vertically or horizontally by double-clicking on its
title bar.
• Use the button at the foot of the launcher bar to choose which icons you want to be
visible.
T
Click arrow
to customize
AF
R
Figure 1-12 Customize menu
HCI 508
D
HCI
508
Figure 1-13 HCI 508 button
When opening the HCI 508 for the first time, a blank window is displayed. However, this
view, Figure 1-14 (page 25), provides access to all of the 508XT functions, including:
• Drop-down Menu - allows you to
• New Window
24
Getting started
508XT Launcher bar > HCI 508
• Setup...
• Help
• Exit
• Add/Open Perspectives
• Message and Question setup and views
• System status
Reduce
Add Maximize
Setup Perspectives Close
T
AF
R
D
Server Field Operation VE464 Field Tester / Date of Message Question

Connection ON/OFF Source Connection Data Harvester Next Console Console
Status Status Status Status Status System
Shutdown
Figure 1-14 Graphic View Functions
The first time you log on to a 508XT server, the main window in the Graphical User Interface
is configured with a default layout. Then, your customized window layout is automatically
saved on your computer as you close the client window, and recovered when you next open
it.
25 February 5, 2020
Getting started
508XT Launcher bar > VP Report 508 1
In most main windows, you may decide how many views to show and where to place them.
The GUI also lets you decide which information to view, and which type of view (numerical/
graphical) you want for this information. The procedure below gives you a glimpse of what
you can do to customize each main window.
The 508 HCI provides an advanced graphic interface that allows you to customize and define
parameters according to your individual requirements.
VP Report 508
The “VP” icon lets you select some or all of the fields from Operation logs and Export logs,
and build an observer report that you can print and/or export to another application. See VP
Report 508 on page 486 for more details.
T
AF Observer
Report
Figure 1-15 Observer Report
R
Admin 508
Open a user session (see Connection on page 19) unless this is already done, and click
on the Administration Tool icon in the launcher bar to open the Administration window.
D
Admin 508
Figure 1-16 Admin 508
26
Getting started
508XT Launcher bar > SME 508
SME 508
Note This function is not yet available.
SME
508
Config 508
Note This function is not yet available.
T
AF
Config
508
R
D
27 February 5, 2020
Getting started
508XT Launcher bar > Remote Server Control 1
Remote Server Control

This function allows you turn On / Off the remote server. It can also be used in case server
trouble occurs and a system restart is required.
Remote Server
Control
Example 1.
• Initial State: Server Running (Without issues)
T
• Action: you want to Stop the Server-508 application manually
Step 1. Server status: Operational
AF
Step 2. Click on “Stop 508 Server”
Result: All processes stopped properly. Server status after stop - Correct without issues.
R
D
Figure 1-17 Example 1
28
Getting started
508XT Launcher bar > Remote Server Control
Table 1:
Initial State Action desired Result Server Status
Server Running Stop 508 Server All processes stopped Server status after stop -
properly Correct without issues.
T
Server stopped Start the 508-server All processes stopped prop- Click on Start 508 Server
Server is locked with 1 or

AF
application manually erly
Restart 508-server Server status: Locked (1
more processes manually or more processes
locked)
R
Example 2.
D
• Initial State: Server Stopped (Without issues)

• Action: you want to Start the Server-508 application manually
Step 1. Server status: Stopped (all processes properly stopped)
Step 2. Click on “Start 508 Server”
29 February 5, 2020
Getting started
508XT Launcher bar > Remote Server Control 1
Result: All processes start properly. Server status after start - Correct without issues.
T
AF
R
D
30
Getting started
508XT Launcher bar > Remote Server Control
Example 3.
• Initial State: Server with 1 or more processes locked
• Action: you want to Restart the Server-508 application manually
Step 1. Server status: Locked (1 or more processes locked)
Step 2. Click on “Force Stop 508 Server” (kill all ongoing processes)
Result: Server Status after Stop procedure. Server is stopped automatically without any
issues.
T
AF
R
D
31 February 5, 2020
Chapter
T
AF
This chapter includes the following sections.
R
• What’s New in 508XT V2.0 (page 33)
• GIS Functions (page 37)
• GIS Display elements (page 51)
D
• Status Messages Panel (page 60)

• System Status Bar (page 61)
• Working with Perspectives (page 63)

508XT HCI Perspectives
> What’s New in 508XT V2.0
What’s New in 508XT V2.0

The 508XT V2.0 HCI provides a redesigned graphic interface that provides numerous new
features and improvements allowing you to customize the interface and work more
efficiently thanks to new tools and short-cuts.
Numerous improvements are available in 508XT V2.0 including:
• A completely redesigned Graphic Interface Panel (page 34) including 3D views.
• Improved GIS Functions (page 37).
• Redesigned QC Analyzer (page 411).
• Support for Autonomous Field Units, see Autonomous Sensor Type (page 94).
• Completion view for Test data, see Completion Test View (page 357).
T
AF
R
D
33 February 5, 2020
Graphic Interface Panel > What’s New in 508XT V2.0 2
Graphic Interface Panel

A new graphical interface panel has been developed to facilitate navigation while using the
508XT V2 interface.
Navigate Bookmarks View Background 2D /3D Reduce

Views All Opacity View window
T
AF
R
Figure 2-1 Graphical Interface panel
Navigate Views
D
This function allows you to return to a previous view as well as to move forward to a more
recent view, much like a Web browser. The zoom and area of your interface will be
registered. A green check beside the Navigation arrows indicated a view has been registered.
check mark
Figure 2-2 Check mark indicating view registered
Bookmarks
The bookmarks function allows you register a working area or a zone of interest. This allows
you to quickly return to the zone of interest with the same level of zoom and workspace.
34
Graphic Interface Panel > What’s New in 508XT V2.0
To add a bookmark. Place your cursor on the item you want to bookmark. Enter the name of
the bookmark (do not leave spaces).Then click the Add Bookmark symbol.
Add Display
Bookmark Bookmark
active-08-11
T
AF
Figure 2-3 Add Bookmark
To see the list of bookmarks click on the Display Bookmarks symbol. Select a bookmark to
view it on your display.
R
D
Figure 2-4 Display Bookmarks
View All
Allows you to zoom out until all objects fit into the plot panel (in one click).
Background Opacity
Controls whether the context sensitive window is displayed completely opaque or whether it
is displayed with a transparent background.
35 February 5, 2020
Graphic Interface Panel > What’s New in 508XT V2.0 2
2D / 3D Views
The new 508XT HCI provides 3D field views.
Labelling on elements in 3D views may be modified.
T
AF
Figure 2-5 3D Geo View example
Reduce Window
Collapses or Expands the Layers window.
R
D
36
GIS Functions > Contextual Menus (Right-Click)
GIS Functions
The interface for the 508XT V2 proposes significant improvements to help you better work
with the system.
Contextual Menus (Right-Click)

A contextual (right-click) menu offers a limited set of choices that are available for the
current state or context, of the 508XT application. Usually the available choices are actions
related to the selected object or instrument. For additional information, see Contextual
Menus (Right-click) (page 330).
In the example below, a right-click on the CX-508 gives you all the options for this
instrument.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 2-6 right-click menu example
Set Assign
This function allows you to Assign the associated receiver position and other parameters of
the selected instrument. This will create an instrument in the Assignment Layout. See also,
Assignment (page 131).
Audit
This function allows you to Audit the selected concentrator.
Switch Off / On
This function allows you to switch the selected concentrator On/Off.
37 February 5, 2020
GIS Functions > Contextual Menus (Right-Click) 2
Reset
This function resets the selected CX-508 concentrator. Production will not be affected during
a Reset if the controlled field unit segment(s) are secured by a neighbour CX-508.
Note The Reset function is also available from the Completion view. See,
Completion Acquisition view (page 353)
Reset Line
This function allows you to Reset the selected line.
Reset Transverse
This function allows you to Reset the transverse.
Get Properties
T
The Get Properties menu displays a popup with the properties of the selected element.
Locate on Other Views

AF
The Locate on other views function displays a red bubble on other opened views at the
location of the pointed element. This permits you to easily locate an instrument while passing
from one view to another. See, Locate on Other views (page 69)
Reset All
This function allows you to reset all connected concentrators.
R
Set Detour
This function allows you to set the beginning and end point for a detour on a receiver point.
D
See also, Detour (page 134).
Set Auxiliary
This function allows you to define an instrument as an Auxiliary Trace. See also, Auxiliary
(page 138).
Audit All
This function, allows you to audit all instruments in your spread.
This menu is available only for the SCI-508.
38
GIS Functions > Object / Instrument Properties
Forget Autonomous
The “forget autonomous” function is applicable to field units (FDU/DSU) in "Autonomous
state".
T
Figure 2-7 Forget Autonomous for FDU/DSU
Note
AF
Once autonomous field units are "forgotten", there is no way to retrieve their
missing seismic data. This function must be used only for roll use cases.
Object / Instrument Properties

The 508XT V2.0 HCI facilitates the information available displayed for field instruments.
Double-clicking on an object opens a pop-up dialogue that contains all of the selected
R
objects and their properties. In the example below, the properties of a CX-508 are displayed.
D
Figure 2-8 Concentrator Attributes (Instrument Info.)
39 February 5, 2020
GIS Functions > Object / Instrument Properties 2
Show ID Card
The Show ID card function displays a tip box with selected attributes and test results for the
selected instrument. You may also designate specific functions for the selected instrument
directly from the ID Card.
T
Figure 2-9 Concentrator Attributes (ID Card)
Properties
AF
The Properties function displays a table with properties for the selected instrument or object.
R
D
Figure 2-10 Concentrator Attributes (Instrument Properties)
40
GIS Functions > Measuring Tools
Measuring Tools
Various new tools for measuring are available in 508XT V2.0 HCI. Measuring tools are
available in the Field and Geo Views.
Spatial Ruler
The Spatial Ruler tool allows you to measure:
• distance from one point to another
• the radius of a circle
• the perimeter of an area
• the angle
This tool is available only in Geo views.
T
Measuring Distance
1. Within a Geo view, click the mouse wheel. The measuring tool cross is displayed.
AF
Figure 2-11 Measuring tool Cross
2. Move the cross to the desired starting point. Click the left mouse button to start the
measurement. Drag the mouse to the end point.
R
D
Figure 2-12 Measuring Distance example
41 February 5, 2020
GIS Functions > Measuring Tools 2
3. Double-click the left-mouse button to complete the measurement.
T
Figure 2-13 Measurement example
AF
Calculating Radius and Angle
Using the same steps as described above, The 508 HCI also provides Radius and Angle data.
R
D
Angle
Radius
42
GIS Functions > Measuring Tools
Calculating Perimeter
1. Within a Geo view, click the mouse wheel. The measuring tool cross is displayed.
See Figure 2-11.
2. Move the cross from the desired starting point to the first end point. Click the left-
mouse button once. Continue the line towards the second end point, and so on. When
you have reached your final end point double-click the left-mouse button in order to
close the perimeter.
3. Once a perimeter has been defined you can drag and drop the selected area and use it
as a reference.
In the example below, a perimeter has been defined in Figure 2-14.
This perimeter can be used as a reference and can be moved to another part of the
T
spread using drag & drop. As illustrated in Figure 2-15.
AF
R
D
Figure 2-14 Position 1
4. Place the cursor on one of the lines of the perimeter to drag and drop the area
elsewhere on your spread.
43 February 5, 2020
GIS Functions > Measuring Tools 2
T
Figure 2-15 Position 2
Select multiple objects

AF
The 508 V2 HCI provides an improved tool for selecting multiple objects.
With the mouse pointer resting on the first unit to be selected, press the right button of the
mouse. Hold it down while dragging the pointer to the last unit to be selected, then release
it. An outline appears on the selected units.
R
Information concerning the number and type of units selected is displayed. This information
varies depending on the Perspective.
In the example below, the same area is selected, however the selection on the left (GEO
D
Instrument Perspective) displays the number of instruments selected. Whereas the selection
on the right displays the number of Sensors and Source points (GEO Sensors Perspective).
44
GIS Functions > Mouse functions
T
Figure 2-16 Selected elements in graphic views
AF
Mouse functions
Use the mouse to switch between functions, three functions are available: ‘Zoom’, ‘Pan’, and
‘Selection’.
Mouse functions are also displayed in the Tips Bar. See, Tips Bar (page 62).
Table 2-1 Mouse Wheel functions
R
Function Action Description
Left-
Click and hold the left mouse button in order to pan within the
mouse Pan
D
graphic interface.
button
Rotate the mouse-wheel up to Zoom in, and rotate down to
Zoom out. Click the mouse-wheel once to enable the
Mouse
Zoom Measuring tool. See “Spatial Ruler” on page 41. Hold the
Wheel
mouse wheel and
drag to zoom on selected area.
Right-
Click on the right mouse button to select an area as well as
mouse Select
all its included field units.
button
45 February 5, 2020
GIS Functions > Tools Panels 2
Tools Panels
The Tools panel appears by pointing the mouse arrow on the right hand side of the graphic
view. Subsequently, the panel will disappear once the mouse arrow moves elsewhere on the
HCI. The Tools panel is context sensitive and will be different for each perspective.
Select the thumbnail icon to pin the panel to the HCI. See, Figure 2-17.
State Tools Panel

The State Tools panel allows you to modify the state of field instruments.
Three instrument states are possible.
• Acquisition- selected units will be put in ‘Acquisition’ state, ready to acquire seismic
data.
• Test - selected units will be put in ‘Test’ state. The Test state is used to run tests.
T
• Standby - selected units will be put in low-power mode in order to conserve energy
during periods of non-utilisation.
CAUTION
AF
Fields Units must be in Test mode in order to upgrade their firmware. See
Download View (page 401).
Thumbnail
R
D
Figure 2-17 State tools panel
Note In order to move from an Acquisition state to a Standby state (and vice-versa)
you must first put instruments in Test state.
46
GIS Functions > Tools Panels
Sensor Tools Panel

The Sensor/Instrument Tools panel allows you to select the type of instrument QC test to
launch.
Available tests depend on the type of instrument that is selected.
Check the “Show results for units in acqu. state” box to display test results.
If you click this button Test results will be displayed for units in Acquisition. However, these
will be the last registered test results for the instruments.
Launch View
Test Histogram
T
AF
R
D
Show test results

Figure 2-18 Sensor tools panel
The View Histogram button displays values for completed test results, see Histogram
Instrument View on page 358 and Histogram Sensor View on page 359.
47 February 5, 2020
GIS Functions > Tools Panels 2
You may modify the displayed results by changing the values in the ‘Chart Options’. For
example, the Min. and Max. values displayed, as well as the number of bars in your graph.
Note These values do not affect the test values stipulated in the Setup parameters.
T
AF Figure 2-19 Histogram example
For more information of instrument test and sensor test see Running tests (page 321).
Battery Tools Panel

R
D
Figure 2-20 Battery Tools Panel
The Battery tools panel allows you to set the programmed limit for the battery voltage using
the slider.
48
GIS Functions > Tools Panels
The battery icons are shown in green if the battery voltage is above the threshold, red
otherwise.
Figure 2-21 Battery icons
T
Seismonitor Tools Panel
The Seismonitor tools panel allows you to view in real-time activity detected by your field
AF
instruments. You can use the slider bar to select the sensitivity of your detection frequency.
Note The system must be in Acquisition state in order to register seismonitor data.
Slider bar
R
D
Figure 2-22 Seismonitor Tools
49 February 5, 2020
GIS Functions > Test Results - Quick View 2
Test Results - Quick View

This feature, new in 508XT V2.0, allows you to quickly see the latest test results simply by
hovering the mouse arrow over the instrument. Additionally, any instrument with failed test
results will be displayed in Red. Instruments for which the test result is not applicable will
appear in light blue.
In the example below, the results from the Gain tests are selected (a.). Therefore, when we
hover over an instrument we can quickly display the Test results (b.).
T
AF
a. b.
Figure 2-23 Test Results
R
The Test Results panel appears by pointing the mouse arrow on the top center of the graphic
view. Subsequently, the panel will disappear once the mouse arrow moves elsewhere on the
D
HCI. The Tools panel is context sensitive and will be different for each perspective.
Select the thumbnail icon to pin the panel to the HCI. See, Figure 2-17.
50
GIS Display elements > Link connectors
GIS Display elements

Link connectors
Link connectors are visible on the graphic interface. These indicate the connection between
2 links. For example if you have links with 4 FDU’s, the link connection will be visible every
4 FDUs.
Link
connector
T
AF
Figure 2-24 Link connector
R
Link Layer
The Link Layer view provides a zoom level that represents a link of FDU’s between two FM4
connectors. Zooming in will allow you to see the actual number of FDU’s in this link.
D
FDU Link FM4 Connectors
Figure 2-25 Link Layer View
51 February 5, 2020
GIS Display elements > Line Cuts 2
Line Cuts
Line cuts are indicated in the graphic interface as displayed in the diagram Figure 2-26.
All subsequent instruments will be greyed out to indicate the line cut.
Line
cut
T
AF Figure 2-26 Line cut
Select a Line
You can select an entire line by simply placing your cursor anywhere on the line and clicking
the left mouse button while holding the CTRL key on your keyboard. An orange circle is
displayed.
R
D
Figure 2-27 Click on a line
52
GIS Display elements > Background Image
Drag the mouse to the end of the line while holding the CTRTL button. This selects the entire
line.
Figure 2-28 Line selection
Background Image
This function allows you to load a file as a MAP for the GIS in geoviews.
T
AF
R
Figure 2-29 Background menu
D
Loading a Georeferenced image

After clicking on load Background item, select a file:
Figure 2-30 Select file
53 February 5, 2020
GIS Display elements > Background Image 2
Allowed files are:

• JCarnacGIS Data Type
• CSV
• MapGen files (WGS84 Datum)
Note If the file is ‘.tif’ type, it contains headers with geographic coordinates. If these
coordinates correspond to the loaded SPS file, the map is displayed in the
background.
Note If the file is NOT ‘.tif’ type, a file ‘.if’ must contain the geographic coordinates.
If the ‘.if’ file does not exist, the application will request that you enter the
geographic coordinates of the map.
To Load a Non Georeferenced Image
T
Follow the procedure below to enter the geographic coordinates in order to define a map.
1. Select “Load Non Georeferenced image”. Click Open and locate the image file you
wish to use.
First
AF
Point
(image)
R
D
Second
Point
(image)
Figure 2-31 Anchoring point definition
54
GIS Display elements > Background Image
2. Click on the First Point radio button. Then select the point designating the upper
left extremity of your image (First Point image).
3. On the GUI in the Geo view, click on a point on the interface (First Point view). This
point corresponds to the First point indicated on your image.
4. Click on ‘Second Point’ to indicate the second anchoring point on the image.
5. Click on the GUI in the Geo view, to indicate the limits of the second anchoring
point.
First
Point (View)
T
AF
R
Second
Point (View)
D
6. Click ‘OK’, the image is inserted in the background.
Figure 2-32 Map insertion example
55 February 5, 2020
GIS Display elements > Rotate Views 2
A file of type ‘.if’ is created on the client. In the panel, an item, labelled ‘Houston’ appears.
Figure 2-33
You may remove the image file by right-clicking on the label and selecting “Remove”.
T
Figure 2-34 Remove map
Rotate Views
AF
Use the Rotate function to rotate your workspace in 2D / 3D views. Select the directional
arrow and move your mouse to rotate your workspace. You can also use this function to pan
within your spread. Click within the circle and hold your mouse button in the direction you
wish to move.
R
Rotate
Workspace
D
Figure 2-35 Rotate workspace
56
GIS Display elements > Customised Labeling
Customised Labeling
The 508XT HCI allows you to modify the labels and display options for graphic display
options.
T
AFFigure 2-36 Modify Label options
Show / Hide Labeling

This option allows you to Show / Hide the selected label within the selected HCI view.
In the example below, the Show Label option has been selected for DSU1-508 Instruments.
R
Therefore these will appear labelled in the interface.
D
Figure 2-37 (Show) Labeling example
57 February 5, 2020
GIS Display elements > Customised Labeling 2
Modify Labels
This option allows you to select the information related to your instrument that you would
like to display in the label.
In the example below, the label of the instrument includes all of the elements selected in the
properties box.
T
AF
Figure 2-38 Modify Labeling properties
R
D
58
GIS Display elements > Customised Labeling
Label Color / Font

The 508XT HCI provides the possibility to modify the Font and Background that you display
for instrument labelling.
In the example below, we have modified the Background color as well as the Font color in
order to improve visibility.
T
AF
Figure 2-39 Label color / font modification example
R
D
59 February 5, 2020
Status Messages Panel > Customised Labeling 2
Status Messages Panel

508XT status messages may appear in the “Status Messages” panel at the foot of a window.
Status Messages View
Figure 2-40 Status Messages View
Settings Panel
T
It is possible to customize this panel by clicking on (Number of messages, duration,
sound, colour etc.).
AF
R
D
Figure 2-41 Settings Panel
60
System Status Bar > Customised Labeling
System Status Bar

This bar displays the status of the 508XT system.
Figure 2-42 System Status Bar
Table 2-2 System Status Bar Legend
Server508 Shows if the connection between the Client and the Server is OK or Not OK.
T
Green: the line is activated and data can communicate through the line. The
HCI topo or geo view displays the line.
AF
Field On Orange: after clicking Field OFF, there is a waiting time until the end of the
action.
Red: Field Off status, the line is deactivated and not displayed.
Operation On /
Shows if the Operation function is activated or not (able to shoot or not).
Off
R
Indicates if the VE464-DPG is connected to the Server508 and available for
VE464
Vibroseis operations.
D
Field Tester Indicates if the FT-508 is connected.
Data Harvester Indicates Indicates if the DH-508 is connected.
On - Indicates the current status of the system.

ON - Off Off @date - Indicates the date at which the system will sleep.
Test @date - Indicates the date and time for next scheduled tests.
61 February 5, 2020
System Status Bar > Tips Bar 2
Tips Bar
Located beside the Status Bar is the Tips Bar. This function, new in 508XT V2, provides you
tips on what actions are possible with your mouse and/or keyboard, depending on what
window is activate.
In the example below, the Tips Bar displays a list of shortcuts available using the keyboard.
T
Tips Bar AF Figure 2-43 Tips bar example
R
D
62
Working with Perspectives > Tips Bar
Working with Perspectives

The 508XT system uses the term “Perspective” to refer to a graphical view where you will
find useful information relating to your seismic acquisition mission.
The 508XT system proposes default Perspectives to help you configure the user interface.
Each perspective gathers a group of ‘Views’ corresponding to specific functionalities related
to the Perspectives.
The 508XT system also proposes a ‘Custom Perspective’ which gives you the possibility to
define your own graphical views.
1. Click on the ‘+’ to open the Perspective Selector.
T
Open
Perspective
AF Selector
Figure 2-44 Perspective Selector Button
2. The available Perspectives are displayed.

R
D
Figure 2-45 Perspective selector
63 February 5, 2020
Working with Perspectives > Tips Bar 2
3. In all Perspectives the user will find dedicated Views. In the example below, Views
are shown for the Dashboard Perspective.
T
AF
Figure 2-46 Dashboard Perspective - Views
Drag & Drop Functionalities

R
The 508 graphical interface offers the possibility to sort Perspectives & Views using Drag &
Drop functionalities. You can also ‘Open’ (left click on + symbol) perspectives as required.
D
64
Working with Perspectives > Working With Views
Working With Views

When a perspective is selected, several Views are proposed. The following actions are
allowable on each view:
• Resize panels by dragging the border of the view area
• Expand or Collapse the views horizontally or vertically.
• Cascade or Split views.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 2-47 Views Management – Classic view
The 508 system also provides the possibility to open several views using drag & drop to share
different information on the same screen. This allows you to customize the view to your
specific requirements.
65 February 5, 2020
Working with Perspectives > Working With Views 2
T
AF
Figure 2-48 Views Management - Custom View
R
For each Perspective, by clicking in the Show List icon, the system allows you to view the
list of open views and to navigate quickly to one of the open views.
D
Show
List
Figure 2-49 Show list function
66
Working with Perspectives > Working With Views
For each View, by right-clicking in the Title tab, the system offers the following functions:
Figure 2-50 Right -click functions
T
Table 2-3 Right-click function options
Close
AF
Close the selected view.
The size of the view is reduced and can appear or be moved anywhere in
Floating
the perspective.
Autohide
R
Maximize Open the views at its maximum size in the its graphical Area
D
In dockable mode, the window is fixed to a dock along any of the four
Dockable
borders of the active perspective.
67 February 5, 2020
Working with Perspectives > Working with tables 2
Working with tables

The 508XT System proposes Tables to better analyse field operations (VP, Instrument Tests,
etc).
The interface provides two types of tables:
• Static Table
• Dynamic Table
Static Tables
Static tables are used primarily for Instrument and Sensors Results. these tables contain only
one level of information.
Each View uses its own dedicated columns.
T
AFFigure 2-51 Static table example
R
D
68
Working with Perspectives > Working with tables
Locate on Other views

This function allows you to locate an instrument selected on a table in a graphical view. In
the example below, the instrument selected in the table, is visible on the field view. Select an
item by right-clicking on the instrument.
T
AF
R
Figure 2-52 Locate on other views
D
Double click inside the label box in order to make the location indicator disappear.
69 February 5, 2020
Dynamic Tables
This table is dedicated for Operation Table and Survey/Spread Setup management.
For each line, there’s the possibility to deploy a sub-table.
Dynamic Tables use a single scroll bar even if there are multiple levels of tables.
For each sub-table, specific columns are defined.
T
AF
Figure 2-53 Table Management – Dynamic Table
Customization
R
You may also customize tables by right-clicking on the column heads and clicking
‘Customize’.
This popup allows you to rearrange Column order, hide or show selected columns. Some
D
columns (in bold) are specific and cannot be removed.

The Paging panel allows you to activate or deactivates page management. The end user, can
select the number of lines/page (for printing).
Note This option is not available for the Setups tables.
70
The Status Line check-box allow you to show or hide the Line nb at the bottom of the panel.
It allows to optimize the graphic size.
T
AF
Figure 2-54 Customize table
Column Resize
R
The end user can adapt the width for each column by dragging the column side.
Column order change

D
Regardless of the customization setup, the end user still have the choice of swapping one or
several columns.
Column Sort
By clicking on one column, the system is able to sort the table in incremental or decremental
order.
Export table
By clicking on the export icon, the table can be saved in a .csv file.
You may also Export and Print instrument data. The export format is .CSV format.
Print function
The 508XT system allows the possibility to export or print the content of a table. It is possible
to print only a selection.
71 February 5, 2020
Click on the printer icon on the bottom right-hand side of the desired table.
Print
Icon
T
AF
R
D
Figure 2-55 Table Management – Print Table
72
Table 2-4 Print function Options
Print Service Determine the printer attached to the system.
Print Range Define if it prints the whole document or specific pages.
Copies Number of copies required.
Media Size Define the page size according the proposed list (A4, letter, etc…).
Source Define the paper location on the printer.
T
Orientation Define if the page is printed in landscape or portrait and reversed format.
Margins
Color appearance
AF
Define the print margin.
Select between black only or color (depending on Printer Type).
Sides Define how many spreadsheets per printed page and the layout.
Quality Define the print quality (Draft, Normal or High).

R
Job Attributes Determine the printing process and the end-user name.
D
73 February 5, 2020
Table Line management

This function is enabled only in the setup tables.
By right-clicking on a line of a table, the following menu appears:
T
AF
Figure 2-56 Table Line Management
Add Multiple Lines

R
Insert a defined number of lines (Nb of lines field). Possibility to define a step with specific
syntax. Example: “10/2” will add 10 lines with 2 steps on each line.
D
Figure 2-57 Apply Multiple Lines
74
When you hover over a table cell an information box will describe the type of accepted
syntax.
Figure 2-58 Accepted Syntax example
Modify selection
This function is enabled when several lines are selected then right-clicking. It allows you to
modify several lines at the same time.
T
AF
R
Figure 2-59 Modify selection
D
Copy and Paste

Allows you to Copy a line in a table then Paste it at the end of the same table.
Insert Before and After

Allows you to define a new line after or before the current line (user selection). It also allows
the possibility to Insert the line at a chosen place.
Delete
Allows you to Delete the selected lines.
Validate
A1FFFlows you to Apply to the Database the specific setup and cross check with other
Setups.
75 February 5, 2020
Working with Perspectives > Working With Icons 2
Cancel Modification
Allows you to escape from this situation to the latest without modification (unless you
pressed the APPLY button).
Working With Icons

The 508XT System uses several graphical icons to show you the element’s state.
The table below summarizes the definitions of available icons.
T
AF Figure 2-60 Icons
R
D
76
Working with Perspectives > Working With Icons
T
AF (Page intentionally blank)
R
D
77
Chapter
T
3 Setup Parameters
AF
This Chapter includes the Following Sections:
R
• Setups Overview (page 62)
• Configuration Setup (page 89)
• Instrument Setup (page 116)
D
• Survey Setup (page 121)

• Layout Setup (page 131)
• Operation Setup (page 146)
• Export Setup (page 213)
• VE464 Setup (page 236)
• VibOther Setup (page 277)

Setup Parameters
Overview >
Overview
The Setup interface allows you to define all parameters of the 508XT acquisition system.
The Setup interface is opened by selecting Setup in the Main menu
Open Setup
Search Tree Panel Detail Panel

field
T
AF
R
D
Problems Panel Console Panel
Figure 3-1 Setup Parameters
79 February 5, 2020
Setup Parameters
Overview > Help 3
Help
This opens a window which displays information about the installed system version.
Figure 3-2 HCI Software version
System Information
T
This view gathers information about the 508 Client and Server Machines.
AF
R
D
Figure 3-3 System Information
80
Setup Parameters
Overview > System Information
System Provides information about CPU type, Total number of CPU

Architecture Cores, and Operating System used by the current client Machine.
Execution
Gives the reference of JVM release used by the 508 Client.
Environment
Configuration Gives information about the end-user profile.
RAM Quantity of RAM memory used by the system and other

occupancy applications
T
Shared Memory Quantity of Shared memory used by the 508XT system versus the
Occupancy quantity allocated
CPU Load
AF Provides information about the CPU occupancy by all the running
processes on the Server machine.
Provides information about how many Threads

Nb threads
simultaneously used by the system
R
D
81 February 5, 2020
Setup Parameters
Overview > Setups Panel 3
Setups Panel
The Setup panel allows you to easily navigate to the parameters that you wish to configure.
Each Setup group contains a list of parameters.
Open or Close the key to expand or collapse the setup parameters.
T
Opened view
AF
R
D
Closed view
Figure 3-4 All Setups tree
82
Setup Parameters
Overview > Setups Panel
Parameter Details Panel

The Parameter details panel provides a space where you can configure the selected
parameter.
Only one family of parameters can be displayed at any one time in the details panel.
T
AF
R
Figure 3-5 Parameter details panel
D
Search Field
The Search Field allows you to quickly find one or several parameters according to their
name. In the example below, the term ‘output’ is used.
Figure 3-6 Search results
83 February 5, 2020
Setup Parameters
Overview > Setups Panel 3
Problems Panel
The 508XT Setup interface contains a process which verifies the coherence between
parameters.
In case of incoherence or error, the system will warn the end-user and will propose to modify
parameters or will propose a solution to the problem. Errors are indicated by the symbol in
the Problems Panel, see Console Panel (page 84).
By clicking in the message, you can directly access information describing the problem.
Example:
In the following example, the end-user has not ‘Applied’ the modifications in the Point Code
setup.
A list of messages appears in the Problems Panel to inform you where the problem is
(Sensor Type Setup). The system also provides a description of the problem.
T
AF
Figure 3-7 Problems Panel
Console Panel
R
The Console Panel provides a brief description of all actions in the modification of Setup
parameters.
D
Figure 3-8 Console
84
Setup Parameters
Overview > Parameter Check
Parameter Check
The Setup interface contains a process which verifies the coherence between parameters.
In case of incoherence or error, the system will warn the end-user and will propose to modify
parameters or will propose a solution to the problem. Errors or warnings are indicated by
different symbols:
Error
Error Edited
Error with Quick Fix Available
Error with Quick Fix Edited
Warning
T
Warning Edited
AF Warning with Quick Fix Available
Warning with Quick Fix Edited
Edited
Figure 3-9 Legend of icons

R
D
Figure 3-10 Quick fix window
Note The Quick Fix pop-up proposes a solution.
85 February 5, 2020
Setup Parameters
Overview > Applying Setups 3
Applying Setups
T
AF
R
D
Setup
Buttons
Figure 3-11 Setup buttons
Apply
If a parameter is modified, the APPLY button sends the new values of the parameters into
the database. If your changes are applied successfully, a message will appear in the Console.
Note In some cases the Apply button will be greyed out, this includes; Operation On,
VE464 in Auto mode or incoherent setups.
Load
The LOAD button allows you to load from local computer a file initially saved by the
system.
The data format of the file to be loaded is XML.
86
Setup Parameters
Overview > Applying Setups
The corresponding parameters will be changed.

The system waits for an APPLY to finally load the parameters into the database of the
system.
The 508XT system also allows you to import setups for a particular section, ‘Sensor Type’ in
the example below. Or you may Load setups for your entire operation.
Figure 3-12 Load Setups
T
Save
The SAVE button allows you to save on local computer the set of parameters selected.
AF
The data format of the file saved is XML.
By default the name is <SetupName>- DDMMYY-HHMM-PM or AM format.xml, but it
could be changed at any time by the end user.
The system asks whether you would like to save ‘All setups’ or only those concerning the
section in which you have made your modifications.
R
D
Figure 3-13 Save button
Undo
The UNDO button clears the last action.
Redo
The REDO button repeat the last action.
87 February 5, 2020
Setup Parameters
Overview > Applying Setups 3
Reset
The RESET button restores the table as it was before you last clicked on Apply.
Reset button
T
AF Figure 3-14 Reset button
R
D
88
Setup Parameters
Configuration Setup > Applying Setups
Configuration Setup
This section describes each setup parameter in the Configuration Setup section.
T
AF
Figure 3-15 Configuration Setups
Note Certain setup parameters can only be applied during Field OFF or Operation
R
OFF.
D
89 February 5, 2020
Setup Parameters
Configuration Setup > Crew 3
Crew
Crew Setup Panel

Type Value Units
[Crew Name; Line Configuration; Sample Rate; Low
Parameters Cut Filter; High cut Filter; Annotations; Time Out;
Panel None
Default Seis Gain; Autonomous Sensor Type; SPS
File; Reshot file]
The Crew Setup panel allows you to define general characteristics of the survey.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 3-16 Crew Setup View
90
Setup Parameters
Configuration Setup > Crew
Crew Name
Type Value Units
Parameters User choice: 16
Characters None
characters max
The Crew Name entered in this field is used along with the Device Name created by the
Export window to record the Recording Entity Name field in the Tape Label block for
Revision 2.1-compliant SEGD files.
Line Configurations
Type Value Units
Parameters User choice: 16
Characters None
T
characters max
The Line Configuration field indicates the date and time of the latest line configuration
parameters registered by the system.
AF
This field is especially useful when working with autonomous field units or when
connecting a new CX-508 to the line.
Autonomous field units (as well as newly connected field units) must reference the latest
Line Configuration date to ensure they are configured with the same parameters as those
registered by the system.
R
Sample Rate
Type Value Units
Parameters
D
List Box [0.5;1;2;4] ms

Select the sampling interval to be used on all traces.
Low Cut Filter Type

Type Value Units
[None; DC Offset
Parameters removed by Server;
List Box Hz
0.15625; 0.3125; 1.25;
2.5]
Select the desired low-cut frequency. If you wish to remove the filter, select None.
91 February 5, 2020
Setup Parameters
High Cut Filter Type

Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box [8N_LIN, 8N_MIN] None
XT
Each 508 channel has a built-in Digital Signal Processor that performs high-cut filtering,
depending on the option selected in this setup window.
“N” stands for the Nyquist Frequency, i.e. half the sampling frequency. The available filters
have a -3 dB point at 0.8 times the Nyquist Frequency, i.e. 0.4 times the sampling frequency:
- 100 Hz @ 4-ms.
- 200 Hz @ 2-ms.
- 400 Hz @ 1-ms.
- 800 Hz @ 0.5-ms.
T
They feature a slope of about 370 dB/octave. The pulse response ringing, however, decays
slowly. AF
The attenuation is at least 120 dB for all frequencies above the Nyquist Frequency,
preventing any aliasing effect.
The 508XT allows you to choose between:
- linear-phase type or
- minimum-phase type.
The amplitude spectrum does not depend much on the type of filter (linear or minimum
R
phase), unlike the phase spectrum.
About Linear Phase & Minimum Phase

D
Linear
This type of filter is ideal as far as phase considerations are concerned, as all the frequencies
are delayed by the same amount. This delay is set to zero in the 508XT.
In return, this kind of filter has a pulse response with leading ringing (“precursors”) as well
as lagging ringing (actually, the pulse response is symmetrical with respect to time 0).
Minimum Phase
The minimum phase type is causal, i.e. its pulse response, much like analog filters, starts at
time 0, peaks and then rings (no ringing prior to the peak).
The delay, however, somewhat depends on the input frequency.
92
Setup Parameters
Annotations
Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box [Enable, Disable] None
If auxiliary traces are used to record vibrator motion signals, this option enables the position
of each vibrator to be recorded in the Trace Header of those auxiliary traces.
If the actual source COG is not available at the moment the SEGD file is generated, this
option determines whether or not the system is allowed to update this field when the data is
available later, during the Time out delay.
Note This function is not yet activated.
Time Out (s)
T
Type Value Units
Parameters [0...600] Default value
Integer s
AF 30
The time out corresponds to the maximum waiting time for information concerning a
vibrators position.
Default Seis Gain

Type Value Units
R
Parameters
List Box [0dB, 12dB] dB
Used to set the default gain used for the seismic acquisition. The selected gain corresponds
to the one used by the FDU-508 as soon as they enter in acquisition mode.
D
Gain Code Input Scale FDU-508 DSU1-508

g1 1600 mV 0 dB 5 m/s2
g2 400 mV 12 dB
Note The selected gain (0dB or 12dB) information is sent to the connected CX-508
units when setting the state of the field units to “Acquisition” (See Tools Panel
on page 111). It is not possible to have different gain within the same spread.
93 February 5, 2020
Setup Parameters
Autonomous Sensor Type

Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box [S1] dB
Indicates the sensor type to be used for autonomous traces. See, Sensor Type Panel on
page 122.
SPS Files
The 508XT system supports SPS files Rev. 0 and Rev 2.1 data format. For detailed
information on SPS files, see the 508XT Data Format Manual.
Type Value Units
Parameters [Process Type; Load
Panel None
T
SPS; From SPS]
Load SPS file

AF
From the SPS files section select Process Type “From SPS”. Then click ‘Load SPS files’.
The following window is displayed.
The process types contained in the SPS files will be applied to process the data.
R
D
Figure 3-17 Load SPS files window
The swath is generally made up of 3 SPS input files:

• RPS for Receivers Location (SPS R)
• SPS for Sources Location (SPS S)
• XPS for relation between Source point and group of Receiver point (Active Spread) (SPS
X)
Browse to the location of the RPS, SPS, and XPS files.
94
Setup Parameters
Select the name of the Swath to which the SPS files will be applied. Indicate the Gain (0dB,
or 12dB) that will be applied to the spread.
Swath
Type Value Units
Parameters
List box [Swath defined] None
Defines which swath will be updated.
Default Gain
Type Value Units
Parameters
List box [0dB; 12dB] None
T
Indicates the gain chosen for the entirety of the spread, when loading SPS files. The selected
gain in this window is only performing a “check” with the Default Seis gain selected in crew
setup (see Default Seis Gain on page 93). If the gain is different than the one currently
Note
AF
applied in the crew setup, an error message will be displayed prior shooting.
It is not possible to have different gains for different parts of the spread. The only
way to change the gain of the FDU-508 in acquisition is to change the Default
Seis gain in crew setup.
User Defined Process Type

R
The “Process Type” associated with each shot determines which type of seismic signal to
generate (depending on the associated “Acquisition Type”) and which type of processing to
perform prior to recording the seismic data acquired.
D
Figure 3-18 User defined Process types
Once you have selected the process type to apply, click the ‘Load SPS files’ button. Select
the location of your SPS files.
For detailed information on each process type, see Process Type (page 147).
95 February 5, 2020
Setup Parameters
From SPS
Figure 3-19 Process Type - From SPS
User Defined
T
AF
R
Figure 3-20 Process Type - User Defined
Reshot file
D
Allows to reshoot VP via an SPS-S file associated to the swath containing the VP to reshoot.
Source points are handled as follows:
- For all source points included in the file, a VP will be created with a point index
incremented. For instance, if the last VP done on a source point has a point index of 12, a
new VP will be created with a point index set to 13. The state of the new VP is "not done”.
96
Setup Parameters
IMPORTANT
To be sure this list is done as a reshot, the point index must be set to 9 in the SPS
file. If the point index is not set to 9, the source point will be ignored.
- If the source point does not already exist in the selected swath, the source point will be
ignored.
- If the VP with the higher point index associated to the point index is already in "not done"
state, no VP will be created.
- After applying the SPS-S file, a diagnostic will be displayed indicating if some source
points have been ignored.
To load an SPS file,
1. Click Browse to navigate to the SPS-S file.
T
2. Use the drop-down list to indicate the Swath to associate to the VP to reshoot.
3. Click Load. AF
R
D
97 February 5, 2020
Setup Parameters
Configuration Setup > Swath 3
Swath
Where multiple sets of seismic lines will be shot, each set is referred to as a “swath”. A swath
indicates the edge of the survey area.
This setup window allows you to create or delete the swaths for each set of lines to shoot.
Swath Setup Panel
T
AF
Figure 3-21 Swath Setup Panel
Type Value Units

R
Parameters [Swath Nb; Swath Name;
Table None
Comments; Visible]
D
Swath Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1..9999999] None
Identification number assigned to the set of seismic lines to shoot. Typically, this is the set of
receiver positions and source points depicted in a set of SPS R-, S- and X-files you import
into the System.
98
Setup Parameters
Configuration Setup > Test
Swath Name
Type Value Units
Parameters
Characters 16 characters None
Name identification defined by the user. The Swath name will appear in observer reports.
The SEGD might be sorted by Swath name, in this case a corresponding Swath name folder
will be created automatically.
Comment
Type Value Units
Parameters
Description of the swath defined by the user.
T
Visible AF Type Value Units
Parameters
Checked box [True, False] None
Check this box if you want to see the points which are defined in a particular Swath. If this
box is checked, the points in the selected swath will be visible in the topological or
geographic views.
R
Test
This setup allows you to define one or several lists of tests.
Tests defined in this section are used by the Planning (page 104). You may request a
D
record of the data generated into SEGD format.

Characteristic of test data:
• The data recorded is not compressed.
• The Record Length of the test data is determined automatically by the system.
• The results of the tests are available in the Numeric View in the Field Perspective or in
some of the Graphical views.
Select the desired test (from the Test Type pull-down menu) and options. Click Apply to
activate your changes.
99 February 5, 2020
Setup Parameters
Configuration Setup > Test 3
Test
Recorded Auxiliary Description
Type
T
AF
R
Multi Tests Absolute Spread

D
Figure 3-22 Test Setup
Test Setup Panel

Type Value Units
Parameters
Panel [TestType1.. TestType n] None
The Test Setup perspective allows you to predefine a set of tests to be performed manually
or planned in the Planning on page 104.
Multi Tests
Several tests (field/instrument) may be programmed at the same time. Multi tests will be run
in consecutive order. The name of the Multi Test may be customized in the test setup tab.
100
Setup Parameters
Note A Multi test must contain at least one seismic trace (field tests cannot be run with
only auxiliary tabs).
Test Name (tab title)

Type Value Units
Parameters
User defined name of the tests to be performed.
Test Type
Type Value Units
[Field Noise, Field Resistance, Field
T
Parameters Leakage, Field Tilt, Field Distortion,
List box Field Impulse, Instr. Noise, Instr. None
AF Gain, Instr. Phase, Instr. CMRR, Instr.
Distortion, Instr. Pulse ]
Select the type of test to run from the drop-down list.
Note Certain tests depend on the type of unit being used. For example, Field Gravity
cannot be applied to an FDU-508.
Recorded
R
Type Value Units
Parameters
Check box [True] None
D
Check this box if you wish to generate a SEGD file for the corresponding test.
Auxiliary Description
Type Value Units
Parameters
Table [Defined Auxiliary] None
Specifies which Auxiliary to test, in the same conditions as seismic traces. Auxiliaries are
defined in the Auxiliary (page 138).
101 February 5, 2020

Setup Parameters
Configuration Setup > Test 3
Absolute Spread
Type Value Units
Parameters [Line Name; Point Nb Begin;
Table Integer
Point Nb End]
The Absolute Spread refers to the specific lines and receiver positions to be tested.
Note With a rectangular spread, there is an easier way of specifying the lines and
receiver positions to be tested: select the desired units in the graphic view, then
choose and start the desired test with the buttons available in the main window.
Note: In Sensor tests, auxiliary channels are not tested (regardless of whether or not
they are included in the spread). In Instrument tests, auxiliary channels can be
tested (you have to specify a list of aux channels to be tested).
T
Note: If overscaling arises during the acquisition of the test signal (in an Instrument or
Sensor test), no result is available (N/A) for that test.
AF
Field Tests
Field Noise
Field noise signals (µV for FDU-508 or µm/s2 for DSU-508) are detected by the geophones
and measured by performing data acquisition with no Firing Order.
R
Field Resistance
This test performs a measurement (Ω) of resistance on the Input Geophone.
This test allows you to see if geophones are connected or not.
D
Field Leakage
This test displays the global leakage resistance (MΩ) between the input conductors of the
receiver link and the earth.
Field Tilt
The Field Tilt test (% for FDU-508 or ° for DSU-508) is sensitive to a number of faults
relating to the sensors.
The test results will be affected by anomalies on cut-off frequencies, damping, sensitivity,
distortion (sticking, friction, etc.) and tilt (geophone not properly planted).
Field Distortion
The Field Distortion test is used to check the seismic channel of an DSU1-508 for linear
response (input filter and ADC converter).
102
Setup Parameters
Field Impulse
This test is used to record the response of the seismic channel to a pulse (one sample long).
Instruments Tests
Instrument Noise
(µV) During this test, the channel input is shorted via an internal resistor. Geophones are not
connected.
Instrument Gain
(%) This test returns the maximum error in amplitude. Geophones are not connected. The
built-in generator of the FDU is used as input to the channel under test.
Instrument Phase
T
(° Degree) Response of the instrument channel to a pulse (one sample long).
Instrument Distortion
AF
(dB) The built-in generator of the FDU is used as input to the channel under test.
Instrument CMRR
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio. Expresses the ability of a device to reject the effect of a
voltage that is applied simultaneously to both input terminals.
R
Instrument Pulse
(dB) This test is used to record the response of the instrument channel to a pulse (one sample
long). Not applicable to a DSU.
D

Setup Parameters
Configuration Setup > Planning 3
Planning
The 508XT system can be programmed to automatically run field equipment tests. The
Planning Setup allows you to plan field equipment tests. Up to 24 tests per day (24 hours)
can be planned. Planned tests must first be defined in Test on page 99.
Planning Setup Panel

Type Value Units
Date [First Working Day] dd/mm/yyyy
Parameters
Time [Event Start Time] Time (24hr)
Event [Event Name] None
T
AF
Working
days
R
Test Time
Test Type
D
Working
hours
Figure 3-23 Planning setup
Time Zone
Indicates the currently specified Time Zone.
Enable Start Date

Type Value Units
Parameters
Date / dd/mm/yyyy
Indicates the first scheduled day of tests and production.
104
Setup Parameters
Configuration Setup > Planning
Enable Working Hours

This function only applies to autonomous field units. Working hours, along with all other
setup parameters, will be loaded onto autonomous field units upon initial setup.
Field units connected to the line will not take into account these working hours.
Type Value Units
Check box [Yes; No] None
Parameters Working Days [Check Box] Days
Wake Time [Event Start Time] Time (24hr)
Sleep Time [Event End Time] Time (24hr)
Events Table
T
Lists the tests defined in the Test setup,
AF Type Value Units
Parameters [defined Test Type;
List box None
Switch On, Switch Off]
Indicates the list of tests on a typical day.
• Switch On: start the 508XT system on the indicated time.
• Switch Off: stop the 508XT system on the indicated time.
R
You may schedule a new test time by clicking in the Test Time box and adding a new row.
Then indicate the time for the scheduled test.
Note Tests can only be scheduled during the quarter of the hour (00, 15, 30, 45
D
minutes).
add a new row
Figure 3-24 Add new test time

Setup Parameters
Configuration Setup > Geodesy 3
Geodesy
Geodesy Panel
The Geodesy view is used to specify the geodetic parameters of the survey such as Datum,
Datum-shift and Projection. This manual does not provide information on the basics of
geodesy and positioning (however Sercel may answer any question regarding those
subjects). Several web sites, ample scientific literature and company training sessions are
available that make it possible to understand the necessary fundamentals.
508XT has been developed referring to the OGP Surveying and Positioning Committee
recommendations and database. The OGP (International Association of Oil & Gas
Producers) has been formed partly from the former EPSG (European Petroleum Survey
Group):
http://www.epsg.org/.
T
The geodetic parameters should be provided by the Client and carefully checked. Any error
on a sign or a value may give rise to huge positioning discrepancies (several hundreds
meters). AF
A test point has to be provided as well. The 508XT GIS module can be used to check the
transformation between the WGS84 Satellite System and the local system.
The Geodesy setup includes several tabs.
Note that fields in the geodesy tab can only be accessed by first clicking an Edit button, and
confirming. This is to avoid any unwanted mistakes in this critical information
The Geodesy tab lets you enter:
R
• Coordinate Reference System code or name, so as to initialize all the geodetic parameters
at once.
• The Datum panel contains both datum (spheroid) and datum-shift information for
D
conversion from the local system to the GPS reference system (WGS84).
• The Projection panel is used to set the projection parameters.
106
Setup Parameters
Configuration Setup > Geodesy
T
AF
R
D
Figure 3-25 Geodesy overview panel
CRS
A CRS is a combination of:
• a datum definition;
• a projection definition;
• datum shift parameters, from the given datum to WGS84, provided it is available in the
EPSG database.

Setup Parameters
A CRS can be selected by its name in the list, or by giving an EPSG number (hit the “Get
from EPSG code” button). you can also filter to select it quickly.
Figure 3-26 CRS
Datum Parameters
T
In order to locate a point on the earth you need to know its coordinates and the geodetic
DATUM.
A Datum is defined with the following parameters:
•
•
Datum name.
AF
Semi-major Axis: allowable range 0.001 to 99999999.999 m.
• Inverse Flattening: allowable range 0.0000001 to 9999.9999999
A datum can be selected by its name in the list
We can do a filter to select it quickly.
R
If your datum is not in the list, but you have all the parameters to create it, you can select
“User defined” in the list, to create your own: this will reset all the fields in the panel.
D
Figure 3-27 Datum
108
Setup Parameters
Projection
This setup is used to enter the projection parameters. A projection is a method of representing
the surface of a part of the Earth on a plane. It is necessary for creating maps and displaying
2D views. Any map projection distorts the surface. The type and parameters are usually
defined by geodesists to minimize such distortion regarding the area.
It will update the P2/94 record H0140 to H0199.
T
AF
R
Figure 3-28 Projection
D
Table 3-1 (page 109) does not list all existing Projection types but the most used in
the World. Sercel is able to support a new Projection if necessary. This list refers to the OGP/
EPSG Guidance Note Number 7, “Coordinate Conversions and Transformations including
formulas”.
Table 3-1 Projection Table
Projection Specific parameters

UTM Hemisphere and zone (1 to 60)
TM (Transverse Mercator) Hemisphere
Mercator One Parallel Scale factor at natural origin (Equator)
Mercator Two Parallels Latitude of 1st standard parallel
Lambert One Parallel Latitude of natural origin (1st standard parallel)

Setup Parameters
Projection Specific parameters

Lambert Two Parallels Latitudes of 1st and 2nd standard parallels
Latitude and longitude of projection center

Hotine Oblique Mercator Azimuth of initial line
Angle from Rectified to Skewed grid
Latitude and longitude of projection center

Oblique Mercator Azimuth of initial line
Angle from Rectified to Skewed grid
Longitude of origin
Polar Stereographic (variant A)
Scale at natural origin
Latitude of natural origin
T
Polar Stereographic (variant B) Latitude of standard parallel
False Easting and False Northing
Latitude of natural origin

AF
Polar Stereographic (variant C) Latitude of standard parallel
Easting and Northing at false origin
Stereographic (Oblique) Latitude and longitude of natural origin
NZMG (New Zealand Map Grid) Latitude of 1st and 2nd parallels
Skew angle and initial line bearing (similar to Hotine
RSO (Rectified Skew Orthomorphic)
R
Oblique Mercator)
• Orientation: either North or South hemisphere, required if a transverse Mercator

projection is used.
D
• Zone: used with the UTM projection (60 zones, numbered from 1 to 60).
• Projection name: can be user-defined.
The required parameters depend on the Projection type. Usually, we find the following:
• Latitude of grid origin and Longitude of grid origin: Geographical coordinates of the
point of origin of the projection (datum). The longitude of grid origin is also known as
Central Meridian.
• False easting and False northing: plane coordinates of the point of origin of the
projection.
• Scale factor: the scale factor of the projection (no unit). UTM scale factor is 0.9996 for
instance. The value is usually around the unit (1).
110
Setup Parameters
Tools Panel
This panel allows you to
• Enter test point coordinates
• Do a conversion
Conversions
In this panel you can test point coordinates. Enter valid coordinates in any of pair of fields,
and click “Convert”. All other coordinate fields will be populated (projected point, local
datum point, WGS84 point).
T
AF
R
Figure 3-29 Conversions
D

Setup Parameters
Test Points
T
AF
R
D
Figure 3-30 Test Points
112
Setup Parameters
Area of Use
T
AF Figure 3-31 Area of Use
This panel gives you a quick indication on where your datum and projections areas are on a
world map. This stems from EPSG information about the areas of use.
In the example above: the datum was WGS84, so the area is the whole world (blue
rectangle); the projection is North America (see area bounds above), shown as a pink
rectangle on the map.
R
The system may warn you if both areas do not intersect at all.
Note that area bounds can only be seen if the “Advanced mode” is toggled on.
D

Setup Parameters
Configuration Setup > Preferences 3
Preferences
This section allows you to specify visualisation preferences within the graphic interfaces.
T
Figure 3-32 Configuration Preferences
Preferences Setup Panel

AF Type Value Units
[Collapse Survey Gap; Enable
Source Points in Topographic
Parameters Model; Vibrator Track Length
Panel None
(min); GIS Topo Background
R
Color, GIS Topo Grid Color;
Concentrators Positioning]
D
Collapse Survey Gap

Type Value Units
Parameters
Check box [True; False] None
In the Topo view, if selected, this function allows you to NOT display empty lines. Therefore
you will only view lines with instruments or sensors. Note you must be in Field Off status
before activating this function.
Enable Source Points in Topographic Model

Type Value Units
Parameters
This function allows you to view/not view source point lines in the Topographic model
views.
114
Setup Parameters
Configuration Setup > Preferences
Vibrator track Length

Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1...240] Minutes
In any geographic (GEO) views, if selected, this option will show the path of the vibrator,
during the last number of minutes indicated.
T
AF
Figure 3-33 Vibrator Track Length example
GIS Topo Background color

This function allows you to select the background color of your interface by selecting on a
color pallet.
R
GIS Topo Grid color
This function allows you to select the grid color in Topographic views.
You may choose between:
D
• White (default)
• Black
• Grey
Concentrators Positioning
Type Value Units
Parameters
Panel [Theoretical; GPS] None
This option allows you to choose to view the Theoretical postion of the CX-508 (according
to the SPS file) or to view the actual position of the CX-508 (GPS).

Setup Parameters
Instrument Setup > LRC 3
Instrument Setup
LRC
This option allows you to define the setup for the LRC antennas.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 3-34 LRC setup
Radio
Wireless Channel
Type Value Units
Parameters [Channel 1 ;
List Box Channel 6 ; Channel
Channel 11 ]
This parameter indicates the wireless channel where the LRC will connect. In order to avoid
interference, it is recommended to use a Wireless channel that is not used by other
equipment, e.g. WTU.
116
Setup Parameters
Instrument Setup > LRC
CAUTION
If you are using LRC with a WTU ensure that the channel assigned to the LRC is
different from the channel assigned to the WTU.
For example:
• WTU: Channel 1 (Wifi on 2.4GHz)
• WTU: Channel 11 (Pathfinder)
• LRC: Channel 6 (Pathfinder)
The diagram below explains the corresponding frequency range in detail.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 3-35 Frequency spectrum
Wireless Crew ID
Type Value Units
Parameters [Configuration A:
List Box Configuration B: None
Configuration C]
This parameter associates a Configuration ID to a crew working on a specific bandwidth.
CAUTION
Ensure to use different Crew ID between WTU and LRC.

Setup Parameters
Instrument Setup > LRC 3
Regulation Standard
Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box [FCC/IC; CE] None
Indicates whether the LRC is compliant with FCC/IC or CE conformity standards for
electromagnetic interference.
GPS Mode
Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box [Stationary; Mobile] None
When configured to operate in the Stationary mode (default), the GPS receiver calculates
and locks-in its current location. While configured to operate in the Mobile mode (not yet
T
available), the GPS receiver will continuously re-acquire its position and keep accurate time
while it is in motion.AF
State of Health
Battery Threshold
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [0.01 to 999.99] Volts
R
Indicates the programmed limit for battery voltage before an alarm is triggered.
SOH Refresh Period

D
Type Value Units

Parameters
List Box [30; 60; 90; 120] Minutes
This parameter indicates the frequency at which State of Health data will be sent to the SCI-
508.
Note: SoH data will be sent immediately if there is a change if an alarm is triggered. If there
is no change in SoH data, SoH information will be sent every X minutes in order to confirm
the proper operation of instruments.
Storage Threshold
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1 to 100] %
Indicates the programmed limit for storage capacity (%) before an alarm is triggered.
118
Setup Parameters
Instrument Setup > LRC
The following table describes the SoH results for individual field units.
Table 3-2 SoH Description
SoH for CX-508 SoH for Field Unit
Auto-tests result (aggregate of all CX-508 Auto-tests result (aggregate of all field units
auto-tests results) auto-tests results)
Synchronization state Synchronization state
Battery warning Change state to acquisition state (ACQ)
Identification result, including a summary

Storage occupancy warning
description of the segment (unique key)
LRC-508 state (if LRC is connected to this Instrument tests result (aggregate of all field
T
CX-508) units instrument test results for all channels)
Sensor tests result (aggregate of all field units

Field units topology
AF sensor test results for all channels)
Noise alarm (ambient noise above a threshold

during a given period)
Noise Alarm
R
Analog Threshold
Type Value Units
Parameters
D
Integer [1 to 1000000] µV
This parameter indicates the analog noise limit in µV at which an alarm will be triggered.
Digital Threshold
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1 to 1000000] µm.s-2
This parameter indicates the digital noise limit in µm.s-2 at which an alarm will be triggered.

Setup Parameters
Instrument Setup > Harvester 3
Harvester
This option allows you to select whether to Harvest from the Single Concentrator CX-508
connected to the DH-508. Or to harvest data from the Full Autonomous Segment, i.e. from
All CX-508 connected on the autonomous line.
T
AFFigure 3-36 Data Harvester setup
IMPORTANT
Please note, this is the only parameter that will determine how data is harvested.
R
Harvest Method cannot be defined via the Data Harvester (DH-508).
Harvest Method Panel

D
Type Value Units

Parameters [Single Concentrator; Full
List Box None
Autonomous Segment]
Allows you to define how DH-508 will harvest data from:
• Single Concentrator - harvest from the Single CX-508 Concentrator connected to the
DH-508.
• Full Autonomous Segment - connect to a single CX-508 concentrator and harvest data
from All CX-508 connected on the autonomous line.
120
Setup Parameters
Survey Setup > Sensor Type
Survey Setup
This section is used to provide information about the prospect area where the crew is working
and the type of equipment being used.
T
Figure 3-37 Survey setup
Sensor Type
AF
When sensor tests must be performed, the electrical characteristics will not necessarily be the
same across the entire spread and therefore it may be pointless to apply the same resistance,
tilt (pulse response) and noise test limits everywhere.
With this in mind, the 508XT system allows several sets of limits to be specified, each one
R
appropriate to a particular sensor type (max. 9). It is then sufficient to define the zones in
which each type of sensor can be found, and the system will automatically apply the relevant
limit for each measurement.
D
Figure 3-38 Sensor Type

Setup Parameters
Survey Setup > Sensor Type 3
Sensor Type Panel

Type Value Units
Parameters [Sensor; Label; Resistance Min;
Panel Resistance Max; Tilt; Noise; None
Leakage; SegdCode]
This section allows you to define the parameters relating to the different sensors in your
survey.
Sensor
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1 to N] None
T
This field identifies the type of sensor. The number will be referenced in the Point Code
(page 125) setup. AF
R
Figure 3-39 Sensor
D
Label
Type Value Units
Parameters
Characters [16 characters] None
Used to Identify the Sensor Type.
Ex: “Geophone” or “Hydrophone”, or “Vertical ACC”, or “Xline ACC” or “Inline ACC”.
Resistance Min. / Max.

Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [200...9999999999] Ohm
Upper and lower limit for the sensor Resistance. Any channel with a sensor impedance
falling outside the range specified in the Min. and Max. fields is reported at fault in sensor
views. The sensor Resistance considers the whole string of sensors resistance.
122
Setup Parameters
Survey Setup > Sensor Type
Tilt
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [0...100] %, °
Maximum geophone tilt percentage.
Alert threshold in the display of Sensor Tilt test results.
Tilt is given in % (percentage) for FDU, and ° (degree) for DSU
Noise
Type Value Units
Parameters
Float [0.01 to 999.99] µV, µm/s2
T
Maximum RMS noise level. Alert threshold in the display of Sensor Noise test results.
Measured in µV for FDU and in µm/s2 for DSU.
Leakage
AF Type Value Units
Parameters
Float with 2 decimals [0.01 to 999.99] M Ω
Alert threshold in the display of Sensor Leakage test results. The Leakage test measures the
global leakage resistance between the seismic channel and the earth ground.
R
D

Setup Parameters
Survey Setup > Sensor Type 3
SEGD Code
Type Value Units
[0 : Not Defined
1: Hydrophone
2 : Geophone Vertical
3 : Geophone Horizontal In Line
Parameters 4 : Geophone Horizontal Cross Line
List Box None
5 : Accelerometer Horizontal Other
6 : Accelerometer Vertical
7 : Accelerometer In Line
8 : Accelerometer Cross Line
9 : Accelerometer Horizontal Other]
Allows you to define the SEGD Code specified for the Sensor. The code is written in the
T
Trace Header Extension.
AF
Figure 3-40 SEGD Code
R
D
124
Setup Parameters
Survey Setup > Point Code
Point Code
Some applications require the use of different type of Sensors within the same spread.
The Point Code setup allows you to define several sensors at the same location.
In the example below, the Transition zone equipped with 2 kinds of Sensors.
Zone
Zone Zone
Geophone +
Hydrophone Geophone
Hydrophone
T
S2 S1
S1+S2
AF Transition Zone
Figure 3-41 Point Code example
Note Point Code setup parameters can only be applied during Field Off.
R
D

Setup Parameters
Survey Setup > Point Code 3
Point Code Panel

Type Value Units
Parameters [Point Code#, Sensor Type,
Panel None
Trace Edition]
T
AF Figure 3-42 Point Code Setup
Point Code #
Type Value Units
R
Parameters
Integer [1...32] None
Used to define the point code number. Unique code for each Point Code. At least 1 point code
must be declared in the system.
D
Sensor Type
Type Value Units
Parameters
Defined Characters [Sn, +] n stands for Sensor Index None
Used to define the Sensor Index or group of Sensor Indexes.
To define only one type of sensor: Sn
To define a group of several sensor: Sn+Sn
Ex:
S1: Geophone
S1+S2: Geophone+Hydrophone
S6+S7+S8: Group of 3 accelerometers
126
Setup Parameters
Survey Setup > Survey
Trace Edition
Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box [No Edition, Mute, Outstanding] None
Used to define the status of the Receiver Point
• No Edition - Receiver Point will have a normal status
• Mute - Receiver point will be declared Mute (trace zeroed by the system)
• Outstanding - Receiver point will be declared as Outstanding in SEGD file (zeroed by
the 508 system, but will be replaced by Seismic Data from another system (e.g. trace from
WTU-508 with a DCM-508 system)
Survey
T
To determine the crew’s prospect area, you must indicate the start and end points of the lines
for each swath, as well as any gaps caused by obstacles.
To define survey parameters click on the Survey panel. Note that a tab is available for each
AF
swath name you have created in the Swath (page 98) panel.
The survey has 2 graphical representations:
• Topographic view: each Receiver Point defined by Line Number and Stake Number.
• Geographic view: each Receiver Point defined by Easting, Northing and Elevation
coordinates.
Geographic details concerning the selected section on the left-hand side of the window are
R
displayed on the right-hand side of the window.
Survey Selected
D
Parameters Section Details
Figure 3-43 Survey Setup panel

Setup Parameters
Survey Setup > Survey 3
Survey Panel
Type Value Units
Parameters [Swath#, Line Name, Receiver Section,
Panel None
Easting, Northing, Elevation, Point Code]
This section allows to manually define the Topographic view for the Receivers in each
Swath.
Swath
Type Value Units
Table 1st level:
[Line Name, Receiver Section]
T
Table 2nd Level:
Parameters [Point Nb begin, Point Nb end, Increment, Point Code]
Table None
Table 3rd level:
[Point Nb, Point Index, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Point
AFCode]
[Line Name, Receiver Section]
This is the name given to the Swath in the Swath (page 98).
Line Name
R
Type Value Units
Parameters
Float with 2 decimals [1.00..n] None
Allows to specify the Number for each Line.
D
Receiver Section
Type Value Units
Parameters Read only [Point Nb
String or characters None
Begin...Point Nb End]
Summarises the information entered in detail in the table 2nd level.
Increment
Type Value Units
Parameters [-9 999 999,99...9 999 999,99]
Float with 2 decimals None
step 0,01
Defines the number of steps between each Receiver Point.
128
Setup Parameters
Survey Setup > Survey
Point Code
Type Value Units
Parameters [P1 … Pn] depends of the Point
Alphanumeric None
Code Setup n: [1...32]
The syntax for the Point Code is ‘Pn’ (example P1). The Point Code determines the type of
sensor used. Point Codes are defined in the Point Code (page 125) section.
On lines that do not use the same point code everywhere, you have to enter different lines or
you have to use the syntax Pn+Pi (example: P1+P2).
The point code also determines the zone type (No Edition, Mute, Outstanding) by using
different Point codes in each zone.
The parameters Point Nb Begin, Point Nb End, Increment and Point Code generate a sub
table where the detail for each Receiver Point can be found.
T
Point Nb AF Type Value Units
Parameters Non-modifiable: Result from
Float with 2 decimals None
setup of Point Nb Begin/End
Indicates the list of values setup by the Point Nb Begin and the Point Nb End. Table 3rd level.
Easting
R
Type Value Units
Parameters [-9 999 999,99 ..9 999 999,99]
Float with 2 decimals m
D
step 0,01
Allows to define in detail, the Receiver Point Coordinates.
• 0 if the Line Name is defined manually.
• Current position if the information is loaded from an SPS file.
Northing
Type Value Units
Parameters [-9 999 999,99 ..9 999 999,99]
step 0,01
Allows to define in detail the Receiver Point Coordinates.

Setup Parameters
Survey Setup > Survey 3
Elevation
Type Value Units
Parameters [-9 999 999,99 ..9 999 999,99]
step 0,01
Point Code
Type Value Units
Parameters Non-modifiable: Result from
T
Characters None
setup of Point Nb Begin/End
Indicates the values setup by the Point Code.
AF
R
Figure 3-44 Point Code
D
130
Setup Parameters
Layout Setup > Assignment
Layout Setup
Once you have defined the line parameters that will be used in the survey, using the Survey
setup, it is necessary to provide information for the central unit (CX-508) that will be used
to capture the actual layout of these lines.
It is not necessary to supply the location of each and every element in the survey: you must
however, define an assignment (fully identified with its unit type, serial number, topographic
stake number) in each line segment. This will enable the system to automatically identify
how your field equipment is deployed.
In this setup, you also specify
• the location of auxiliary channels
• detours and inactive channels if any
T
AF
R
Figure 3-45 Layout setup
D
Assignment
After the links are deployed at the planned positions on the ground, you must indicate the
exact location of at least one unit (CX, node) in each line segment that is actually
connected. In this way, you can create an assignment for each line segment, by specifying
the serial number of the unit, the associated receiver position and other parameters described
below.
After you create the appropriate assignment on each line, the system is able to collect the
status of all units connected, as soon as lines are turned on (Field-on). Then it will continually
update the view in the main window.

Setup Parameters
Layout Setup > Assignment 3
Assignment Panel
Type Value Units
Parameters [BoxType; Serial Nb; Line Name;
Panel Point Nb; Increment; Nb None
Subnode]
T
AF
Figure 3-46 Assignment Setup Panel
R
Box Type
Type Value Units
Parameters
D
[Field unit; Concentrator side

List box None
low; Concentrator side high]
Used to select the type of units
Figure 3-47 Box Type List
The Concentrator position is not marked as receiver point.

Concentrator side low: Concentrator will be assigned to the FDU position on its low side.
Concentrator side high: Concentrator will be assigned to the FDU position on its high side.
132
Setup Parameters
Layout Setup > Assignment
Serial Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer 0...2147483647 None
Serial number of the unit implemented at the location.
Line Name
Type Value Units
Parameters Float with 2
[-9 999 999,99 ..9 999 999,99] None
decimals
Used to specify the line number the assignment is attached to.
T
Point Nb
AF Type Value Units
[-9 999 999,99 ..9 999 999,99] None
decimals
Used to specify the point number of the line the assignment is attached to.
Increment
R
Type Value Units
Parameters
Typically, the increment is set to 1, meaning that a receiver channel is deployed at each stake
D
number.
To implement a Receiver Position (i.e. a receiver channel) every “n” stake numbers on a line
segment, enter “n” into the Increment field.
Nb of Subnodes
Type Value Units
Parameters
This corresponds to the channel number in case you are using multi-component instruments.

Setup Parameters
Layout Setup > Detour 3
Detour
The Detour setup is used to indicate the location of detours (if any), between receiver points.
All field units within a detour will be inactive (unused).
‘High’ indicates the highest node active on the segment.
‘Low’ indicates the lowest node active on the segment.
In standard configurations (without snaking), detours will always be defined in terms of
‘High-Low’.
T
AF Figure 3-48 Detour setup
Line Name Begin / Line Name End

Type Value Units
Parameters Float with 2 [-9 999 999,99...9 999 999,99] Must be
R
None
decimals defined in the survey.
Indicates the Name of the Line where the detour begins/ends.
D
Point Nb Begin / Point Nb End

Type Value Units
Parameters Float with 2 [-9 999 999,99...9 999 999,99] Must be
None
decimals defined in the survey.
Defines for a Line, the Number of the first stake of the spread.
Limit
Type Value Units
Parameters
List box [High; Low] None
In case of a detour, the detour must consist of a High limit and a Low limit.
In case of a snaking, just assign the FDU on the next line to its position.
If the next segment must be reversed, the detour will contain 2 Low or 2 High limits.
134
Setup Parameters
Layout Setup > Detour
Nb of Units in Detour
Type Value Units
Parameters
Specify the number of units present in the detour.
Detour Examples
Detours can be also be set up with the available shortcuts by right-clicking in the Instrument
topographic view.
Simple detour layout
T
AF
R
Figure 3-49 Simple Detour Example
Detour steps
D
In the Topographic view follow the sequence of steps described below to create a simple
detour layout.

Setup Parameters
Layout Setup > Detour 3
T
AF Figure 3-50 Simple Detour
The following setup will be applied in the Layout setup.

R
Figure 3-51 Detour definition from setup
Note To remove a Detour you must delete the detour in the Setup or the field view.
D
Snaking Layout
In the example below, both extremities of Detour#1 are located on the high-side of the
segment, whereas both extremities of Detour#2 are located to the low side of the segment.
136
Setup Parameters
Layout Setup > Detour
Low High
1052 1053 1054 1055 1056

Line 10
Line 20
T
Line 30
AF
Figure 3-52 Snaking layout example
The following setup will be applied in the Layout setup.

R
D
Figure 3-53 Detour setup

Setup Parameters
Layout Setup > Auxiliary 3
Auxiliary
The Auxiliary Setup panel allows you to describe the auxiliary traces you want to record.
The analog signals you want to record as auxiliary traces are fed to FDUs which may be
connected directly to the Line port of the SCI, or located anywhere in the spread. Use this
setup to describe your auxiliary channels.
Type Value Units
Parameters [Auxes from field, Auxes from DPG,
Panel None
Auxes from DSD]
The auxiliary setup is made of three tabs:
• Auxes from Field
• Auxes from DPG
T
• Auxes from DSD
AF
R
Figure 3-54 Auxiliary Setup Panel

D
Auxes from Field Panel

Type Value Units
Parameters [Nb, Label, Box Type, Serial Nb,
Panel None
Channel Nb, Comments, Gain]
The analogical auxiliaries setup is used to declare auxiliary traces recorded by nodes in the
field.
138
Setup Parameters
Layout Setup > Auxiliary
Figure 3-55 Auxes from Field tab
Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
T
Integer 1..N None
Row number in the list box. This identification number is used in the Tests setup to specify
which auxiliary channels to test.
Label
AF
Type Value Units
Parameters
Characters [1..32] None
R
Used to assign a name to the Auxiliary channel (e. g. Pilot). This label is used in the
Operation setup to set the type of processing to perform using this auxiliary trace.
Box Type
D
Type Value Units

Parameters
List Box [FDU-508; DSU1-508] None
Used to select the type of unit you want to use as the auxiliary device.
Serial Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer 0...2147483647 None
Serial number of the unit used for the auxiliary channel.

Setup Parameters
Channel Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
List box [N/A; 1..16] None
Used to specify the channel number of this auxiliary, in case of a multi-channel unit.
Comment
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to enter any comment you think necessary, for example if the Label is not self-
explanatory.
T
Gain
Type Value Units
Parameters
AF
Drop-down list
Used to assign the gain for the auxiliary channels.
[0, 12] None
Auxes from DPG Panel

Type Value Units
R
Parameters [Nb, Label, BasicType Nb,
Panel None
Comments]
Numerical auxiliaries are files generated with the VE464. You must indicate the basic type
D
required to generate the signal. The basic type must be declared as a Numeric pilot before the
creation of the numerical aux trace.
Figure 3-56 Auxiliary from DPG tab
140
Setup Parameters
Layout Setup > Auxiliary
Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer None
Row number in the list box. This identification number is used in the Tests setup to specify
which auxiliary channels to test.
Label
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to assign a name to the Auxiliary channel (e. g. Pilot). The Nb parameter together with
Label is used in Operation setup to set the type of processing to perform using this auxiliary
T
trace.
Basic Type Nb
Parameters
AF Type Value Units
List Box [The list of defined Basic Type] None
Used to select the name of the Basic sweep type you want to use as a reference signal. See
Basic Type (page 259). The basic type must be declared as Numeric pilot before the
creation of the numerical aux trace.
R
Comment
Type Value Units
D
Parameters
Characters 16 Characters None
explanatory.
Auxes from DSD Panel

Type Value Units
Parameters
Panel [Nb, Label, DSD Nb, Comments] None
With the VE464, it is possible to save some QC signals on the DSD.

Setup Parameters
If a tablet PC with VLI software is connected to DSD, then these signals can be recorded
locally as SEGD file. Then the QC department can merge this SEGD with the final SEGD.
Figure 3-57 Auxiliary from DSD tab
Nb
T
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1...N] None
AF
Row number in the list box.
Label
Type Value Units
Parameters
R
Used to assign a name to the Auxiliary channel (e. g. Pilot). The Nb parameter together with
Label is used in Operation setup to set the type of processing to perform using this auxiliary
trace.
D
DSD Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
List box [The list of defined DSD] None
Used to indicate which DSD encloses this auxiliary channel.
Comment
Type Value Units
Parameters
explanatory.
142
Setup Parameters
Layout Setup > Mute
Mute
Use this window to specify the location of mute Receiver Points, if any.
The channel from a mute receiver point is acquired, but its data is zeroed. In the case of multi-
sensor receiver points, all channels are mute.
Mute Panel
Type Value Units
Parameters
Panel [Line Name; Point Nb] None
T
AF
R
Figure 3-58 Mute setup
Line Name, Point Nb

D
Type Value Units

[-999999.99...9999999.99] None
decimals
Used to specify the location of a mute unit.
Note You can also set Mute receiver points using any of the Topographic views.

Setup Parameters
Layout Setup > Outstanding 3
Select a single receiver point or several receiver points using the right-click button of the
mouse. Click Set Mute.
Figure 3-59 Mute setup
T
The color of the receiver points will change to Blue to indicate that they are set as Mute
channels.
AF
Mute Unmute
Figure 3-60 Mute / Unmute Channel

R
Outstanding
This function allows you to define receiver points as having an ‘Outstanding’ state.
‘Outstanding’ receiver points will be labelled as such in the SEG-D file. When working with
D
DCM software, ‘Outstanding’ receiver points can be easily identified and completed.
Filters to identify Outstanding traces must be defined in the Setup parameters. See, Input
Filter Panel (page 228) and Trace Edition (page 127).
Line Name, Point Nb

Type Value Units
[-999999.99...9999999.99] None
decimals
Used to specify the location of an Outstanding Receiver Point.
Note You can also set Outstanding receiver points using any of the Topographic
views.
Note If a Receiver Point has been declared ‘Outstanding’ in the Point Code setup, no
modifications will be permitted in the Topographic Views.
144
Setup Parameters
Layout Setup > Outstanding
Select a single receiver point or several receiver points using the right-click button of the
mouse. Click Set Outstanding.
T
Figure 3-61 Outstanding setup
The color of the receiver points will change to Blue to indicate that they are set as Mute
channels.
AF
Not
Oustanding Outstanding
R
Figure 3-62 Outstanding / Not Outstanding Receiver Point
The Outstanding function is used for particular Receiver points that have not been identified
D
in the Point Code setup.
Figure 3-63 Outstanding setup

Setup Parameters
Operation Setup > Outstanding 3
Operation Setup
The Operation Setup menu allows you to generate the Operation table. Each source point in
the operation table is associated with a “Process Type” that determines how the Impulsive
or Vibroseismic signal is processed. In the case of Vibroseismic operations, the Process Type
is itself associated with an “Acquisition Type” that determines which sweep signal to
generate. If stacking is requested, the stacking fold is visible in the “Active VP” view.
In this manual, the abbreviation “VP” (standing for Vibrator Point) is understood as a source
point, completely defined with the SEGD parameters appearing in the Operation table (Shot
Number, Source Point Index, Source Point Line, Source Point Nb). It is used indifferently
for Vibroseismic or Impulsive shooting.
T
AF
Figure 3-64 Operation setup
R
D
146
Setup Parameters
Operation Setup > Process Type
Process Type
The “Process Type” associated with each shot determines which type of seismic signal to
generate (depending on the associated “Acquisition Type”) and which type of processing to
perform prior to recording the seismic data acquired.
The “Process Type” setup is composed of ‘Views’ that allow you to define the Acquisition
Type.
Process Type view

Type Value Units
Parameters [Impulsive; Stack Impulsive; Stack;
Perspective Correl Before; Correl After; Micro- None
Seismic; Airgun]
T
Select the type of process you want to define.
AF
R
D
Figure 3-65 Process Type View Chooser
Please refer to the following sections for details on Process types:

• Impulsive (page 148)
• Stack Impulsive (page 151)
• Stack (page 154)
• Correl Before (page 163)
• Correl After (page 170)
• Micro Seismic (page 178)
• Airgun (page 179)

Setup Parameters
Operation Setup > Process Type 3
Impulsive
Type Value Units
Parameters [Record Length; TB Windows; Box
Panel None
Type; Plug; Serial Nb]
Used to define an Impulsive process type. This type of process is intended for traditional
impulsive-source operations (e. g. explosive).
T
AF
Figure 3-66 Impulsive Process Type setup
R
Record Length
Type Value Units
Parameters
D
Integer [1000…99900] ms
The time that the data is recorded. In Impulsive modes, this duration determines the
acquisition length (i.e. the length of time that the seismic data is recorded into CX-508
acquisition units).
TB Window
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [0…64000] ms
The TB Window is a time interval that starts when the 508 server sends a Firing order (FO).
During the TB Window, the 508 server is waiting for the TB from the shooting system.
If the TB occurs within that interval then the acquisition starts.
148
Setup Parameters
If it doesn’t, then the 508 server generates an Internal TB (ITB) and the acquisition starts. At
the end of the acquisition, the GUI will ask you if you want to dump the data to the record
process.
Box Type
Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box [CX-508; SCI-508] None
XT
For the 508 system to transmit the Firing Order and receive the Time Break, you can
choose to attach the source controller to a special element. Use the Box Type option to choose
which unit to use.
Plug #
T
Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box
AF [1, 2] None
If you choose SCI in the Box Type option, use Plug option to indicate which “Blaster Port”
to use on the SCI.
Serial Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
R
Integer [0...2147483647] None
Enter the serial number corresponding to the selected option in Box Type List.
D
Auxiliaries Panel
Figure 3-67 Auxiliaries Panel
Line Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
Sequential number that determines how the auxiliary traces will appear in the SEGD file and
on your plotter output.

Setup Parameters
Processing
Type Value Units
Parameters
Panel [Aux channel] None
The Processing field is used to enter the name of the Auxiliary channel to record and, if you
want it to be correlated with another signal, this field also allows you to describe the
correlation operation to do.
T
AF
R
D
150
Setup Parameters
Stack Impulsive
Type Value Units
Parameters [Raw Dump; Record Length; TB
Panel Window; Box Type; Plug; Serial Nb; None
Auxiliaries Panel; Acquisitions Panel]
This type of process is used to stack impulsive data (from any kind of impulsive low energy
source, e. g. weight drop) before recording it
T
AF
Figure 3-68 Stack Impulsive Process Type
R
Raw dump
Type Value Units
D
Parameters
Check box [True / False] None
Used to record the data that is unprocessed at the end of each acquisition (with no stacking).
At the end of the sequence you will have one record for each individual acquisition and
another one for the result from the stacking process.
WARNING
Because it increases memory usage, the Raw Dump option should only be used after
consideration of the impact on memory resources.

Setup Parameters
Record Length
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1000…99900] ms
acquisition units).
TB Window
Type Value Units
Parameters
The TB Window is a time interval that starts when the 508 server sends a Firing order (FO).
T
During the TB Window, the 508 server is waiting for the TB from the shooting system.
If the TB occurs within that interval then the acquisition starts.
AF
If it doesn’t, then the 508 server generates an Internal TB (ITB) and the acquisition starts. At
the end of the acquisition, the GUI will ask you if you want to dump the data to the record
process.
Box Type
Type Value Units
R
Parameters
List Box [SCI-508; CX-508] None
For the 508XT system to transmit the Firing Order and receive the Time Break, you can
D
which unit to use.
Plug #
Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box [1; 2] None
to use on the SCI.
Serial Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [0...2147483647] None
152
Setup Parameters
Auxiliaries Panel
Type Value Units
Parameters
Panel [Line #; Processing] None
The Auxiliaries panel allows you to describe the traces you want to record as auxiliary
channels.
T
Auxiliaries Line Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
AF
Processing
R
Type Value Units
Parameters
Panel [Aux channels] None
The Processing field is used to enter the name of the Auxiliary channel
D
to record.
Acquisitions Line Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
Output
Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box [No Op; No Dump; Dump; XDump] None
• NO OP: No Operation

Setup Parameters
• NO DUMP: No dump of data to the record process.

• DUMP: dump the data to the record process and the plotter after processing the
acquisition. The memory is cleared afterwards. You need at least one Dump at the end of
the table.
• XDUMP: request an extra dump to the record process and the plotter after processing the
acquisition, although that is not the last acquisition. The memory is not cleared
afterwards.
WARNING
Because it increases memory usage, the XDUMP option should only be used with
T
AF
Figure 3-70 Output
Stack
R
Type Value Units
[Raw Dump; Record Length; Box
D
Parameters Type; Plug; Serial Nb; Noise Editing

Panel None
Active; Nb of Windows; Auxiliaries
Panel; Acquisitions Panel]
This type of process is used to stack impulsive data (from any kind of impulsive low energy
source, e. g. weight drop) before recording it.
154
Setup Parameters
Figure 3-71 Stack Process Type Setup
T
Raw dump AF Type Value Units
Parameters
WARNING
R
D
Record Length
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1000…99900] ms
acquisition units).

Setup Parameters
Box Type
Type Value Units
Parameters
XT
which unit to use.
Plug #
Type Value Units
Parameters
T
to use on the SCI.
Serial Nb
Parameters
AFType Value Units
Integer [0...2147483647] None
Noise Editing Active

R
Type Value Units
Parameters
D
The noise editing panel allows you to setup the diversity stack noise elimination function.
With this noise elimination function, the energy (E) from each trace is calculated by
averaging the squares of the samples (before correlation). Then each sample is multiplied by
the inverse of the energy previously computed. At the end of s sweeps (when the VP is
complete) each sample stacked (before correlation) is multiplied by the inverse of the sum of
the inverses of the energies previously computed. The noise elimination is only available for
Correl After and Stack process types.
Nb of Windows
Type Value Units
Parameters
Number of noise editing windows.
156
Setup Parameters
With the noise elimination function activated, the acquisition length may be divided into one
or more windows (1 to 64).
Auxiliaries Panel
Type Value Units
Parameters
Panel [Aux Processing Nb; Processing] None
channels.
T
AF Figure 3-72 Auxiliaries Panel
Auxiliaries Processing Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
R
Processing
D
Type Value Units

Parameters [List Box Aux1; List Box Aux2; List
Panel None
Box Operation]
Acquisitions Panel
Type Value Units
Parameters [Acquisitions Line Nb; Type; Sign
Panel None
Stack; Output; Break After]
The Acquisitions panel allows you to describe the type of acquisition, how you want to
process the acquisition and what occurs after the acquisition has been completed.

Setup Parameters
Figure 3-73 Acquisitions
Acquisitions Line Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
T
AF
Type
Type Value Units
Parameters
Panel [Defined Acquisition Type] None
Associate the process type with one of the defined acquisition types.
R
D
Figure 3-74 Type
158
Setup Parameters
Sign Stack
Type Value Units
Parameters
List box [- ; +] None
Used to specify the sign to apply to the acquired data. The sign will be applied to the data
and the Pilot.
• if ‘+’ : the acquisition signal will remain normal for stacking.
• if ‘-’ : the acquisition signal will be inverted for stacking.
T
AF Figure 3-75 Sign Stack
Output
Type Value Units
Parameters
R
• NO DUMP: No dump of data to the record Process
D
the table.
afterwards.
WARNING
Figure 3-76 Output

Setup Parameters
Break After
Type Value Units
Parameters [Break and Move; Break No Move;
List Box None
No Break]
This function defines what action will occur after an acquisition has completed.
T
Figure 3-77 Break After options
No Break (Example 1)
•
AF
The acquisition will respect the delay indicated in No Break Delay
(page 200) before starting the next sweep.
• No lift is done between the 2 stacks.
• This parameter can only be applied for Sequential Moving.
R
Break No Move (Example 2)
• The acquisition will wait for the delay as indicated in Break Delay
(page 200) to start the next sweep.
D
• No lift is done between stacks.

• If a ‘Ready’ signal is received from the Server, the source is allowed to
begin after the indicated Break Delay has occurred.
Break and Move (Example 3)

• The acquisition will break, as indicated in Break Delay (page 200),
before moving to the next sweep.
• Lift is done between stacks.
• If a Ready signal is received from the VE464, the source is allowed to
start after the Break Delay has occurred.
IMPORTANT
Acquisitions must always conclude with Break and Move command.
160
Setup Parameters
Example 1.
Fleet 1 VP1 (Acq1) VP1 (Acq2)
No Break Break and

Move
Fleet 2 VP2(Acq1) VP2(Acq2)
No Break
F2 ready
T
AF
Example 2.
R
Fleet 1 VP1 (Acq1) VP1 (Acq2) VP1 (Acq3) VP1 (Acq4)
Break Break Break Break

and and
D
Move Move
Fleet 2 VP2(Acq1) VP2(Acq2)
Break
F2 ready F1 ready

Setup Parameters
Example 3.
Fleet 1 VP1 (Acq1) VP1 (Acq2)
Break and Break and

Move Move
VP2(Acq1) Break Delay VP2(Acq2)

Fleet 2
F2 ready F1 ready F2ready
T
AF
R
D
162
Setup Parameters
Correl Before
Type Value Units
[Raw Dump; Record Length; Auto Corr.
Parameters Peak Time; Listening Time; Box Type; Plug;
Panel None
Serial Nb; Auxiliaries Panel; Acquisitions
Panel]
This type of process is used in Vibroseismic operations. Correlation of data will be
performed before stacking.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 3-78 Correl Before Process Type
Raw dump
Type Value Units
Parameters
WARNING

Setup Parameters
Record Length
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1000…99900] ms
acquisition units).
Auto Corr. Peak Time

Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to shift the autocorrelation peak in the final SEGD file.
T
Unless a value other than 1 is entered for the “Auto Correlation Peak Time” shift, only one
half of the correlation wavelet will be recorded on each of the two auxiliary traces (negative
time side of the peak on one trace and positive time side on the other). Theoretically, the
AF
autocorrelation wavelet is symmetrical with respect to the correlation peak standing for zero
time offset between the correlated signals.
This time shift is applied to the results of cross-correlation and to similarity tests.
Listening Time
R
Type Value Units
Parameters
The time that the data is recorded (i.e. Record Length), in Vibroseismic modes. The
D
acquisition length in Vibroseismic modes is equal to the sweep length plus the Listening
Time. (The acquisition length is the length of time that the seismic data is recorded into CX-
508).
Box Type
Type Value Units
Parameters
XT
which unit to use.
164
Setup Parameters
Plug #
Type Value Units
Parameters
to use on the SCI.
Serial Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [0...2147483647] None
T
Auxiliaries Panel
Type Value Units
Parameters
AF
Panel
[Line Nb; Processing; Truncated
Pilot; Correl with; Add Auxes for None
DCM]
channels.
R
D

Setup Parameters
Line Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
Processing
Type Value Units
Panel None
Box Operation]
T
Note
AF
The ‘Correl with’ and ‘Add Pilot’ options appear in the Processing drop-down
list if the acquisition type is of Source Type VE464.
Aux 1 Aux 2 Operation Truncated

Pilot
R
D
Figure 3-80 Processing
166
Setup Parameters
List Box Aux1

Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box [Defined Auxiliary] None
List Box Aux2

Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box [Defined Auxiliary; None] None
Used to select the Auxiliary channel to record and, if you want it to be correlated with another
signal, the second List Box allows you to select it.
You may want to record the “Numeric Pilot” which is specified in The Acquisition Type
(page 256), for each fleet. To do that, use the generic keyword correlWith (or addPilot).
T
As a result, the system will automatically select the signal whose Basic Type number appears
in the “Correl with” (or “Add Pilot”) field.
AF
List Box Operation
Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box [ - ; +] None
Autocorrelation or cross-correlation will cause two auxiliary traces to be generated (one
trace for the positive time side of the correlation peak, and another trace for the negative time
R
side). To specify which auxiliary trace is used to record the positive or negative time side,
select a Plus or Minus sign to the description of the trace.
D
Figure 3-81 List box operation

Setup Parameters
Truncated Pilot
Type Value Units
Parameters
Check box [[True; False] None
Indicates if a Pilot will be recorded integrally or if it must be truncated. By default the check
box is checked; this means the pilot will be truncated as usual.
Note Only digital auxiliary signals can be ‘Un-truncated’. Therefore, in a list of
analogue auxiliary signals, the ‘Truncated Pilot’ check box cannot be modified.
Correl With
Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box [List of Defined Auxiliary] None
T
This field is used to specify which auxiliary channel is the reference (Pilot) signal for the
correlation of seismic channels (a “Pilot” is synchronous with the Time Break signal, and
AF
usually very similar to the fleet's sweep signal).
Figure 3-82 Correl with list box

R
Add Auxes for DCM use
Type Value Units
D
Parameters
If selected, Full Length Pilots (required for data completion in the DCM) will be added for
each stack in the SEGD file.
Acquisitions Panel
Acquisitions Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
168
Setup Parameters
Type
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [Defined Acquisition Type] None
Associate the process type with one of the defined acquisition Type.
Output
Type Value Units
Parameters
T
the table. AF
afterwards.
WARNING
R
D
Figure 3-83 Output
Break After
See, Break After (page 160).

Setup Parameters
Correl After
Type Value Units
[Raw Dump; Record Length; Auto
Parameters Corr. Peak Time; Listening Time; Box
Panel Type; Plug; Serial Nb; Noise Editing None
Active; Auxiliaries Panel; Acquisitions
Panel]
This type of process is used in Vibroseismic operations. The first operation consists of
stacking the data and, at the end of it, performing a correlation on the stacked data and
recording the result.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 3-84 Correl After Process Type
Raw dump
Type Value Units
Parameters
WARNING
170
Setup Parameters
Record Length
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1000…99900] ms
acquisition units).
Auto Corr. Peak Time

Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to shift the autocorrelation peak (recorded on two auxiliary traces).
T
Unless a value other than 1 is entered for the “Auto Correlation Peak Time results of cross-
correlation and to similarity tests.
AF
Listening Time
Type Value Units
Parameters
The time that the data is recorded (i.e. Record Length), in Vibroseismic modes. The
R
acquisition length in Vibroseismic modes is equal to the sweep length plus the Listening
Time. (The acquisition length is the length of time that the seismic data is recorded into LAU
acquisition units).
D
Concentrator for Firing Order
Box Type
Type Value Units
Parameters
For the 508XT system to transmit the Firing Order and receive the Time Break, you can
which unit to use.

Setup Parameters
Plug #
Type Value Units
Parameters
to use on the SCI.
Serial Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [0...2147483647] None
T
Noise Editing Panel
Noise Editing Active
Parameters
AFType Value Units
The noise editing panel allows you to setup the diversity stack noise elimination function.
With this noise elimination function, the energy (E) from each trace is calculated by
averaging the squares of the samples (before correlation). Then each sample is multiplied by
R
the inverse of the energy previously computed. At the end of s sweeps (when the VP is
complete) each sample stacked (before correlation) is multiplied by the inverse of the sum of
the inverses of the energies previously computed. The noise elimination is only available for
D
Correl After and Stack process types.
Nb of Windows
Type Value Units
Parameters
Number of noise editing windows.
With the noise elimination function activated, the acquisition length may be divided into one
or more windows (1 to 64).
172
Setup Parameters
Auxiliaries Panel
Type Value Units
Parameters [Aux Line Nb; Processing; Truncated
Panel Pilot; Correl with; Add Auxes for DCM None
use]
channels.
T
AF Figure 3-85 Auxiliaries Panel
Auxiliaries Line Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
R
D
Processing
Type Value Units
Panel None
Box Operation]
Note The ‘Correl with’ and ‘Add Pilot’ options appear in the Processing drop-down
list if the acquisition type is of Source Type VE464.

Setup Parameters
Aux 1 Aux 2 Operation Truncated

Pilot
Figure 3-86 Processing
List Box Aux1
T
Type Value Units
Parameters [CorrelWith; Add Pilot; List of Defined
List Box None
Auxiliary]
AF
List Box Aux2
Type Value Units
Parameters
R
[CorrelWith; Add Pilot; List of Defined
List Box None
Auxiliary; None]
Used to select the Auxiliary channel to record and, if you want it to be correlated with another
signal, the second List Box allows you to select it.
D
You may want to record the “Numeric Pilot” which is specified in The Acquisition Type
(page 256), for each fleet. To do that, use the generic keyword correlWith (or addPilot).
As a result, the system will automatically select the signal whose Basic Type number appears
in the “Correl with” (or “Add Pilot”) field.
List Box Operation

Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box [ - ; +] None
Autocorrelation or cross-correlation will cause two auxiliary traces to be generated (one
trace for the positive time side of the correlation peak, and another trace for the negative time
174
Setup Parameters
side). To specify which auxiliary trace is used to record the positive or negative time side,
select a Plus or Minus sign to the description of the trace.
List box
Operation
Figure 3-87 List box operation
T
Truncated Pilot
Type Value Units
Parameters
AF
Check box [[True; False] None
Indicates if a Pilot will be recorded integrally or if it must be truncated. By default the check
box is checked; this means the pilot will be truncated as usual.
Note Only digital auxiliary signals can be ‘Un-truncated’. Therefore, in a list of
analogue auxiliary signals, the ‘Truncated Pilot’ check box cannot be modified.
R
Correl With
Type Value Units
D
Parameters [CorrelWith; AddPilot; List of Defined

List Box None
Auxiliary]
This field is used to specify which auxiliary channel is the reference (Pilot) signal for the
correlation of seismic channels (a “Pilot” is synchronous with the Time Break signal, and
usually very similar to the fleet's sweep signal).
Add Pilot
Type Value Units
Parameters
List box [Defined Basic type label] None
Used to select an additional signal to be associated as a digital pilot with the fleet.
If the keyword “AddPilot” is selected in the process type setup, the system will automatically
replace the keyword using the appropriate signal.

Setup Parameters
Add Auxes for DCM use

Type Value Units
Parameters
If selected, Full Length Pilots (required for data completion in the DCM) will be added for
each stack in the SEGD file.
Acquisitions Panel
Acquisitions line Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
T
AF
Type
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [Defined Acquisition Type] None
Associate the process type with one of the defined acquisition Type.
R
Output
Type Value Units
D
Parameters
the table.
afterwards.
176
Setup Parameters
WARNING
Figure 3-88 Output
Sign Stack
T
Type Value Units
Parameters
List box
AF [- ; +] None
Used to specify the sign to apply to the acquired data. The sign will be applied to the data
and the Pilot.
R
Figure 3-89 Sign Stack
D
Output
Type Value Units
Parameters
• NO DUMP: No dump of data to the record process
the table.
afterwards.

Setup Parameters
WARNING
Figure 3-90 Output
T
Break After
See, Break After (page 160).
Micro Seismic
AF
This process type is intended for continuous permanent recording independent of a seismic
source. Micro Seismic process type generates Raw SEG-D files without any processing.
Type Value Units
Parameters
R
Panel [Record Length; Auxiliaries] None
D
178
Setup Parameters
Record Length
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1000…99900] ms
The time that the data is recorded. This duration determines the acquisition length (i.e. the
length of time that the seismic data is recorded into CX-508 acquisition units).
Auxiliaries Panel
Type Value Units
Parameters
Panel [Aux Processing Nb; Processing] None
T
channels.
Airgun
AF
Type Value Units
Parameters
Panel [Record Length] None
Used to define the Airgun process type. This type of process is intended for Airgun source
R
operations.
D
Figure 3-91 Airgun Process Type setup
Note For details on the Navigation software message structure format please refer to
the 508XT Data Format Manual, Chapter 3.

Setup Parameters
Operation Setup > Source 3
Record Length
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1000…99900] ms
acquisition units).
Source
This setup is used to assign a name to each available seismic source and determine how the
system will select the next shot to perform with that source from the operation table.
Source Panel
T
Type Value Units
Parameters AF [SourceNb; Source Label; Device ID;
Panel None
Type; Inc; Cluster]
Allows to define which source is activated for the operation.
This panel sets up the type of operation, navigation mode, behavior of the source after sweep,
etc…
R
D
Figure 3-92 Source Setup
Source Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1...9999999999] None
Used to define the Source Number.
180
Setup Parameters
Operation Setup > Source
Source Label
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to give a name to the Source.
Device ID
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to enter the identification number of the impulsive shooter device.
For example, if you have multiple impulsive shooter devices, this allows you to identify the
T
specific shooter device.
Type AF Type Value Units

[MACHA; SHOTPRO; BOOM BOX;
Parameters AWD; SHALLOW SEQUENCER;
List box None
SGDS; VE464; VIBRO SOURCE
WITH QC; VIB OTHER]
Used to indicate the type of hardware used for the source.
R
Inc
Type Value Units
D
Parameters
Integer [1...9999999999] None
Used to indicate the number of VP that will be skipped between two VP in sequential mode.
This field is disabled if the type of moving is “Randomly”.Increment can be negative, e.g. -2.
Cluster
Type Value Units
Parameters
If you require 2 or more sources to shake simultaneously, these sources must have the same
cluster number, to be specified in this field.

Setup Parameters
Operation Setup > Spread 3
Spread
This section is used to specify the complete acquisition spread to be used for each and every
shot. The programming of these spreads can be done automatically via SPS files or manually,
using the spread setup.
Spread Panel
Type Value Units
Parameters
Panel [Absolute Spread; Generic Spread] None
T
AF
Figure 3-93 Spread
R
In either case, a shorthand method of defining all of the channels to be used is available in
the 508XT. The concept of a “Generic Spread” (generic means “Standard”) is especially
helpful for manual programming.
D
The alternative method uses “Absolute Spreads”, which are more suitable for automated
programming.
Absolute Spreads
Type Value Units
Parameters [Swath; Spread Nb; Spread Label;
Panel Line Name; Point Nb Begin; Point Nb None
End; Gain]
Absolute spreads are more suitable for automated programming.
An absolute spread is defined in terms of line and stake numbers, for example: Line 20, from
stake 591 to stake 909, then Line 30 from stake 500 to stake 600. (It therefore follows that
you need to define a completely new absolute spread every time the acquisition spread moves
even by a single receiver point). Note that a tab is available for each swath name you have
182
Setup Parameters
Operation Setup > Spread
created in the Swathsetup allowing you to enter the description of the spread in each
swath.
Figure 3-94 Absolute Spread Setup
T
Spread Nb
Parameters
AF Type
Integer [1...999999999]
Value Units
None
Used to define the number of the spread.
Spread Label
R
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to define the label of the spread.
D
Line Name
Type Value Units
[-999999.99....9999999.99] None
decimals
Identifies the Number for each Line.
Point Nb Begin
Type Value Units
Parameters Float with 2 decimals [-9999999,99 ...9999999,99]
None
Table 2nd Level step 0,01
Defines for a Line, the Number of the first stake of the spread.

Setup Parameters
Point Nb End
Type Value Units
Parameters Float with 2 decimals [-9999999,99 ...9999999,99]
None
Table 2nd Level step 0,01
Defines for a Line, the Number of Last stake of the spread.
Gain
Type Value Units
Parameters
Drop down list [0, 12] dB
Indicates the gain currently in use for the corresponding line of the spread. The selected gain
in this window is only performing a “consistency check” with the Default Seis gain selected
T
in crew setup. See Default Seis Gain on page 93. If the gain is different than the one
currently applied in the crew setup, an error message will be displayed prior shooting.
Note
AF
It is not possible to have different lines using different gains for the acquisition.
The only way to change the gain of the FDU-508 in acquisition is to change the
Default Seis gain in crew setup.
R
D
184
Setup Parameters
Generic Spreads
Type Value Units
Parameters
Panel [Line Panel; Spread Panel] None
T
Figure 3-95 Generic Spread Setup
A generic spread describes the pattern of the active channels. The fundamental difference
AF
between an absolute and a generic spread is that generic definitions are always relative. You
may wish to define one generic spread to be used throughout the life of a crew.
To take a textbook example, a symmetrical split spread could be defined as a number of lines
with 100 stakes, a gap of 2 and then another 100 stakes. There is nothing in the basic
definition that says where the spread should be implemented. If one or more receiver units
fall outside the boundaries or within a gap specified in the Survey (page 127), those
R
channels, will not be implemented.
Line
D
Type Value Units

Parameters [Line Nb; Line Label; Occurency;
Panel None
Element Type]
Figure 3-96 Generic Spreads

Setup Parameters
The description of generic spreads makes use of Generic Line Types that you define in this
window. When you describe a Generic Line Type you assign a gain code to a set of channels
Line Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to set the Line ID.
Line Label
Type Value Units
Parameters
T
Used to give a Label to the Line.
Occurency
Parameters
AF Type Value Units
Used to indicate the number of the element.
Element Type
R
Type Value Units
Parameters
List box [0 dB; 12 dB; Rcv Skip] None
D
Used to select the gain of the receiver point.

To skip receiver points, select ‘Rcv Skip’ in the list box.
Spread Panel
Type Value Units
Parameters [Spread Nb; Spread Label;
Table None
Occurency; Spread]
When you describe a Generic Spread type, you assign a Generic Line Type to a set of Lines.
Line Types are defined in the Line.
186
Setup Parameters
Spread Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1...999999999] None
Used to define the number of the spread.
Spread Label
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to define the label of the spread.
Occurency
T
Type Value Units
Parameters AF
Used to indicate the number of the element.
Spread
Type Value Units
Parameters
R
Listbox [Defined Line; Line Skip] None
To skip lines, select ‘Line Skip’ in the list box.
D
Figure 3-97 Spread

Setup Parameters
Operation Setup > Vibrated Point 3
Vibrated Point
The Vibrated Point setup allows you to define the ‘shots’ or ‘VPs’ that will take place during
your survey.
Creating a VP consists of generating an “operation table” containing the characteristics of
the successive Shot Points planned. You can generate this table automatically by loading SPS
files to the database. See Crew (page 90).
Vibrated Point Panel

Type Value Units
Parameters [VP ID; Stop; Process Type; Spread;
Panel Vibrated Point Comment; Spl; Spn; Sfl; Sfn; None
Pattern Nb; Occurence]
T
The Vibrated Point setup contains the list of shots and their respective characteristics.
AF
Figure 3-98 Vibrated Point
VP ID
R
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1...999999999999999999] None
Used to define the sequential number of the vibrated point.
D
Stop
Type Value Units
Parameters
Checkbox [Yes / No] None
If you check this option for a VP, the spread will not be configured automatically for this
source point. So you can skip this if required.
188
Setup Parameters
Operation Setup > Vibrated Point
Process Type
Type Value Units
Parameters
List box [Defined process Type] None
Used to associate a process type to a VP. The process type will tell the system which type of
seismic signal to generate and which type of processing to perform prior to recording the
seismic data acquired. See Process Type (page 147).
Spread
Type Value Units
Parameters
List box [Id of defined spread] None
Used to associate a spread to a VP.
T
Vibrated Point Comment
AF Type Value Units
Parameters 16 Characters Max.
Characters Forbidden characters: None
double quotation marks (“)
Used to enter a comment for the VP. Comments are displayed in the Views VP and recorded
in the User Header in the SEGD file.
R
Spl
Type Value Units
D
Parameters
Integer [1..9999999.99] None
Used to indicate the Source Point Line of the VP.
Spn
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1..9999999.99] None
Used to indicate the Source Point Number of the VP.

Setup Parameters
Operation Setup > Vibrated Point 3
Sfl
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1..9999999.99] None
Used to indicate the source point line of the spread. This is the lowest line number of the
spread.
Sfn
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1..9999999.99] None
Used to indicate the source point number of the spread. This is the lowest receiver position
number in the spread.
T
Pattern Nb AFType Value Units
Parameters
Used to indicate which type of vibrator pattern to use for the VP.
Occurence
R
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1..9999999999] None
Used to indicate how many times the VP must be performed.
D
190
Setup Parameters
Operation Setup > Source Point
Source Point
Creating a source point setup consists of generating an “operation table” containing the
characteristics of the successive Shot Points planned. You can generate this table
automatically by loading SPS files to the database in the Crew (page 90).
T
Figure 3-99 Source Points setup
AF
A tab is available for each swath which is “Visible” in the Swath (page 98). The fields in
each tab are automatically populated as you click on Apply in the Crew (page 90) when
loading SPS-R, -S, -X files.
Source Point Panel

Type Value Units
R
Parameters [Swath; Line Name; Receiver
Panel Section; Point Begin; Point End; None
Increment]
D
Figure 3-100 Source Point Setup

Setup Parameters
Operation Setup > Source Point 3
Swath
Type Value Units
Table 1st level:
[Line Name, Receiver point]
Table 2nd Level:
Parameters [Point Nb begin, point Nb end,
Tab None
increment]
Table 3rd level:
[Point Nb, easting, northing,
elevation]]
See Swath (page 98).
Line Name
T
Type Value Units
AF [-9 999 999,99 ..9 999 999,99] None
decimals
Allows to determine the Number for each Line.
Point Nb Begin / Point Nb End

Type Value Units
R
Parameters Float with 2 [-9 999 999,99 ..9 999 999,99] step
None
decimals 0,01
Defines for a Receiver Line, the Number of the First and Last stake.
D
Increment
Type Value Units
Parameters Float with 2 [-9 999 999,99 ..9 999 999,99] step
None
decimals 0,01
Defines the step number between each Receiver Point.
The parameters Point Nb Begin, Point Nb End and Increment generate a sub-table where
you can find the detail for each Receiver Point.
192
Setup Parameters
Operation Setup > Source Point
Point Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters Float with 2 decimals
[-9 999 999,99 ..9 999
Result from setup of Point None
999,99]
Nb Begin/End
Indicates the list of values setup by the Point Nb Begin and the Point Nb End.
Easting
Type Value Units
Parameters [-9 999 999,99 ..9 999
999,99] step 0,01
T
0 if the Line Name is defined manually.
Current position if the information is loaded from SPS file.
Northing
AF
Type Value Units
Parameters [-9 999 999,99 ..9 999
999,99] step 0,01
R
0 if the Line Name is defined manually.
Current position if the information is loaded from SPS file.
D
Elevation
Type Value Units
Parameters [-9 999 999,99 ..9 999
999,99] step 0,01
0 if the Line Name is defined manually. Current position if the information is loaded from
SPS file.

Setup Parameters
Operation Setup > Seismic Modes 3
Seismic Modes
This section allows you to define the parameters of the Seismic operation that you will be
able to use.
Seismic Setup
Depending on the type of operation you wish to perform, a specific menu is available.
T
AF
Figure 3-101 Seismic Setup
R
Each seismic mode setup features the same architecture, with parameters being enabled or
disabled.
The seismic modes available are the following:
• Explo: impulsive source operations
D
• Explo GPS (or Shooter Driven): impulsive source operations with GPS shooter
position supplied
• Flip-Flop: vibroseis operations with multiple sources alternately
• Ready Flip-Flop: Flip-Flop operations with navigation mode
• Slip-Sweep: vibroseis operations with customizable delay between fleets
• Dynamic Slip-Sweep: Slip-Sweep operations with dynamic delays between group of
fleets (based on distance)
• Vib Other: vibroseis operations for any other type of vibrator electronics.
• Micro-Seismic: This process type is intended for continuous permanent recording
independent of a seismic source.
• Airgun: This process type is intended for the airgun shooting system.
194
Setup Parameters
Operation Setup > Seismic Modes
T
Figure 3-102 Seismic mode example
AF
Source Selection
Displays the available sources for the selected mode of operation.
It is possible to create several operating modes with different number of available seismic
sources.
Seismic sources indicated with a “V” correspond to Vibroseis source whereas the “E” stands
for explosive.
R
The sources selected correspond to the list of available sources in the dashboard view (see
VP Table View (page 302).
D

Setup Parameters
General Parameters
Type of Automation
Type Value Units
Parameters [CONTINUOUS;
List Box DISCONTINUOUS; None
MANUAL]
T
Figure 3-103 List Box Type of Automation
AF
With a Vibroseismic source or Stacked Impulsive source, the progress of the acquisitions
depends on which Automation option you choose. (With an Impulsive source, the
automation option is of no effect).
Continuous
R
In automatic mode, if you don't have any problem during acquisitions, you are able to shoot
consecutively the SPs or VPs defined in the Operation Table, respecting the operator-
selected delay between acquisitions and SP/VPs, without any further action until the next
Break Point (if any) is encountered.
D
Discontinuous
In discontinuous automation you can perform the entire shot point or VP sequence with the
specified delays between acquisitions, but you must click Go for the next shot point or VP.
The delay between VPs is not used.
Manual
Each acquisition within each shot point must be started manually, by clicking the Go button.
The Delays Between Acquisitions and Between VPs are not used.
196
Setup Parameters
Reshot (Management)
Type Value Units
Parameters [ASK FOR RESHOT ;
List Box ALWAYS RESHOOT ; None
DISABLE SOURCE]
T
Figure 3-104 List Box Reshot Management
This option dictates how the system will manage shots that have already been done.
•
AF
Ask for Reshot: a warning dialogue box appears whenever you try to do again any shot
that has already been done.
• Always Reshoot: reshot is done without a warning message.
• Disable Source: reshot is disabled.
Autonomous
R
Type Value Units
Parameters [Ask Before Shooting;
D
List Box Keep Shooting; Disable None

Source; Stop Operation]
This option indicates how the system will manage autonomous traces.
Figure 3-105 Autonomous Traces Management

Setup Parameters
• Ask before shooting: a dialog appears indicating the presence of autonomous traces.
• Keep shooting: the shot is taken with a warning indicating the number of autonomous
traces.
• Disable source: deactivates the source concerned by the autonomous traces.
• Stop Operation: if an autonomous trace is detected operations will be stopped.
Ask for Dead

Type Value Units
Parameters Checkbox [Yes /No] None
[Max. Nb of Dead; Max.
Panel
Consecutive Dead]
This option indicates how the system will manage shots with the associated spread
T
comprising some dead channels. If the ‘Ask for Dead’ option is checked, in case of dead
channels, a warning message will be displayed prior to shooting indicating the number of
dead traces and the number of consecutive dead traces.
AF
R
Figure 3-106 Ask for dead
D
Max Nb of Dead
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [0..1 000 000] None
Max Consecutive Dead

Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [0..1 000 000] None
If the check box ‘Ask for Dead’ is selected, a pop-up is displayed on each trace containing
‘deads’, indicating the number of total ‘deads’ and the number of consecutive ‘dead’ traces.
198
Setup Parameters
Guidance
Check this box if you have purchased a Guidance license (optional). This generates a
‘Wkt.txt’ file which is required in order to use the Guidance option in VE464. See VE464
Manual--Guidance chapter.
Figure 3-107 Guidance option
Note In order to use the Guidance option in VE464, copy the wkt.txt file (xxxwkt.txt)
to a USB key. This file must be then copied to a tablet PC with the VE464
T
Guidance application.
SP Grabbing Mode (for Airgun seismic source)

AF
R
D
Figure 3-108 SP Grabbing Mode
If a status (UDP datagram or from APS file) includes an unknown topo location (no source
point exists with the key "line name/point number") and the option "SP Grabbing mode" is
checked, the system will try to find the nearest source point. The source point must be
included in the grabbing SP circle. The radius of the grabbing SP circle is defined in the
Radial Error (page 210) section.
If the "SP Grabbing mode" is not set or the system doesn't find a nearest point according to
the defined radius, this status is discarded and a message w/o acknowledgement (Airgun
status XXX: Topo location unknown) is displayed.

Setup Parameters
Mode
Type of Moving
Type Value Units
Parameters [Sequential Moving; Randomly
List box None
Moving]
Used to indicate how the source chooses the next VP.
Sequentially Moving
Choose the Sequential option if you wish to take VPs as scheduled in the operation table.
With this option, after a VP is done, the system will use the increment step specified in the
“Step” field to determine which VP to do with this source and select it automatically from
T
the list of VPs to do.
Randomly Moving AF
Choose the Randomly option if you want to allow the Source Points to be completed in any
order (e. g. if you are using a “DSD network”) rather than follow the order determined in the
list of shots to do.
No Break Delay
Type Value Units
R
Parameters
Float with 1 decimal [] s
When in Continuous automation mode, this parameter indicates the delay (in seconds)
between two successive acquisitions which do not include any breakpoint see Break After
D
(page 160).
Break Delay
Type Value Units
Parameters
Float with 1 decimal [] s
When in Continuous automation mode, this parameter indicates the delay (in seconds)
between two successive acquisitions which include a breakpoint see Break After
(page 160).
200
Setup Parameters
Slip Time
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1...99] s
The Slip Time refers to the period after a sweep is started. The Firing Order for the next
sweep will not be generated until a vibrator fleet is ready to shake and the Slip Time delay
has expired.
Slip Sweep Theory

With the slip-sweep option enabled, the system lets a vibrator fleet start sweeping without
waiting for the previous fleet's sweep to be completed. The system only waits until a delay
(Slip Time) specified by the operator has expired — the estimated time for a given frequency
in the previous sweep to die out — and lets the next vibrator fleet start sweeping when it is
T
ready, with the appropriate receiver stations activated.
The system cuts the acquisition data flow at the appropriate time-zeroes.
The data appear in SEG-D files as individual correlated records.
Fleet 1 sweep
AF Fleet 1 sweep
Slip Time Slip Time
Fleet 2 sweep TB
Fleet 2 sweep
TB
Slip Time Slip Time
Fleet 3 sweep
R
TB TB
TB TB
Fleet 2 Fleet 3 Fleet 1 Fleet 2 Fleet 3

D
Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready
Figure 3-109 VE464
The “Slip Time” is regarded as the minimum time between a Time Break (TB) and the next
one. Unless the VE464 has to wait for the Firing Order (for example because no fleet is
ready), the time between two TBs is always minimum and equal to the Slip Time. Vibrators
are not allowed to start sweeping automatically unless they send a Ready message.

Setup Parameters
Standard Slip-sweep mode

In the examples shown in Figure 3-110 and Figure 3-111, each fleet can start shaking
right after the Slip Time has expired.
F1 moving to VP3
location

Slip Time Slip Time Slip Time Slip Time
F2 moving to
VP4 location
VP2 (Acq1) VP4 (Acq1) VP6 (Acq1)
T
Fleet 2
Slip Time Slip Time Slip Time
AF
Figure 3-110 Slip-sweep with sequentially moving source, no stacking
F1 moving to
VP3 location
R
Slip Time Slip Time Slip Time Slip Time
F2 moving to
D
VP4 location
Fleet 2 VP2 (Acq1) VP2 (Acq2) VP4 (Acq1)
Figure 3-111 Slip-sweep with sequentially moving source, no stacking
In the example shown in Figure 3-112, each fleet can start shaking when it is Ready and
the Slip Time has expired and its COG matches a planned source point to be done with that
fleet, see SP/VP Grabbing Radius (page 211).
202
Setup Parameters
F1 moving to F1 moving to
VP6 location VP8 location
Fleet 1 F2 moving to
VP4 location
VP2 (Acq1) VP4(Acq1)
Fleet 2 F3 moving to
Slip Time Slip Time
VP5 location
VP3 (Acq1) VP5 (Acq1)
Fleet 3 Slip Time Slip Time
T
F1 F2 F3 F2 F1 F3 F1
Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready
AF
Figure 3-112 Slip-sweep, randomly moving source, Navigation mode, no stacking
In the example shown in Figure 3-113, you have to set a Break After option for each
acquisition (see Break After (page 160) ). Each fleet can start shaking when it is Ready
R
and the Slip Time has expired and its COG matches a planned source point to be done with
that fleet (see SP/VP Grabbing Radius (page 211)).
D

Setup Parameters
F1 moves to VP1 second

acquisition. location
Fleet 1
F2 moves to VP2 second

acquisition. location
Fleet 2
Slip Time Slip Time
T
Fleet 3
Slip Time Slip Time
F1
Ready
F3
Ready
AF F2
Ready
F1
Ready
F2
Ready
F3
Ready
F1
Ready
Figure 3-113 Slip-sweep, randomly moving source, Navigation mode, stacking (2)
In the example shown in Figure 3-114, each fleet will start shaking when it is Ready and
R
the Slip Time has expired and its COG matches a planned source point to be done with that
fleet, see SP/VP Grabbing Radius (page 211). Because acquisitions are stacked at the
D
204
Setup Parameters
same place, the fleet is implicitly Ready at the end of each sweep (unless this is the last sweep
within the VP), so it can shake as soon as the Slip Time has expired.
Implicit
F1 moving to
Ready
VP4 location

Fleet 1 Implicit
Ready
Fleet 2
Slip Time Slip Time

Fleet 3
Slip Time Slip Time
T
Implicit
F1
AF F3 F2 Ready F1
Ready Ready Ready Ready
Figure 3-114 Slip-sweep, randomly moving source, Navigation mode, stacking (2)
Dynamic Slip Time (For Dyn Slip Sweep only)

Type Value Units
R
Parameters
Table [Distance; Time] m, msec
The Dynamic Slip Time option allows you to create a table to enter different Slip Time
D
setpoints for different fleet separations.
Dynamic slip sweep mode

Rather than always using the same Slip Time, regardless of how far the fleets are apart (that
is the standard Slip-Sweep mode), you may want to use the Dynamic Mode which allows
you to specify different Slip Times depending on the distance between fleets.
After a fleet has started shaking, in order to determine which fleet is next eligible to shake,
the system interpolates between your Slip Time setpoints and calculates the suitable Slip
Time for the distance between each fleet ready to shake and the fleet currently shaking. The
system automatically selects the fleet associated with the shortest Slip Time as the one
eligible to shake after this Slip Time has expired.

Setup Parameters
T
Figure 3-115 Dynamic Slip-sweep table
AF
F1 F2 F3 F4
1 2 3 4
300 m 200 m 300 m
R
F2 and F3 Ready F4 Ready
Fleet 1 F1 sweep
D
3s
F3 sweep
Fleet 3
9s
F4 sweep
Fleet 4
3s
F2 sweep
Fleet 2
Figure 3-116
In the above example, the system is notified of F2 and F3 being ready after F1 has started
shaking, with F2 located 300 m from F1, and F3 located 500 m from F1. Therefore, F3 starts
shaking after the calculated Slip Time (3 s) has expired, because the Slip Time for F2 is
longer (9 s).
206
Setup Parameters
When the system is notified of F4 being ready, the Slip Time for F2 (located 200 m from F3)
is 12 s whereas the slip Time for F4 (located 300 m from F3) is shorter, therefore F4 starts
shaking after its Slip Time (9 s) has expired.
After F4 has started shaking, the Slip Time for F2 (located 500 m from F4) is calculated to
be 3 s. F2 can start shaking after this Slip Time has expired.
Fleet selection Constraint

Type Value Units
Parameters [Fleet in same cluster;
List box Fleet in different cluster; No sec
constraint]
For operation modes using simultaneous seismic sources, you can manually create a fleet
T
cluster specifying which fleets are expected to shake simultaneously, or let the system
automatically build a fleet group. Each fleet may consist of one or more vibrators, see
Cluster (page 181). AF
Fleet in same cluster will select a group of simultaneous sources belonging to identical
clusters.
Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Cluster 3

Fleet 1
R
1 4 7
Fleet 2
2 5 8
Fleet 3
D
3 6 9
Figure 3-117 Manual Clustering

Setup Parameters
Fleet in different cluster will select a group of simultaneous sources belonging to distinct
clusters.
Area 1 Area 2 Area 3
1 4 7
2 5 8
3 6 9
T
Figure 3-118
No constraint will select any group of simultaneous sources regardless of the cluster
AF
configuration.
Group size constraint

Type Value Units
Parameters
Checkbox [Yes/No] None
R
Allows to specify whether a minimum/maximum number of fleets is required prior to start
the acquisition.
Min nb of Source
D
Type Value Units

Parameters
Indicates the minimum number of fleets to be included in the group.
Max nb of Source
Type Value Units
Parameters
Indicates the maximum number of fleets to be included in the group.
208
Setup Parameters
Spread (for Micro Seismic mode only)

Type Value Units
Parameters
Panels [Swathes; In Spread] None
Swaths
Indicates the list of available Swaths.
In Spread
Check mark indicates if the Spread will be included in the Micro Seismic spread. Multiple
selections are possible. All selected Spreads will be included in the Micro Seismic spread.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 3-119

Setup Parameters
Operation Setup > Radial Error 3
Radial Error
Radial Error Panel

Type Value Units
[COG Radius Threshold;
Parameters SP/VP Grabbing Radius;
Panels None
Vib Position Accuracy
Threshold]
This parameter allows you to define the radial error threshold for the COG position.
T
AF
Figure 3-120 Radial Error setup box
In the geographic views, the COG position is represented by the icon

R
. The colour of the icon (green, orange, red) depends on the status of the VP.
Green:
• this is the actual COG position (i.e all vibrator positions have been received),
D
• and there is no radial error;
210
Setup Parameters
Operation Setup > Radial Error
Orange:
• this is an estimation of the COG position (i.e some vibrator positions have not been
received),
• The VP is composed of stacks, and an estimation of final COG is delivered according to
previous pattern of source given in VP(n-1).
Red:
• this is the actual COG position (i.e. all vib positions have been received), and one or more
vib position standard deviations exceed the “Vib Position Accuracy Threshold”
(specified in the Setup menu).
Or
• there is a radial error. In that case a warning box shows up, displaying the radial error and
the Source Point identification, so that the operator can decide on whether to reposition
T
the vibrators and take the sweep again, or to continue.
COG Radius Threshold (m)

AF Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1...99.9] m
Determines the allowable area for the actual COG around the planned source position. Each
planned source position in the graphic display is represented by a (blue) tolerance circle the
size of which is proportional to the “COG Radius Threshold” parameter.
R
The actual Centre Of Gravity of the source is computed from the GPS positions contained in
the status messages transmitted by the vibrators making up the source.
SP/VP Grabbing Radius

D
Type Value Units

Parameters True: [1...99.9]
Checkbox/Integer m
False: empty
Used in Navigation mode to determine the eligible Source Point (SP)/ Vibration Point (VP),
if stacking is used and the fleet has to move after each sweep within the SP/VP. This
parameter determines a larger circle around the source COG tolerance circle. When a

Setup Parameters
Operation Setup > Radial Error 3
vibrator fleet is located within the VP grabbing circle and ready to shake, the system chooses
the matching VP from the list of VPs.
VP Grabbing
COG Radius Radius
threshold
Acq2
COG tolerance VP grabbing
COG
circle circle
Acq1 Planned source

Centre Of Gravity
T
Figure 3-121 VP Grabbing Radius schema
Note With no stacking (i. e. a single acquisition per VP), the “VP Grabbing Radius”
AF
should be set to be equal to the “COG Radius Threshold”. Otherwise, if the
COG falls outside the COG Radius Threshold circle but within the VP Grabbing
circle, the operator will not be warned of the COG radial error when the Ready
message appears but only after the VP is done (the alert threshold associated
with the Ready message is determined by the largest of the two circles).
Vib Position Accuracy Threshold

R
Type Value Units
Parameters
Checkbox [1...99.9] m
D
This field is used to specify the maximum allowable uncertainty on the GPS positions of the
vibrators, i.e. the maximum allowable value of the Horizontal Dilution Of Precision
contained in the status messages transmitted by the vibrators making up the source. If the
HDOP exceeds the Threshold specified in this field, then the position is regarded as
inaccurate”.
212
Setup Parameters
Export Setup > Radial Error
Export Setup
The 508XT automatically saves its shot files to an SEG-D like repository on its server
computer’s disk. The Export main window is dedicated to the process of exporting them
from the SEG-D like repository to your archiving media: disks (NAS, Virtual NAS, FTP)
and/or tape drives. Each file is not deleted from the SEG-D like repository until it has been
exported successfully.
T
AF
R
Figure 3-122 Export Setups
D

Setup Parameters
Export Setup > Device 3
Device
Export Device Type

Type Value Units
Parameters [NAS; FTP; Tape; Plotter; QC
View Analyzer; Compound; Local Storage; None
DCM Storage]
Used to define an export device. Select the type of device to which you want to export.
T
AF
R
Figure 3-123 Device Type Chooser
D
214
Setup Parameters
Export Setup > Device
NAS
Type Value Units
Parameters [IP address;
Panel None
Mount Directory]
T
AF Figure 3-124 NAS Setup
IP Address NAS
Type Value Units
172.27.128.41
Parameters 172.27.128.42
IP address None
172.27.128.43
R
172.27.128.44
Used to define the IP address of the external disk attached to the system. By default the
mount directory is ‘/mnt/raid’.
D
Mount Directory
Type Value Units
Parameters
Characters Characters None
Used to define the directory path to which SEGD files are saved on the disk.

Setup Parameters
FTP
Type Value Units
[IP address;
Parameters Remote Folder;
Panel None
Login;
Password]
Used to define an FTP server attached to the local network.
T
AF
Figure 3-125 FTP Setup
IP Address FTP
R
Type Value Units
Parameters
IP address 172.27.128.xx None
Used to define the IP address of the machine on which the FTP software (e. g. FileZilla) is
D
installed.
Remote Folder
Type Value Units
Parameters
Characters characters None
Used to define directory to which SEGD files are exported, on the FTP server or NFS disks.
Login
Type Value Units
Parameters
Characters By default : userftp None
Used to define the login name that the FTP user will use to connect the FTP server.
216
Setup Parameters
Password
Type Value Units
Parameters
Characters By default : userftp None
Used to define the password that the FTP user will use to connect the FTP server.
Tape
Type Value Units
Parameters
Panel [SCSI ID] None
T
AF
Figure 3-126 Tape Setup
SCSI ID
R
Type Value Units
Parameters
Use this button to specify the drive that is connected.
D

Setup Parameters
Plotter
Type Value Units
Parameters [Label;
Panel None
Plotter Id]
T
AF Figure 3-127 Plotter Setup
Plotter Label
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to define the label of the plotter.
R
Plotter ID
Type Value Units
D
Parameters
Used to define the id of the plotter.
218
Setup Parameters
QC Analyzer
Type Value Units
Parameters [Processed dump; Raw dump; Test;
Panel
Playback]
Used to create a QC analyzer to display SEGD traces.
Note Selecting a QC stream type must be done prior to exporting to an external

device.
The wizard allows you to select the QC Stream type that you would like to generate.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 3-128 QC Analyzer Stream Type Select
Depending on the type of stream you selected, the corresponding Stream parameters are
displayed.

Setup Parameters
T
Figure 3-129 Stream Parameters
Theoretical First Break Velocity

AF Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [0...100 000] m/s
This text box is used to specify the assumed velocity of the First Break (i. e. the wave
propagation velocity through near-surface ground). It is used in conjunction with the offset
(computed source-to-receiver distance) to compute the theoretical time of arrival of the First
R
Break, which can be used for geometry control.
Line #
D
Type Value Units

Parameters
Allows to add a line to customize the processing of the stream.
Channel Type
Type Value Units
Parameters
Combo-box Seismic; Other None
Allows to select the channel type values:
• Seismic (for traces)
• Other (for auxiliaries)
220
Setup Parameters
SEGD Code
Type Value Units
Not Defined;
Hydrophone;
Geophone vertical;
Parameters Geophone horizontal inline; Geophone
Combo-box None
horizontal crossline; Geophone horizontal
other; Accelerometer vertical; Accelerometer
horizontal inline; Accelerometer horizontal
crossline; Accelerometer horizontal other
Allows to select the SEGD code values.
Collapsible Panels
T
Type Value Units
Parameters
Combo-box Signal; Noise; SNR None
• Signal Level
AF
Three attribute panels are available.
• Ambient Noise
• Signal-to-Noise (SNR)
When Line is deployed, three collapsible panels appear.
R
D
Figure 3-130 Line deployment

Setup Parameters
Attribute Panel
The attribute panel allows you to specify the parameters used in extracting the attributes from
input SEGD files: Ambient noise level, Seismic signal level and Seismic signal-to-noise or
Seismic noise-to-signal.
Figure 3-131 Time Window
Time Window
T
Type Value Units
Parameters [Mode; Origin Mode;
AF
Panel
Velocity; Value; Width]
Used to specify define the window on which to calculate the

N/A
attribute.
Mode
R
Type Value Units
Parameters [Time Zone; Theoretical
List Box N/A
D
Firstbreak]
If Theoretical First Break is selected, all other fields are deactivated.
Figure 3-132
222
Setup Parameters
Origin Mode
Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box [Center; Start; End] N/A
Use to define the mode of calculating the processing window.
Figure 3-133 Origin Mode
T
• Center: the window is defined around a center point
AF
• Start: the window is defined from a “start” point.
• End: the window is defined from an “end” point.
Value
Type Value Units
Parameters
R
Integer [0...100] s
Specify the desired time of the window calculation center to be processed on each trace,
within the acquisition sequence. The Center time corresponds to zero offset.
D
Width
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [0...100] s
Specify the desired time width of the time window. This determines the length W of the
analysis window.
Velocity
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [0...100000] m/s
This option is used to specify the quadratic velocity (Vrms) of the analysis window. If you
disable this option, then an infinite velocity is used and the resulting window is flat.This

Setup Parameters
determines a hyperbolic window. The time (t) of the first sample to process is given by the
formula:
2
2 x - W
t = t c + ----------- – -----
v 2 rms 2
where x is the offset (i. e. the distance from the source to the receiver).
where tc is the center time of the window.
By default the source-to-receiver distance is assumed determined in metres, therefore the
RMS velocity in metres/second. If the distance is determined in any other unit, then the
velocity you enter should be expressed in the corresponding unit instead of m/s.
Note If no coordinates are supplied in the Trace Header Extension, then a flat horizon
will result.
T
Offset Span AF Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [0...100,000] m
Only the traces with a source-to-receiver distance matching the specified Minimum
distance from source and/or Maximum distance from source will be processed.
When a receiver is too far from the source, computing of the signal attribute is not relevant,
R
so the QC should choose a Maximum offset span from the source.
Signal
D
In the example above, all traces that are more than 5000m from the source will not be
computed in signal attribute.
Noise :
When a receiver is too near from the source, the ambient noise is computed on a too few
number of samples, so the QC should choose a Minimum offset span from the source.
Noise
In the example above, all traces that are less than 300m from the source will not be computed
in noise attribute.
224
Setup Parameters
Ratio
Type Value Units
Parameters [Signal.Noise; Noise/
List box m
Signal]
Figure 3-134 Ratio Attribute
T
You can choose to calculate and display the Noise-to-Signal or Signal-to-Noise ratio.
Edition Limits AF Type Value Units

Parameters
Integer [-999,999...999,999]
R
D
Figure 3-135 Edition Limits
The user can set specific limits under or over which the trace will be considered in error.
• Ambient Noise Edition Limits: The unit depends on the selected sensor (μV if
Geophone or mm/s² if Accelerometer or μbar if Hydrophone). A maximum value is
usually set for the ambient noise attribute.
• Signal level Edition Limits: The unit depends on the selected sensor (mV if Geophone
or mm/s² if Accelerometer or μbar if Hydrophone). A minimum value is usually set for
the signal level attribute.
• Signal-to-Noise or Noise-to-Signal Edition Limits: The unit is in (dB). A minimum
value is usually set for the signal-to-noise attribute or a maximum value for the noise-to-
signal attribute.

Setup Parameters
Compound
Type Value Units
Parameters
Table [Defined Devices] None
This device is used to export the data on several devices alternatively.
T
AF Figure 3-136 Compound
Local Storage
Type Value Units
Parameters
R
Table [Local Folder] None
D
Figure 3-137 Local Storage
Local Folder
Type Value Units
Parameters
Characters By default: /var/dump None
Indicates a folder to export data on the local hard disk of the server.
See Export View (page 426) for additional information.
226
Setup Parameters
DCM Storage
Type Value Units

Parameters
Characters By default: /var/dump None
The DCM Storage device has the same parameters as a Local Storage
(default directory: /508_data/DCM). If the DCM folder does not exist, it must be created.
T
AFFigure 3-138 DCM Storage folder
R
D

Setup Parameters
Export Setup > Input Filter 3
Input Filter
The Input Filter will select the SEGD files which will be exported thanks to a query.
Input Filter Panel

Type Value Units
Parameters
Panel [Filter 1.. Filter n] None
The Input Filter Setup allows you to define queries.
T
AF
R
Figure 3-139 Input Filter Setup
Comparator
D
Type Value Units

Parameters
List box [N/A; AND; OR] None
The comparator of the first line is always N/A.
228
Setup Parameters
Export Setup > Input Filter
Operation
Type Value Units
[Shot Id;
Swath name;
Swath Id;
Blaster Id;
Cog State;
Exploitation mode;
Source Line Name;
Source Point Index;
Parameters Source Point Number;
List box None
Process Type;
Record Type;
Src set Id;
T
Src Type;
Type of Test;
IsRaw;
AF Julian Day;
Month; Year; Includes
Outstanding traces]
R
D
Figure 3-140 Field List box

Setup Parameters
Operand for Integer
Type Value Units

Parameters
List box [<; >; =; %] None
Figure 3-141 Operand for Integer List box
Operand for Double / Float
T
Type Value Units
Parameters
List box [<; >; =] None
AF
R
Figure 3-142 Operand for Double List box
Operand for String

D
Type Value Units

Parameters [is matching;
List box None
is not matching]
Figure 3-143 Operand for String List box
230
Setup Parameters
Operand for Enum / Boolean

Type Value Units
Parameters
List box [=] None
Similarity Record
Type Value Units
Parameters [Normal Record; Test
List box None
Record; Similarity Record]
Allows you to add a filter for similarity files.
A record type will be created for similarities files called SIMILARITY_RECORD.
T
Similarity files will be sortable in filters.
AF
R
D

Setup Parameters
Value
Type Value Units
Integer [1...according to selected variable ] None
For COG field: [ESTIMATE; EST_RADIAL_ERROR;
ACTUAL; RADIAL_ERROR; POS_MISSING;
INACCURATE; COG_NATURAL]
For Exploitation Mode: [NORMAL; SLIP_SWEEP;

SQC_DUMP; MICRO_SEISMIC; SYNTHETIC]
For Process type field: [IMPULSIVE ;

STACK_IMPULSIVE; CORREL_AFTER;
T
Parameters
CORREL_BEFORE; PROCESS_STACK]
Enumeration For Record Type: [NORMAL; TEST; SIMILARITY] None
SENSOR_LEAKAGE; SENSOR_NOISE;
AF SENSOR_TILT; SENSO_IMPULSE;
SENSOR_TILT_MODEL]
For Src Type: [EXPLO; EXPLO LSI; VIBRO]

For Type of Test: [INSTRU_NOISE;
INSTRU_DISTORTION; INSTRU_GAIN_PHASE;
INSTRU_CM_REJECTION; INSTRU_CROSSTALK;
R
INSTRU_GRAVITY; INSTRU_PULSE;
SENSOR_RESISTANCE;
Boolean [TRUE;FALSE] for IsRaw field item None
D
Filter Parameters
Use Different Parameters for each swath
Type Value Units
Parameters
Check box [check; un-check] None
A check box indicates if you want to use different parameters for each swath or not.
If you want to use different parameters, one tab for each swath will be displayed. The file
number will only be unique in the same swath, but not necessarily between swaths.
File number is incremented separately inside each swath.
232
Setup Parameters
First file Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to specify the first file number of the tape.
First Tape Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to specify the lowest tape number in the Tape set.
Last Tape Nb
T
Type Value Units
Parameters AF
Used to specify the highest tape number in the Tape set.
The First and Last Tape Nb fields determine how many tapes can be recorded using this set
of tape numbers.
Tape Label
R
Type Value Units
Parameters
D
Used to specify the Label of the tape.
User Defined Tape Label

Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to enter a user-friendly name for the reel tape #. This field is not used if you are
recording SEGD Rev. 2.1 files.

Setup Parameters
Export Setup > Output 3
External Tape Label

Type Value Units
Parameters
This field allows you to specify the physical label of the tape, if it has one, to be recorded in
the Tape Label block.
Files per Tape

Type Value Units
Parameters
Allows you to specify the maximum number of SEGD files that can be recorded to each tape.
This parameter is still used if you are exporting to NFS disks rather than tape drives (it is
T
used to update the Tape Number).
Output
Output Panel
AF
Type Value Units
Parameters [Path on NAS; Input Filter;
Panel None
Device]
R
In the output setup, the input filter is associated to one or several export devices to define the
output behavior of the system
D
Figure 3-144 Output Setup
234
Setup Parameters
Export Setup > Output
Path on NAS
Type Value Units
[/SwathName;
/SwathNb;
/RecordType;
Parameters /SrcType;
List Box /TypeOfTest; None
/IsRaw;
/JulianDay;
/TapeNb;
/TapeLabel]
The path on NAS is used to indicate where SEGD files are going to be written on the NAS.
T
AF
Figure 3-145 Path on NAS List box
R
Input Filter
Type Value Units
D
Parameters
List Box [Define filters] None
The input filter is useful to indicate which filter will be exported.
Device
Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box [Defined devices] None
The device list is useful to indicate on which device the export will be done.

Setup Parameters
VE464 Setup > Crew VE 3
VE464 Setup
The VE464 setup allows the end-user to set parameters for vibrator fleets and radio,
customize sweep signal,…
T
AF
R
Figure 3-146 VE464 Setup
Crew VE
D
Crew VE Panel
Type Value Units
Parameters [Crew Nb; DSD Network;
Panel None
Smart LF]
The vibrator crew setup is used to describe a seismic crew by creating the list of vibrators
available in the crew (DSD), and creating the list of vibrator groups (Fleets) to build.
The SmartLF (Low Frequency) optional feature significantly improves distortion
performance for all vibrators in low and very low frequency domain.
236
Setup Parameters
VE464 Setup > Crew VE
T
Figure 3-147 VE464 Crew setup
Crew Nb AF Type Value Units

Parameters
Integer [1..4] None
Used to enter the crew identification number.
A “DPG” can address only one crew. The crew identification number is used to avoid any
interference with other crews working nearby.
R
DSD Network
Type Value Units
D
Parameters
Used to specify whether a “DSD network” is implemented and enable the Navigation Driven
shooting mode.
The “DSD network” option allows each DSD in a fleet to communicate with the fleet’s leader
via an Ethernet wireless data-link.
As a result, when all the DSDs in the fleet are ready for the next sweep, the fleet's leader is
able to supply the DPG with a “Ready” message containing the geographical position of the
Centre Of Gravity of the fleet, referred to as “Source COG”. This allows the system to select
the Source Point automatically in the VP table and display it in the Dashboard Geo view.
Also, as only the “Leader” vibrator needs a time slot to transmit messages from the whole
fleet to the DPG, the capacity of the TDMA datalink is used more efficiently, allowing a
faster refresh rate to be achieved. See VE464 User’s Manual for more details.

Setup Parameters
Smart LF
Type Value Units
Parameters
If you have purchase a Smart LF license with your 508XT system you must ensure it is
activated.
To verify if the license has been activated ensure a check box is present on the VE464/Crew
VE setup menu of the 508 client.
Check this box and execute a VibFleet to activate the SmartLF license on all your DSD.
Type
Type Value Units
Parameters
T
List box [Slave; Vibrator] None
Used to select the type of the DSD:
AF
• Vibrator: is the standard option, to be selected if the DSD is used to control a vibrator;
• Slave: if the DSD is used to control a slave recording system (i. e. if it is used as a DPG).
Using a Master/Slave configuration makes it possible to record more traces without
increasing the number of vibrators, or to use two recording systems at two distinct places.
The Slave DSD is used in place of a DPG to control the slave recorder: it generates a Time
Break for the slave recorder to start the seismic acquisition and also a reference pilot
signal synchronous with the Time Break. It does not control any vibrator.
R
You must create a distinct fleet for each Slave DSD. Each Slave fleet should include a single
DSD (the Slave DSD). Each Slave fleet will automatically be associated with all fleets used
in acquisitions.
D
Figure 3-148 Type of DSD
ID DSD
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to specify the identification number of each vibrator.
238
Setup Parameters
Antenna Height
Type Value Units
Parameters [0,00...100,00] precision
Decimal m
0,01m
The antenna height allows the operator to define exactly the height for each vibrator between
the GPS antenna (GPS sensor) and the ground when the vibrator’s pad is down.
The final value of the VP’s COG height will take into account this value. If an offset is
entered into the GPS device of the vibrator, the value must be set to “0.00”.
Servo Input
T
Type Value Units
Parameters
List box
AF [Raw; Filtered] None
This option button determines what to use as input to the servo control: either the estimated
states from the Kalman filter (“Filtered” option) or raw measurements of baseplate and mass
accelerations (“Raw” option).
Filtered: using this option allows the system to discard non-coherent measurements on any
sensor (baseplate acc., mass acc., valve or mass LVDTs). Remember that the QC and the
usual way of testing the equipment with external devices always involve the force
derived.from raw acceleration measurements. Therefore, in the presence of vibrator
R
imperfections (e.g. mass rocking & baseplate flexure) a raw QC can exhibit larger errors than
the real performance of the servo loop.
Raw: with this option, servo control and QC are homogeneous but the system cannot benefit
D
from the capability of discarding incorrect measurements. This option is of no effect on a

random sweep.
Lift Up Delay
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [0..99] Seconds
Time interval between the end of a sweep and the moment when a vibrator's pad will lift if
Auto Lift is enabled. Adjustable from 0 to 99 seconds. If no delay is required, set the Lift Up
Delay to 0.

Setup Parameters
Auto Level
Type Value Units
Parameters
This button allows you to enable or disable the Auto Level function. If you enable the Auto
Level function, then you must specify lower limits for both High and Low drive levels. DSDs
using the Auto Level function operate as follows:
• The Drive level is decreased for the next sweep if an overload condition is detected.
However the drive level cannot go below the values of Min High Drive and Min Low
Drive.
• The Drive level is increased for the next sweep if no overload condition is detected.
However the drive level cannot exceed the values of High Drive Level and Low Drive
Level.DSDs not using the Auto Level function will operate only within the limits of
T
“High Drive Level” and “Low Drive Level”.
Random AF Type Value Units

Parameters
If you choose this option, then the delay for each vibrator in the fleet to lift up its pad is
variable from 0 to the value selected in the Lift Up Delay field, meaning that not any two
vibrators will lift up their pads at the same time. Not having vibrators lifting up their pads at
R
the same time results in less noise being generated —and recorded.
Low Drive Level

D
Type Value Units

Parameters
Integer [0..100] Percent
Lower amplitude, in percent, of drive level. The scale is adjustable from 0 to 100% in 1%
steps.
Requirements: Low Drive Level <= High Drive Level.
240
Setup Parameters
High Drive Level

Type Value Units
Parameters
Upper amplitude, in percent, of drive level. The scale is adjustable from 0 to 100% in 1%
steps.
Min Low Drive

Type Value Units
Parameters
T
This scale appears only if Auto Level is selected.
Low limit of Low Drive Level, in percent. The scale is adjustable from 0 to 100% in 1%
steps. AF
Requirements: Min Low Drive < Low Drive Level.
Min High Drive

Type Value Units
Parameters
R
This scale appears only if Auto Level is selected.
Low limit of High Drive Level, in percent. The scale is adjustable from 0 to 100% in 1%
D
steps.
Requirements: Min High Drive < High Drive level.
Excitation Ponderation
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [0.1..100] Percent
This function allows experienced users to modify the Excitation Ponderation function in the
cases of vibrator warnings. You can activate or not activate Excitation Ponderation by
checking or un-checking the corresponding box. If Excitation Ponderation is active, you
must enter the value for this parameter.(E.P. Value). : 10 by default step = 0.1 [0.1-100].

Setup Parameters
VE464 Setup > Sweep Management 3
Sweep Management
Sweep Management Panel

Type Value Units
Parameters [Nb of T0; Data
Panel Computation Domain; Get None
DSD Status, Extended QC]
T
AF
Figure 3-149 Sweep Management Setup
Nb of T0
R
Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box [1;2;3;4;5;6] None
D
In the event of difficult radio transmission conditions (important interference or jamming),

increasing the Nb of T0 may provide the DSD a better chance to receive transmitted data.
The down side is a possible waste of time as this increases the time delay between the FO
and the TB.
242
Setup Parameters
VE464 Setup > Sweep Management
Data Computation Domain

Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box [Time; Frequency] None
Used to specify whether the DPG should output the vibrator QC data in the Time domain
(phase error, distortion, ground force) or in the Frequency domain (phase error, ground
force).
Figure 3-150 Data Computation Domain
T
Get DSD Status AF Type Value Units
Parameters [At end of sweep; During
List Box None
the sweep]
Used to choose the moment when each DSD should transmit its status to the DPG.
With Analog Radio, the “At end of the sweep” option lets you see the status from each DSD
R
earlier. The “During the sweep” option allows you to have shorter intervals between sweeps.
With Raveon or Tracs Radio, the recommending setting for this option is “During the
sweep”, because this is the fastest method. In the event of difficult radio transmission
conditions, try the “At the end of the sweep” option.
D
Figure 3-151 Get DSD Status

Setup Parameters
VE464 Setup > Radio Management 3
Extended QC
Type Value Units
Parameters
Check Box [True; False] None
If this option is selected, QC data can be viewed in real time ( i.e with Auto activate), using
the Get QC function. The average QC results computed over a complete acquisition are still
available.
If the “Time” domain is selected, the QC is data computed every 0.5s.
If the “Frequency” domain is selected, the QC is data computed every 2.5Hz.
If this option is not selected, the extended QC data is still computed but it cannot be viewed
during acquisition.
Radio Management
T
Analog AF Type Value Units
Parameters [DPG/DSD Radio Level;
Panel None
Switch On; Gap]
Used to set the transmission power level of the radio units remotely.
R
D
Figure 3-152 Analog Radio Setup
DPG/DSD Radio Level

Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [3..100] %
The radio level is adjustable from 3% to 100%.
244
Setup Parameters
VE464 Setup > Radio Management
Switch On
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [100...10000] ms
The Switch On delay corresponds to the time required to connect to the portable radio.
Gap
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [10...1000] ms
The Gap corresponds to the waiting time between the end of a transmission of an emitter and
T
the beginning of the next emission.
AF
R
D

Setup Parameters
Raveon
Type Value Units
[GPS Correction;
Parameters Correction Rate; Power Tx;
Panel Nb Of Raveon; Channel Nb; None
Baud Rate; Repeater;
Repeater Levels]
T
AF
R
D
Figure 3-153 Raveon Radio setup
GPS Correction Raveon

Type Value Units
Parameters
Tick this option if you want to broadcast RTCM or RTK Differential GPS corrections
through the Raveon box. This causes the system to automatically allocate the necessary time
246
Setup Parameters
slots to the Differential GPS data. You have to specify the required “Correction rate” (see
below). For details, see the VE464 manual.
Correction Rate
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [150...2000] bit/s
Indicates the number of bits per second for the GPS correction broadcast (200 to 2000 bits/
s). The minimum required depends on the type of GPS corrections (RTCM, RTK, etc.) and
on the type of receiver. Unless the Correction Rate is set to be at least equal to the minimum
required, the differential corrections may fail to work.Typical values are 200 bits/s for
conventional differential corrections and 1600 bits/s for RTK.
Power Tx
T
Type Value Units
Parameters AF
Integer [1...100] %
Used to set the output power of the base Raveon box connected to the DPG.
Nb of Raveon
Type Value Units
Parameters
R
List box [1;2] None
Used to specify the number of Raveon boxes attached to the DPG. Typically, a single Raveon
box is required, but you may want to use a second one for a higher recurrence rate of each
D
DSD’s message.
Channel Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to select the Channel number (1 to 6) to use on the base Raveon radio, depending on
which channels are available (to create a frequency channel on the Raveon box itself, see the
VE464 manual). If two Raveon boxes are attached to the DPG, choose a different channel for
each.

Setup Parameters
Baud Rate Raveon

Type Value Units
Parameters
List box [4800; 9600] None
This option button allows you to set the Baud rate for the airlink on the Raveon box or boxes
attached to the DPG.
Two Baud rate options are available: 4800 and 9600. The default setting is 9600. You can
change this setting but it is important to consider the impact of your changes and remember
the Baud rate must be the same on all Raveon boxes (on the DPG and all DSDs).
See “What is the impact of a higher or lower baud rate?” in the VE464 manual.
Repeater Raveon
T
Type Value Units
Parameters
Check box
AF [True; False] None
To increase the radio range, you may want to use a Raveon repeater (rather than decrease the
baud rate). In that case, click the Repeater option.
Repeater Level
Type Value Units
Parameters
R
List box [1;2;3] None
If you want to allow repeaters to be cascaded, use the Repeater Levels drop-down list to
select the desired maximum number of repeater levels (1 if no cascading).
D
248
Setup Parameters
TRACS TDMA
Type Value Units
[GPS Correction;
Correction Rate; Tracs
Parameters Power; Tracking; Nb Of
Panel None
Tracs; Channel; Baud Rate;
Base Id; Repeater; Latitude,
Longitude, Elevation]
T
AF
R
D
Figure 3-154 TRACS TDMA Radio Setup

Setup Parameters
GPS Correction TRACS TDMA

Type Value Units
Parameters
Tick this option if you want to broadcast RTCM or RTK Differential GPS corrections
through the Raveon box. This causes the system to automatically allocate the necessary time
slots to the Differential GPS data. You have to specify the required “Correction rate” (see
below). For details, see the VE464 manual.
Correction Rate
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [150..2 000] Bit/s
T
Indicates the number of bits per second for the GPS correction broadcast (200 to 2000 bits/
s). The minimum required depends on the type of GPS corrections (RTCM, RTK, etc.) and
on the type of receiver. Unless the Correction Rate is set to be at least equal to the minimum
AF
required, the differential corrections may fail to work. Typical values are 200 bits/s for
conventional differential corrections and 1600 bits/s for RTK.
Tracs Power
Type Value Units
Parameters
R
List box [10W; 2W; 500mW; 10mW] W; mW
Used to set the output power of the TRACS TDMA box. Typically, the output power is set
to 10 W.
D
Figure 3-155 Tracs Power
250
Setup Parameters
Tracking
Type Value Units
Parameters
If this option is selected, DSD positions will be available from the DB25 “Data” connector
on the TRACS TDMA box attached to the DPG. This option causes the TRACS TDMA
system to automatically allocate a time slot to conveying a DSD’s position towards the DPG.
Nb of Tracs
Type Value Units
Parameters
List box [1; 2] None
Used to specify the number of TRACS TDMA systems attached to the DPG. Typically, a
T
single TRACS TDMA is required; you may want to use a second one for a higher recurrence
rate of each DSD’s message.
AF
Baud Rate TRACS TDMA
Type Value Units
[4800;
6000;
7200;
R
Parameters 8000;
List box 9600; None
12000;
14400]
D
Default value : 12000

Used to set the baud rate for the TRACS TDMA box attached to the DPG.
Base ID
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to enter the identification number of the TRACS TDMA box attached to the DPG.
If a second TRACS TDMA is attached to DPG, enter its identification number in the Base Id
field of Tracs 2 panel.

Setup Parameters
Repeater TRACS TDMA

Type Value Units
[NONE;
Parameters BI FREQ NO SCAN;
List box None
BI FREQ SCAN;
MONO FREQUENCY]
Used to increase the radio range.
• None: when no repeater is used.
• Bi Freq No scan: Another frequency channel is used to relay the DSD messages. Each
DSD must be set manually to talk to the DPG or the repeater.
• Bi Freq scan: Another frequency channel is used to relay the DSD messages. Each DSD
scans for the strongest radio signal and automatically chooses to talk to the DPG or the
T
repeater.
• Mono frequency: the same frequency channel as TRACS TDMA is used
AF
R
Figure 3-156 Repeater TRACS TDMA
Latitude
D
Type Value Units

Parameters
Integer [-900000...900000] dms
Used to set the latitude of the GPS antenna, if the TRACS TDMA is used as DGPS reference
station.
Longitude
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [-1800000...1800000] dms
Used to set the longitude of the GPS antenna, if the TRACS TDMA is used as DGPS
reference station.
252
Setup Parameters
VE464 Setup > QC Limit
Elevation
Type Value Units
Parameters Float with 2 [-9 999 999,99...9 999 999,99]
m
decimals step 0,01
Used to set the Elevation of the GPS antenna, if the TRACS TDMA is used as DGPS
reference station.
QC Limit
QC Limit Panel
Type Value Units
T
Parameters [Phase Error Average; Phase Error
Panel Maximum; Distortion Average, None
AF Distortion Maximum; Ground Force]
This setup allows you to set alert thresholds for some of the Quality Control data supplied to
the GUI by the DSDs.
R
D
Figure 3-157 QC Limit Setup

Setup Parameters
VE464 Setup > QC Limit 3
Any threshold being exceeded will cause the QC data of the DSD to be displayed in orange
in the VE464 View.
T
AF
R
Figure 3-158 QC limit exceeded in VE464 view
Phase Error Average

D
Type Value Units

Parameters
Integer [0...45] degree
The Phase error is measured between Force and REF during the sweep.
This parameter indicates a Quality Control Limit of the Phase Error average computed
during the sweep.
Phase Error Maximum

Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [0...45] degree
This parameter indicates a Quality Control Limit of the Phase Error peak computed during
the sweep.
254
Setup Parameters
VE464 Setup > QC Limit
Distortion Average
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [0...50] %
The Distortion is measured between Force and REF during the sweep.
This parameter indicates a Quality Control Limit of the distortion average computed during
the sweep.
Distortion Maximum
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [0...80] %
T
This parameter indicates a Quality Control Limit of the distortion peak computed during the
sweep.
Average Ground Force
Parameters
AF Type Value Units
Integer [0...100] %
The GF is measured during the sweep.
This parameter indicates a Quality Control Limit of the GF average computed during the
R
sweep.
D

Setup Parameters
VE464 Setup > Acquisition Type 3
Acquisition Type
Acquisition Type Panel

Type Value Units
Parameters
Panel [AcqType1.. AcqType 32] None
For each acquisition type, the panel contains the attributes of each fleet to use, specifying
which sweep signal DSDs must generate (two or more fleets can shake simultaneously, not
generating the same sweep signal). Also, for each fleet, you can choose two signals as
“Numeric” pilots to be available for recording as auxiliary traces, and available as reference
signal for a correlation processing of seismic channels.
T
AF
R
Figure 3-159 Acquisition Type Setup
Auto Lift
D
Type Value Units

Parameters
Select this option if you wish the vibrator baseplate to automatically lift at the end of the
sweep depicted by the acquisition type. The baseplate will not lift automatically, however,
unless and until the Auto Lift button on the DSD is also activated.
High Line Sync

Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to remove the noise radiated by nearby power lines.
256
Setup Parameters
VE464 Setup > Acquisition Type
Figure 3-160 High Line Sync
Fleet Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
T
List box [Defined Fleet id] None
Used to specify the identification number of the fleet to associate with the acquisition type.
AF
R
D
Figure 3-161 Fleet Nb

Setup Parameters
VE464 Setup > Acquisition Type 3
Basic Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to inform the DSD which sweep signal to generate.
T
AF Figure 3-162 Basic Nb
Correl With
Type Value Units
Parameters
R
Used to associate a signal as digital pilot with the fleet.
The Keyword only appears if the source type is VE464.
D
If the keyword “Correl with” is selected in the process type setup, the system will
automatically replace the keyword by the appropriate signal.
Add Pilot
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to select an additional signal to be associated as a digital pilot with the fleet.
The Keyword only appears if the source type is VE464.
If the keyword “AddPilot” is selected in the process type setup, the system will automatically
replace the keyword using the appropriate signal.
258
Setup Parameters
VE464 Setup > Basic Type
Basic Type
Creating a “Basic Type” is the process of describing a basic signal to be used:
• by the DSDs to generate sweeps for the vibroseismic source (vibrator control signal),
• and/or by the DPG to generate up to four “Pilots” to be used as reference signals for
correlation processors.
You can create up to 32 different Basic Types, which can be combined using the Compound
type.
The “Basic Type” setup is composed of ‘Views’.
Basic Type View Chooser

Type Value Units
T
Parameters [Linear; Log; Log (dB/Octave; T~n;
Perspective Random; Custom; Dedicated; None
AF Pulse; Delay; Compound]
R
D
Figure 3-163 Basic Type view

Setup Parameters
VE464 Setup > Basic Type 3
Linear
You can define a Linear-type signal through an analytic description. At the signal start and
end times, and possibly at particular times in between, you have to specify:
• the signal frequency (Hz),
• the signal amplitude (% of requested drive level).
Type Value Units
Parameters [Numeric Pilot; Start Taper; End
Perspective Taper; Initial Phase; Frequency None
Lines; Signal Amplitude]
T
AF
R
D
Figure 3-164 Basic Type
Numeric Pilot
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to specify if the signal must be saved as “Numeric Pilot” so that it can be used as
reference in the correlation processes. If Numeric pilot is not ticked, the pilot must be
recorded on an auxiliary channel connected to the Analog output of the DPG.
260
Setup Parameters
Start Taper / End Taper

Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to reduce the side lobes appearing in the correlation function of the sine wave or pulse.
Initial Phase
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [-180...+180] degrees
Used to define the phase at the origin of the sweep.
Frequency Line
T
Type Value Units
Parameters AF
Table [Ti; Fi] None
The Frequency variation vs. time is linear within each frequency segment. Frequency
segments are defined as follows:
• The first Ti,Fi pair (T1,F1) specifies the initial frequency hence:
T1 = 0 sec., F1 = initial frequency.
• The second Ti,Fi pair specifies the end time of the first segment (T2) and the signal
R
frequency at this time is F2, etc.
You must define at least two Ti,Fi pairs (i.e. one frequency segment).
Signal Amplitude
D
Type Value Units

Parameters
Table [Tj; Aj] None
Amplitude segments are defined as follows:
• The first Tj,Aj pair (T1,A1) specifies the initial amplitude, hence: T1 = 0 sec., A1 =
initial amplitude.
• The second Tj,Aj pair specifies the end time of the first segment (T2) and the signal
amplitude at this time is A2, etc. Within each amplitude segment, the amplitude
variation vs. time is linear.
• The last Tj determines the total signal length. You must define at least two Tj,Aj pairs
(i.e. one amplitude segment).
Ti and Tj may be different both in number and value but the last Ti and the last Tj must
be the same value

Setup Parameters
Log
You define a LOG-type signal through a spectral description, by specifying;
• The signal frequency (Hz),
• The signal amplitude (% of requested drive level) at the start and end times and possibly
at particular times in between.
Type Value Units
Panel Taper; Initial Phase; Deboost; None
Frequency Lines; Signal Amplitude]
T
AF
R
Figure 3-165 Basic Type Log Setup
D
Numeric Pilot
Type Value Units
Parameters
Check Box [True/False] None
reference in correlation processes.

Type Value Units
Parameters
262
Setup Parameters
Initial Phase
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to diphase the origin of the sweep.
Deboost
Type Value Units
Parameters
Choose the Deboost option if the signal is to be used for Deboost- type processing.
If you choose the Deboost option, the 508XT will make the necessary computation for the
T
frequency spectrum shape of the output signals to be the same as that of a linear sweep.
Frequency Line AF Type Value Units

Parameters
Table [Fi...Ai] None
The Frequency variation vs. time is logarithmic within each frequency segment. This
signal type is used to compensate for the non-linear response of the ground (HF damping).
Each Fi,Ai pair defines a spectrum line at frequency Fi with amplitude Ai. Fi,Ai pairs are
R
listed in the increasing order of frequency. You must define at least two spectrum lines. You
can specify up to 32 frequency segments.
Signal Amplitude
D
Type Value Units

Parameters
Table [Tj; Aj] None
Amplitude segments are defined as follows:
• The first Tj,Aj pair (T1,A1) specifies the initial amplitude, hence:
T1 = 0 sec., A1 = initial amplitude.
• The second Tj,Aj pair specifies the end time of the first segment (T2) and the signal
amplitude at this time is A2, etc.
Within each amplitude segment, the amplitude variation is linear.
You must define at least two Tj,Aj pairs (i.e. one amplitude segment).
• The last Tj determines the total signal length. You can specify up to 32 amplitude
segments.

Setup Parameters
Log (db /Octave)

You define a LOG-type signal through a spectral description, by
specifying;
• The amplitude (dB) of two or more frequency lines in the signal spectrum,
• The signal amplitude (% of requested drive level) at the start and end times and possibly
at particular times in between.
Type Value Units
Panel Taper; Initial Phase; Frequency None
Lines; Signal Amplitude]
T
AF
R
D
Figure 3-166 Basic Type Log (dB/Octave)
Numeric Pilot
Type Value Units
Parameters
264
Setup Parameters

Type Value Units
Parameters
Initial Phase
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to diphase the origin of the sweep.
Slope
T
Type Value Units
Parameters AF
Integer [-40...+40] dB/Octave
The “Slope dB/Octave” field is used to specify the slope in dB/Oct of the signal spectrum.
Frequency Line
Type Value Units
Parameters
R
Table [Ti...Fi] None
The Ti,Fi fields are used to specify the frequency at the start time and at the end time (two
Ti,Fi pairs are required). A single frequency segment is allowed.
D
Signal Amplitude
Type Value Units
Parameters
Table [Tj; Aj] None
The Tj,Aj fields are used to specify the amplitude (% of requested drive level) at the start
time, at the end time and, if required, at particular times in between (at least two Tj,Aj pairs
are required). The last Tj determines the total signal length. You can specify up to 32
amplitude segments..
T~n
Same as dB/Hz Log type (with no Deboost option), except for the frequency variation
which is exponential rather than logarithmic.

Setup Parameters
T
Figure 3-167 Basic Type T~n 1
Random
AF
The “Random” basic signal type allows you to take sweeps that do not generate resonant
frequencies (e. g. the resonant frequencies of buildings) and also allows two or more
vibration sources to be used simultaneously with minimum interference.
Type Value Units

R
Panel Taper; Polynomial; Length; None
Deboost; Frequency Lines]
D
Figure 3-168 Basic Type Random
266
Setup Parameters
Numeric Pilot
Type Value Units
Parameters

Type Value Units
Parameters
T
Polynomial
Type Value Units
Parameters
AF
List box
[65s Poly2; 65s Poly2; 8s Poly1; 8s
Poly2 ]
None
The “Random” type generates a pseudo-random noise signal based on one of the four
different polynomial sequences selectable from the “Polynomial” List box:
• 65spoly1: first polynomial with 65535-ms sequence length
R
• 65spoly2: second polynomial with 65535-ms sequence length
• 8spoly1: first polynomial with 8191-ms sequence length
• 8spoly2: second polynomial with 8191-ms sequence length
D
The two 8-second polynomial options should only be used with listening times less than 8
seconds. The polynomial sequences have been appropriately designed for minimum cross-
correlation residual.
Figure 3-169 Polynomial

Setup Parameters
Signal Length
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to indicate the duration of the sweep.
Deboost
Type Value Units
Parameters
Choose the Deboost option if the signal is to be used for Deboost- type processing
If you choose the Deboost option, the 508XT will make the necessary computation for the
T
frequency spectrum shape of the output signals to be the same as that of a linear sweep.
Frequency Line AF Type Value Units

Parameters
Table [Fi...Ai] ms
Frequency segments should be defined as follows:
• The first Fi,Ai pair specifies the initial frequency (F1) and the initial amplitude (A1). F1
must be 5, 7, 10, 14 or 20 Hz.
R
• The second Fi,Ai pair specifies the frequency (F2) and the amplitude (A2) of the signal
at the end of the first segment, etc.
You must define at least two Fi,Ai pairs (i.e. one frequency segment).
D
268
Setup Parameters
Custom
To define a “Custom” basic type signal, you must specify the ID of a file saved on the
vibrator electronics interface, containing the description of a your customized signal.
Type Value Units

Parameters
Panel [Numeric Pilot; Custom ID Length] None
T
AF
Figure 3-170 Basic Type Custom
R
Numeric Pilot
Type Value Units
D
Parameters
Custom ID
Type Value Units
Parameters

Setup Parameters
Length
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to indicate the duration of the signal
Note The system will not check to see if you entered a consistent file name until you
run the Set DSD function.
Note The Length of the custom sweep must be specified.
Dedicated
You may want to program the VE464 specifically, not to have all the vibrators doing the same
sweep. This Setup window allows you to choose a sweep type for the DPG and different
T
sweep types for DSDs.
Parameters
AF
Panel
Type Value
[DPG Basic Type; DSD Basic
Units
None
Type]
R
D
Figure 3-171 Basic Type Dedicated Setup
Numeric Pilot
Type Value Units
Parameters
270
Setup Parameters
DPG Basic Type

Type Value Units
Parameters
Listbox [Defined Basic Type] None
Enter the Basic Type Number of the signal you want the DPG to generate.
DSD Basic Type

Type Value Units
Parameters
Listbox [Defined DSD] None
For each DSD in the source, the “DSD Nb” field is used to specify the position number of
the vibrator in the source pattern, which should not be mistaken for the DSD identification
number. For example, enter “1” if this is the first vibrator in the pattern.
T
Pulse AF Type Value Units
Parameters
Panel [Numeric Pilot; Fi; Ai] None
Two parameters are needed to define a pulse-type signal:
• a frequency (F) that determines the pulse width (T) as:
T = 1/F
R
• an amplitude (% of requested drive level).
A 1-second signal is generated, with the pulse peak centred at 0.5 second.
A Pulse-type signal is needed for two purposes:
D
• Checking the polarity of the devices in the system.

• In operation, pulse reflection from shallow layers of the ground.
Figure 3-172 Basic Type Pulse setup

Setup Parameters
Numeric Pilot
Type Value Units
Parameters
Fi
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1...300] Hz
Used to determine the pulse width.
T
Aj
Type Value Units
Parameters
AF
Integer
Used to determine the amplitude.
[0...100] %
R
D
272
Setup Parameters
Delay
Type Value Units
Parameters
Panel [Length] None
T
Figure 3-173 Basic Type Delay Setup
AF
Length
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to indicate the duration of the signal.
R
If you wish to delay any basic signal, specify the desired delay time in the “Length” field.
Then use the “Compound” tab to create a new basic type including that delay. See
Compound (page 226).
D
Numeric Pilot
Type Value Units
Parameters

Setup Parameters
Compound
The “Compound” basic signal type allows you to create a basic sweep signal composed of
a combination of two or more basic types. You just have to select each basic type. You can
use this option to define a signal including a delay time: create a delay type with the desired
delay length, using the Delay option, then insert it at the beginning of a “Compound” sweep.
Type Value Units
Parameters
Panel [Numeric Pilot; Basic Type Nb] None
T
AF
R
Figure 3-174 Basic Type Compound setup
Numeric Pilot
D
Type Value Units

Parameters
274
Setup Parameters
Basic Type Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
List Box [Defined Basic Type] None
GPS Quality
GPS Quality checks the value proposed in the GGA Frame.
Type Value Units
Parameters [Check GPS Quality; Minimal GPS
Check Box None
Quality]
T
AF
Figure 3-175 GPS Quality
In the example below, the ‘fix quality data’ is highlighted in red. It therefore corresponds to
R
5 (Float RTK).
$GPGGA,123519,4807.038,N,01131.000,E,5,08,0.9,545.4,M,46.9,
M,,*47
D
Possible Fix quality Values :

- 0 = invalid
- 1 = GPS fix (SPS)
- 2 = DGPS fix
- 3 = PPS fix
- 4 = Real Time Kinematic
- 5 = Float RTK

Setup Parameters
Check GPS Quality

Type Value Units
Parameters
If selected, activates the Minimal GPS Quality box.
Minimal GPS Quality

Type Value Units
Parameters [None; GPS Fix; DGPS Fix; Float
List Box None
RTK; RTK]
Indicates the GPS Quality to check.
T
AF
Figure 3-176 Minimal GPS Quality
R
Possible GPS Fix quality Values:
• None
• GPS fix (SPS)
D
• DGPS fix
• (RTK) Real Time Kinematic
• Float RTK
276
Setup Parameters
VibOther Setup > Acquisition Type
VibOther Setup
Acquisition Type
Acquisition Type Panel

Type Value Units
Parameters [Acquisition Type Nb; Acquisition
Panel Type Label; Threshold Type; None
Sweep Length; Pilot Length]
This setup allow you to set 3 parameters required for processing the seismic data, and save
each different setting of those parameters as an “Acquisition Type”. The Vib Other
acquisition are then selectable in the Process type menu.
T
AF
Figure 3-177 Acquisition Type Panel
R
Acquisition Type Nb
Type Value Units
Parameters
D
Used to set an identification number to the acquisition type.
Acquisition Type Label

Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer 16 characters None
Used to give a name to the acquisition type.
Threshold Type
Type Value Units
Parameters
Used to assign a type of noise elimination threshold to each acquisition type.

Setup Parameters
VibOther Setup > Acquisition Type 3
Sweep Length
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1..128000] ms
Indicates the duration of the sweep signal used as seismic source.
Pilot Length
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [1..128000] ms
Indicates the duration of the signal used as reference in the correlation process. Usually equal
to Sweep Length.
T
AF
R
D
278
Chapter
T
4 Dashboard Perspective
AF
This chapter includes the following sections,
R
• Dashboard Perspective Overview (page 262)
• Dashboard Views (page 282)
• Action Toolbar (page 327)
D
• Contextual Menus (Right-click) (page 330)

Dashboard Perspective
Overview > 4
Overview
The Dashboard perspective provides access to all of the test and utility functions necessary
for management and tests of seismic lines and spreads. It provides graphical and
geographical representation of all field equipment connected to the SCI-508.
The Dashboard perspective also takes care of the list of shots, providing details on those
planned, the ones in progress, the next to do, and those done if any. It also provides access
to shot controls, lets you view the status of the acquisition, and provides information about
the progress of it, i.e. ITB, Transmit Error etc.
Setup Dashboard Dashboard
Chooser Views
T
AF
R
D
Status VPS Micro Multi Single Concentrator FDU-508 DSU-1

Bar Tables Seismic Tests Tests Test Test Test
Results Results Results Results Results
Figure 4-1 Dashboard Perspective content
280
Overview >
The Dashboard perspective provides access to the following views:

• Topographic, Geographic interface (Sensors, Instruments, Seismonitor, States and
batteries)
• VPs table
• Field Tests
• FDU-508, DSU1-508 and CX-508 Test results
Hereafter a typical dashboard view allowing to control and perform seismic operations:
T
AF
R
D
Figure 4-2 Dashboard General View
Note You can display different levels of details by zooming & de-zooming within the
various field views.

Dashboard Views > 4
Dashboard Views
Topographic views provide topographic displays of the results available from field updates.
Geographic views provide geographic displays of the results available from field updates.
These views show the planned source point and receiver point, the actual source point
(calculated COGs), the sources (shooters and / or VE464 fleets).
The topographic and geographic views also allow you to test and change the state of field
equipment. They also allow you to launch an operation. For more detail see VP Table View
(page 302).
Select one of the icons below to view topographic information for your survey.
T
AF
R
Figure 4-3 Topographic & Geographic Views
D
282
Dashboard Views > Topo Views
Topo Views
Topo Instrument View

The Topo Instrument view provides information on instruments deployed on the field. The
list of instrument types includes:
• CX-508
• FDU-508
• DSU1-508
• LRC-508
T
AF
R
D
Figure 4-4 Topo Instrument View
By default, the Topo instrument view displays the results from the selected test in the tools
instrument panel.

Dashboard Views > Topo Views 4
The colour code is as follows:

Table 4-1 CX-508 in Instrument View
Not Assigned
T
Autonomous On mode
AF
Clock synchronized
R
D
Not responding
Not synchronized
Incompatible version
Invalid Box Type
284
Table 4-1 CX-508 in Instrument View
Autonomous Sleep mode
Port switched Off
Download State
Synchro warning
Leakage level error
Out of assignment limit
Auto Test OK
T
Switched port
AF
R
D

Table 4-2 FDU-508 in Instrument View
FDU-508 in Segment switched OFF
Download Mode
FDU-508 Not Assigned
GPS Not Synchronized
T
Autonomous Off
Test Autonomous Off

AF Test OK
Unit is busy for shot
Synchronized
R
Tested Failed
Unit in Incompatible version

D
Autonomous SOH Autotest error
If the option “Show all test results” is checked, only result test are displayed.
For details on how to run tests see, Running tests (page 321). Numerical results of tests
are displayed in the Field Perspective Overview (page 345).
286
Table 4-3 DSU1-508 in Instrument View
Box type not identified.
Test Not OK
DSU1-508 in incompatible version
Autonomous SOH Autotest error
T
AF Autonomous Off
Autonomous visible through LRC link
DSU1-508 in Autonomous Mode

R
Test Autonomous Mode
Autonomous Off
D
GPS not Synchronized
Test Autonomous Off
GPS Synchronized (degraded mode)
Not assigned
Test not available
Test NAN

Table 4-3 DSU1-508 in Instrument View
Unit is Busy for Shot
Synchronized
Test OK
Topo Sensor View

The Topo Sensor view shows the topographic stakes and the types of sensors in the survey.
The Topo Sensor view also allows you to perform a series of sensor test. The colour of each
sensor icon depends of the selected test in the tools panel and its results:
T
Table 4-4 Sensor in Sensor View
AF Sensor PASSED TEST (OK)

R
Sensor PASSED TEST (NOK)
D
Sensor Not PASSED TEST
Sensor on Segment Switched OFF
Sensor in ACQUISITION State
Sensor with FDU-508 in Download Mode
288
Figure 4-5 Sensor status examples
T
AF
R
D
Figure 4-6 Topo Sensor View example
For details on how to run tests see, Running tests (page 321). Numerical results of tests
are displayed in the Field Perspective Overview (page 345).

Topo Seismonitor View

The Seismonitor topographic view allows you to view the sensors in terms of input signal
rather than sensor type.
Table 4-5 SENSOR in Seismonitor View
Sensor Activated (OK)
T
Sensor in Active Spread (Show Active
AF Spread Only)
Sensor Not PASSED TEST

R
D
Sensor on Segment Switched OFF
Sensor in ACQUISITION State
Sensor with FDU-508 in Download

Mode
When the Seismonitor pushbutton is activated, this view also allows real-time noise
monitoring: the level on each receiver is represented using eight 6-dB steps for both the
height and colour (from green to red) of each receiver icon, depending on the gain selected
for Seismonitor. The red colour step corresponds to the highest step in the level scale.
290
Show on Seismonitor: If selected, this option allows you to display only the selected sensor
types.
Figure 4-7 Example: All Channels in Acquisition Mode
T
Show Active Spread Only: This option allows you to visualise only the active sensors in the
current VP.
AF Show Active Spread Only
R
D
Figure 4-8 Example: All Channels in Acquisition mode in the Active Spread

The seismonitor gain is applied to both seismic and auxiliary traces.

The Gain slider, in each Sensor Type tab, allows you to adjust the Seismonitor gain for each
type of sensor.
Seismonitor Gain
Slider
T
AF
Figure 4-9 Topo Seismonitor
In example 1 below, the sensor limits are set at-96dB. Sensors that are outside this limit are
R
shown in red.
D
Figure 4-10 Topo Seismonitor example 1
292
In example 2 below, sensor limits have been lowered, therefore only some sensors (red) are
now outside of sensor limits.
T
AF
Figure 4-11 Topo Seismonitor example 2
R
D

Topo Battery View

This view shows the battery-operated units deployed.
T
AF
Battery limit
Slider
Figure 4-12 Topo Battery View
R
Note Battery Status is automatically refreshed every few seconds.
With the mouse pointer resting on any battery-operated unit, a tip box appears, showing the
D
type of the unit, its serial number and its power supply voltage.
Table 4-6 CX-508 in Battery View
CX-508 Battery > limit user defined
294
Table 4-6 CX-508 in Battery View
CX-508 Battery > limit user defined
CX-508 not Responding
The tools panel of the Topo Battery view contains a slider button to set the programmed limit
for the battery voltage. If the instrument battery level is below the selected battery Limit, the
instrument will be displayed in red. If the instrument battery level is within the selected
battery Limit, the instrument will be displayed in green.
Topo State View
T
This view shows the state of field instruments. The 508XT allows you to assign different
states for instruments in the same spread.
AF
The tools panel of the Topo state view allows you to change this state.
R
D
Figure 4-13 Topo State View
You must first select the instruments whose state you wish to modify. Click the right-mouse
button to select the field instruments. If no instrument is selected, all instrument states will
be modified.

Table 4-7 CX-508 in State View
CX-508 not Assigned
CX-508 OK
T
AF CX-508 not Responding
CX-508 Not synchronized

R
CX-508 with Port switched OFF
CX-508 in download Mode
D
CX-508 in inverse position
CX-508 in Autonomous mode
296
Table 4-8 FDU-508 in State View
FDU-508 in unknown state (Segment OFF,

Autonomous)
FDU-508 not Assigned
FDU-508 not Synchronized
T
AF FDU-508 in Download Mode
FDU-508 in ACQUISITION_State
R
FDU-508 in Autotest Error
D
Stand-by State
GPS synchronized (degraded mode)
Test State
FDU-508 is busy for Set state
Busy Test state

Table 4-9 DSU1-508 in State View
DSU-508 in unknown state (Segment

OFF, Autonomous)
DSU-508 not Assigned
DSU-508 not Synchronized
T
AF DSU-508 in Download Mode
DSU-508 in TEST_State
R
DSU-508 in Acquisition state
D
DSU-508 in Autotest Error
For example, you can assign a certain number of lines to Test mode, whereas another set of
lines may be in Acquisition mode or Stand-by mode.
• Acquisition - field units will acquire seismic data
• Test - selected units will be configured for Instrument or field tests. For more details see
Running tests (page 321). The Test state is also required prior to field units
firmware upgrade.
298
Dashboard Views > Geo Views
• Stand-by - selected units will be put in low-power mode in order to conserve energy
during periods of non-utilisation.
Figure 4-14 Example of units in different states
T
Geo Views
Geo Instrument View AF

The Geo Instrument view contains the same information as the Topo instrument view, but the
graphic representation is done geographically based on SPS coordinates. The colour code is
the same as the Topo Instrument view.
R
D
Figure 4-15 Geo Instrument View example

Dashboard Views > Geo Views 4
Geo Sensor View

The Geo Sensor view contains the same information as the Topo sensor view, but the graphic
representation is done geographically based on SPS coordinates. The colour code is the same
as the Topo Sensor view.
T
AF Figure 4-16 Geo Sensor View
Geo Seismonitor View

The Geo Seismonitor view contains the same information as the Topo Seismonitor view, but
R
the graphic representation is different.
D
300
Dashboard Views > Geo Views
Geo Battery View

The Geo Battery view contains the same information as the Topo Battery view, but the
graphic representation is done geographically based on SPS coordinates. The colour code is
the same as the Topo Sensor view.
T
AF
R
Figure 4-17 Geo Battery View
D

Dashboard Views > VP Table View 4
Geo State View

The Geo state view contains the same information as the Topo state view, but the graphic
representation is done geographically based on SPS coordinates. The colour code is the same
as the Topo State view.
T
AF
Figure 4-18 Geo State View
VP Table View
R
The VP view manages the list of shots, providing details on those planned, those in progress,
the next to do, and those already done (if any). It also provides access to shot controls, lets
you view the status of the acquisition, and provides information about the progress of it, i. e.
ITB, Transmit Error.
D
The VP view contains the main information for the acquisition of the data and allows you to
select which Source Point (VP) to shoot. With the layer you can show all VPs, or only those
to do, or only those done.
Figure 4-19 VP Table View
302
Dashboard Views > VP Table View
In the VPS view, click over the icon with an double arrow ‘>>’ to open the VP Layer. To
close the VP Layer click the double arrow.
VP Layer
The VP Layer allows you to expand or reduce the list of Swaths or VPs to view.
Show/Hide
VP Layer
T
AF
Figure 4-20 VP View
R
When the tree view is displayed you can select VPs & swathes that you want to be displayed
by checking the correspondent check-box.
D
Figure 4-21 VP Layer

VP State
The VP view is useful to see the state of all VP. States icons displayed in the graphical views
are displayed also in this but the icons are smaller.
The VP can have several states:
• Not associated
• Associated, not active
• Associated, active
• Sweep
• Sweep stop
• Listening
• Listening stop
• Retrieve
T
• Processing
• Export
• Done
AF
R
D
304
VP Commands
Enter Comment
The Enter Comment button opens a Text window which allows you to enter a comment after
an acquisition has taken place. This button is greyed out if an acquisition has not yet been
completed.
Enter
Comment
button
T
Text
Window
AF
R
Figure 4-22 VP Comments
Associate Source
D
By clicking on the Associate button, a list box with all defined sources is displayed. You must
select a source to associate it.
If there is an error in associating the source with the VP, the VP state will be a warning icon.
Figure 4-23 Associate Source

Dissociate Source
Use this command if, for any reason, you no longer want to use the source, or you want to
put it on stand-by or manually assign another VP to it. For example if you are working in
Slip-Sweep mode and one of the sources encounters a problem.
Figure 4-24 Dissociate Source
Clean Ready
Used to discard the “Ready” status blocked and recorded in the pushbutton. For example if
T
you do not want to do the VP associated with it (displayed in the “Rdy VP” column). As a
result, you will have to ask the shooter or vibrator leader to send the “Ready” status again.
AF
Figure 4-25 Clean Ready
R
Cancel VP
By clicking on Cancel VP button you skip the remaining acquisitions: the data from the
incomplete Source Point is discarded but the shot number remains selected in the table. You
D
must click on the source button to perform the shot again.
Figure 4-26 Cancel VP
306
End VP
By clicking on End VP button you record the incomplete Source Point without the
remaining acquisitions. Then clicking on the source button will start the next Source Point.
Figure 4-27 End VP
Force Retrieve
By clicking on Force Retrieve you ask the CX-508 to re-send the requested data. This
procedure is necessary when a Retrieve is incomplete at the end of the experience.
T
AF
Figure 4-28 Force Retrieve
R
Reshoot VP
By clicking on the Reshoot VP button, you can re-shoot the selected shot.
D
Figure 4-29 Reshoot VP
Suspend VP
By clicking on the Suspend VP button, you can ‘suspend’ the VP before choosing to either
cancel or resume it. The ‘Suspend VP’ action aims at ‘freezing’ the VP and does not prevent
the source from being re-associated to another source.
Figure 4-30 Suspend VP

Note In the ‘Suspended’ state the VP is paused. Consequently, the SEGD cannot be
exported. In the VP table, see Figure 4-21, you may visualize all suspended
VPs.
If a source has been associated to the VP, a menu option allows the operator a convenient
way to perform actions on the selected VP without having to navigate within the VP table.
Suspended VP Menu
T
AF
Figure 4-31 Suspended VP Menu
R
Resume VP
After Suspending a VP, by clicking on the Resume VP button, you can ‘resume’ the
suspended VP.
D
Figure 4-32 Resume VP
Generate Ready
Click this button to generate a Ready signal for the selected source. The pop-up menu opens
the list of available sources.
308
Figure 4-33 Generate Ready
Stack Commands
Cancel Stack
T
By clicking on Cancel Stack button the data of the selected stack are discarded. To continue
the acquisition click on the source button.
AF
Figure 4-34 Cancel Stack
R
Flush experience with Dead Traces
By clicking on Flush experience with dead traces button you complete the experience and
D
generate the SEGD file with ‘Dead’ traces flag.
Figure 4-35 Flush Experience with Dead Traces

Flush experience with Outstanding Traces

By clicking on Flush experience with Outstanding traces button you complete the
experience and generate the SEGD file with ‘Outstanding Traces’ flag.
Figure 4-36 Flush Experience with Outstanding Traces
Force Retrieve
T
AF
R
D
310
VP Information
Progress Bar
The progress bar provides information concerning the progression of the seismic experience.
Figure 4-38 Progress Bar
This allows you to see the progress for:

• Sweep
• Listening
T
• Retrieve
• Process
• Export
Source Point Information

AF
These columns indicate the source number and name used for the VP.
R
D
Figure 4-39 Source Columns

The Source Point information is displayed in the VP view. The following set of source
information is available:
• Source Nb / Source label
• Source Point line / Source Point number
• Process type
• Easting, Northing and Elevation coordinates, if available
For more information on source points see Source Point (page 191).
Spread
These columns indicate information concerning the spread to which the VP belongs.
T
AF Figure 4-40 Spread
The following set of spread information are available:

• SFL (Spread First Line) / SFN (Spread First Nb)
• Spread Nb
R
For more information on spread setup see Spread (page 182).
T0 Date/Time
D
The “T0 time” (or T0 sync code) is a virtual time mark signal terminating every T0 message
(message radioed between the DPG and
DSDs).
Progress
Indicated the number of processed VPs.
Swath nb
Identification number assigned to the set of seismic lines to shoot.
Comment
User friendly comment to describe the VP.
312
Reported
Indicates (green) if the shot information was recorded in the database.
File Nb
Identification number of the first seismic record SEGD file for this swath.
Tape Nb
Each Tape Set consists of the tape numbers ranging from the value specified in the
associated “First Tape Nb” field to that specified in the “Last Tape Nb” field.
Stack Information
T
Date/Time
Calendar date/time for stack process application.
State
AF
Current experience State. For example, Done, Not Done, Completed.
Easting/ Northing/Elevation
Geographic coordinates of the experience.
R
Acquisition Tape Label
(16 ASCII characters max.). Used to enter a user-friendly name for the reel tape #.
D
Nb Dead
Indicates the number of ‘Dead’ channels.
Consec Dead
Indicates the number of ‘Consecutive Dead’ channels.
Status
Indicates the experience status.

Launching an acquisition
In order to launch an acquisition follow the following steps.
1. Load Valid SPS files or define necessary setups.
2. Click Field ON.
3. Put the Nodes in Acquisition State
4. At first, the VP is not associated. You must associate the VP to a source to be able
to use it.
5. To set the source Active, set the system in Operation ON.
6. Click on the Source button to launch an acquisition.
7. The VP state changes depending on the different stages of the experience (sweep,
listening, retrieve, process, export).
T
Note For security reasons, when working in Shooter Driven Seismic Explosive Mode,
when a source is associated to an experience, the source icon changes from grey
to yellow.
AF
Gray Yellow
Figure 4-41 Explosive Seismic mode confirmation button

R
8. Click on the ‘Go’ button to launch the acquisition.
D
314
Dashboard Views > Micro Seismic view
Micro Seismic view

The Micro Seismic view allows you to see the evolution of data recorded in Micro Seismic
mode.
T
Figure 4-42 Micro Seismic Experiences view
AF
The Micro Seismic view can be applied by clicking the seismic options icon
and selecting Micro Seismic from the drop down list. The Seismic Options list includes all
of the seismic process types you have defined in your setup.
R
D
Figure 4-43 Seismic Options

Dashboard Views > Micro Seismic view 4
Micro Seismic commands
Operation ON/OFF
Click on the button Operation On/Off allows to put the system in acquisition or to stop it.
Operation On Operation Off

Figure 4-44 Operation On / Off
VP commands
Flush experience with Missing Traces
T
By clicking on Flush experience with Missing traces button you complete the experience
and generate the SEGD file with ‘Missing’ traces flag.
AF
Figure 4-45 Flush Experience with Missing Traces
R
Force Retrieve
D
316
Dashboard Views > Impulsive shots
Impulsive shots
Shooting system not supplying the Shooter position

If the shooting system does not supply the position of the blaster, an audio radio channel is
required for the shooter to tell you when he is ready to shoot and which Source Point to shoot.
If this is the first shot to do with this shooter, you have to associate the Source Point in the VP
table with the required shooter thanks to the associate button: As a result, clicking
on the source will send a message to the blaster and launch the acquisition.
After a shot is done, the system uses the VP table and the “increment” (see Source
(page 180)) associated with the Source to determine which shot should next get the focus.
Then you only need to click on the source icon when the shooter says he is ready, unless you
want to choose another shot in the operation table.
T
Shooting system supplying the Shooter position
All available shooters (sources) are displayed without any Shot Point number being
AF
associated to them until the GUI receives a “Ready” status (together with a GPS position)
from the shooting system (SGD-S or AWD).
After a “Ready” status is received from a shooter, the system automatically selects the Shot
Point that matches the GPS location.
An “R” (Ready) appears in the source icon and then you just have to click on it to send the
firing order to the blaster and launch the acquisition.
R
If two or more shooters are ready, the system selects the shot point corresponding to the latest
“Ready” notification. All available sources are allowed, so you can choose whichever you
like.
D
If no GPS position is received along with the “Ready” status (e. g. because of radio
interference), then the corresponding source is selected in the Active Source view but no
Shot Point is selected. In that case, you know which shooter is ready but you have to specify
which SP to shoot (by using the associate VP button). After choosing the Shot Point, click
on the source to send the firing order to the blaster and launch the acquisition.
In the case of an “Accelerated Weight Drop” (AWD) source, the stack number is notified to
the shooter, which allows the driver to determine whether all the acquisitions are completed
in a shot point, and whether he should move to another source point.

Dashboard Views > VE464 sweeps 4
VE464 sweeps
The Process Type associated with each VP in the VP table is itself associated with an
“Acquisition Type” that determines which sweep signal to generate. The “VP” view lets you
see which acquisition is in progress. In Vibroseismic operations, the way the focus passes
from a VP to another depends on the options you choose in Seismic Modes (page 194)
and Source (page 180):
• In the standard mode (no Slip-Sweep, actual vibrator positions not available), the system
relies on the VP table and on the parameters associated with the source (increment “Inc”
and “Moving” setup parameters) to determine which VP should be next after an
acquisition is done.
• If Slip-Sweep is enabled but actual vibrator positions are not supplied, the system relies
on the VP Table to determine which VP should be next.
• If actual vibrator positions are supplied, VPs are not necessarily done as scheduled in the
T
VP table. When a fleet is ready to shake and its COG lies in the vicinity of a planned
source point to be done with that fleet, the system automatically selects and highlights the
matching VP in the VP table, regardless of which VP is next scheduled. See
AF
Navigation-driven shooting (page 320).
Below is a reminder of the available methods of starting sweeps automatically when a fleet
is “Ready” at a planned source position. A vibrator is not “Ready”, and pressing the Ready
button on the DSD has no effect, unless and until its pressure sensor says the pad is down —
if a pressure sensor is used. In the case of a WIFI-networked fleet, the fleet is not “Ready”
until the Leader DSD is notified by WIFI of all the other DSDs in the fleet having their pads
R
down, and its own pad is down.
Source “Moving” option (Source Type setup menu)

D
Sequentially Randomly
( VE464 DSD network)
Standard Slip-Sweep Navigation Navigation & Slip-

(VE464) Sweep
- Vib. Fleet Ready. Slip Time expired. - Vib. Fleet Ready - Vib. Fleet Ready
Sweep And And
start Or - Source COG - Source COG match-
conditions matching planned ing planned VP
- Delay between VP.
Acquisitions or And
VPs expired. (See Note 2)
(See Note 1) - Slip Time expired.
(See Note 2)
Note (1) In that case, the arrival of the “Ready” status overrides the operator-selected
delay.
318
Dashboard Views > VE464 sweeps
Note (2) The VE464 “DSD Network” option (see DSD Network (page 237)
allows each vibrator to supply its GPS position. When a vibrator fleet is ready
(pads down) the leader sends a message containing both the Ready status and the
resulting Centre Of Gravity of the source, calculated from the GPS position of
each vibrator. This enables the system to automatically select the matching
source point in the VP table. This way of shooting is referred to as the source see
Navigation-driven shooting (page 320) mode. If the COG falls outside
the programmed circle, then a warning dialog box shows up.
Note (3) If for any reason you need to redo a sweep, you do not need to cycle the
vibrator pad Up/Down: simply press the Ready button on the DSD (on the
Leader DSD in the case of a WIFI networked fleet).
Note (4) Additional conditions may apply when working with clusters (see Cluster
(page 181)).
T
AF
R
D

Dashboard Views > Navigation-driven shooting 4
Navigation-driven shooting
If you enable sources to move randomly rather than sequentially (see Randomly Moving
(page 200)) and a GPS receiver is attached to each DSD, then you can use the
“Navigation-driven shooting” (or more simply “Navigation”) mode.
The “Navigation” mode relies on the “VE464 DSD Network” option that allows the
geographical location of a vibrator fleet (computed by the fleet’s leader and referred to as
source COG) to be relayed to the 508XT system as soon as all the vibrators in the fleet are
ready, with their pads down. Then the 508XT can select the matching VP from the VP table
and shoot it automatically. As a result, VPs can be shot in any order by any fleet.
Note The COG displayed in the Positioning main window is computed from the status
messages sent by the DSDs to the DPG after sweeping. The requirements for the
Navigation-driven shooting mode are the following:
T
• Single fleet for each VP
• Continuous mode activated
• Planned source geographical positions (from SPS files)
•
AF
VE464 DSD Network option implemented
R
D
320
Dashboard Views > Single Test View
Single Test View

The single test view is useful to see every occurrence of every test. In this table, there are 2
levels:
• In the first level, there is one line for each kind of test (instrument and field).
• In the second level, there is every occurrence of test for each test. For example, in the
above snapshot, the field Noise has been done 3 times (at 10:30:23, 10:48:03 and
10:48:30).
• In the right-view panel, are single test results for all nodes.
First-level Right-view panel

Second Level
T
AF
R
Figure 4-47 Single Test View
D
Running tests
1. In the Topo or Geo State view, set the instruments in your spread that you wish to
test to Test mode. (see Topo State View (page 295) or Geo Views
(page 299)).
2. Using the Select Multiple Objects tool Select multiple objects (page 44),
select the field instruments that you want to test. If you want test all instrument, the
selection is not needed (unless your are in State View, then each element must be
selected).
3. From the Instrument or Sensor Tools drops down list, select the type of test you wish
to run.
4. Click Go in the Instrument or Sensor Tools. If you are in State View, the test is
launched in the Single Test View by clicking on the Green Arrow.

Dashboard Views > Single Test View 4
Test results will be displayed, in the Numeric View. Test results are also visible in
the histograms. See Histogram Instrument View on page 358.
After you launch a test function on any unit, a dark blue background appears on that unit in
the graphic view, meaning that the unit is busy.
The colour of each instrument or sensor icon depends on the limits programmed for the
Instrument or Sensor test selected.
To change the Sensor test limits, see Sensor Type (page 121) in the description of
Survey setup.
Instrument and Sensor icons in the graphic view are shown in:
• Green if within the test limits.
• Red if out of test limits.
• Light blue if not tested
T
VP Test Commands
Cancel Retrieve
AF
By clicking on Cancel Retrieve button the data of the selected test are discarded. To
continue the test click on the source button.
R
Figure 4-48 Cancel Retrieve
D
Flush experience with Missing Traces

By clicking on Flush experience with Missing traces button you complete the experience
and generate the SEGD file with ‘Missing’ traces flag.
Figure 4-49 Flush Experience with Missing Traces
322
Dashboard Views > Multi Tests View
Force Retrieve
Multi Tests View

Different instrument tests may be grouped in order to create ‘Multi Tests’. Multi tests are
T
defined in the Setup Parameters --> Test (page 99).
Click on the ‘Multi Tests’ icon on the dashboard in order to view the list of available Multi
tests.
AF
R
D
Figure 4-51 Multi Tests view selector

Dashboard Views > Multi Tests View 4
Multi Test Display

The Multi Test view is useful to see the list of single tests within a test group.
1st Level
2nd Level
3rd Level
Figure 4-52 Multi Test view
• The First level, contains information about the test in progress or about the latest test run.
T
- The « Commands » column contains the buttons to start or to stop ( )a
chained test.
- The « Progress » column indicates the number of the current test and the
AF
total number of tests to run.
- «File Nb » and « Tape Nb » columns are updated when the test is
exported.
- The other columns are the same as those of «Single Test »
• Test gain (« Gain » column)
R
• Test State button ( « Tested Units » column) :
- : test not done
D
- : test acquisition running

- : waiting for test results
- : all test results received and are within test limits
- : all test results received but some of them are out of test limits
- : error occured during the test
- : all results are not received at the end of time out
- : test is cancelled
• In the Second level, there is every occurrence of test for each test. For example, in
Figure 4-52, the Field Noise test has been done at 10:08:03, and the Field Tilt test has
been done at 10:09:09.
Also available at this level is the command to export all the tests not yet exported.
324
Dashboard Views > Multi Tests View
• The Third level lists all the single tests included in the Multi tests. Each test can be
exported or cancelled using the ‘Cancel Export’ button .
Running Multi Tests

1. In the Topo or Geo State view, set the instruments in your spread that you wish to
test to Test mode. (see Topo State View (page 295) or Geo Views
(page 299)).
2. Using the Select Multiple Objects tool Select multiple objects (page 44),
select the field instruments that you want to test. If you want test all instruments, the
selection is not needed (unless your are in State View, then each element must be
selected).
Note Multi tests must contain at least one seismic trace (field tests cannot be run with
T
auxiliary traces).
3. From the Multi Test window,
- Select the GREEN arrow to run multi-tests for elements in the Graphical
Selection.
AF
Run tests for Run tests for
Graphical Selection Absolute Spread
R
D
- Or use the PURPLE arrow to run multi-tests for the Absolute Spread.
See also, Absolute Spreads (page 182).

Note Unlike VP acquisition, no error will be raised if no trace matches a test topo
location. However, if a trace within the test spread is in acquisition state, the test
will not be run and an error message will be displayed.
4. At the end of each single test, if the option ‘Recorded’, is checked in the Test setup,
the test is automatically exported and the columns ‘File Nb’ and ‘Tape Nb’ are
updated.

Dashboard Views > Multi Tests View 4
T
Figure 4-53 Test example
Test results will be displayed, in the Single Tests view. Test results are also visible in the
AF
histogrammes. See Histogram Instrument View on page 358. If the option
« Recorded » is checked in the Test Setup, the test is automatically exported and the
columns « File Nb » et « Tape Nb » are updated.
Interrupting a Multi Test

At any time, the operator may interrupt the sequence of the chained tests.
R
When clicking on the Stop button ( ), the test is aborted without waiting for the time out.
The following tests are not run but set to « cancelled state » ( ).
VP Increment Management
D
If the «Sequential Moving » option is selected in the seismic mode setup, when associating
a source to a VP, it is possible to change the source increment using the command ( ) in
the VP table.
Figure 4-54 VP Increment Management dialog
326
Action Toolbar > Multi Tests View
The source setup is updated in consequence without stopping the production (no use to go
Operation OFF).
Us the ‘ +’ and ‘-’ to increment or decrease the source increment. You
may also use the to inverse the increment. For example, if you have added an
increment of ‘1’, you can inverse the increment to ‘-1’.
Action Toolbar
The Action Toolbar is located between the GIS and the Single Tests panel. These buttons
allow you to manage the system.
Clean Dissociate (de)Activate Operation Available Field
T
All Ready all sources all sources ON/OFF Sources ON/OFF
AF
R
Seismic mode
selection
D
Figure 4-55 Action Toolbar
• Operation ON/OFF - allows you to activate / deactivate operation.

• Source Icon - allows you to select the seismic source to activate.
• Field ON/OFF - allows you to turn field instruments ON / OFF.
• Clean all ready – Used to discard all-ready status see Clean Ready (page 306).
• Disassociate all sources – Used to disassociate all sources to the corresponding VP see
Dissociate Source (page 306).
• Active/de-active all sources – used to active or de-active all sources. This button is a
shortcut to individual clicks on all source icons.
• Seismic mode selection – used to select the seismic mode for the acquisition. See
Seismic Modes (page 194).

Action Toolbar > Multi Tests View 4
Source Toolbar button

The icons below represent a source which evolves with respect of its state.
When the system is in Field Off, the icons are greyed out and unusable. After a Field On,
the source buttons are accessible and can have different representations.
Start Sweep
If a source is associated with a VP and this source is active; clicking on the source button
launches an acquisition. It sends the Firing Order.
Unless you are using an Impulsive process type, the selected Seismic option (Continuous/
Discontinuous/Manual) determines how the first or next acquisition for the Source Point
selected in the operations table will be launched.
Stop
T
By clicking on a source button when an acquisition is running, you stop the progress of the
acquisition sequence and finish the current operation (acquisition or dump).
At this point, in Impulsive mode, you may dump the data to the record process. In other
AF
modes, you can choose either to continue the sequence or to restart the acquisition or end the
sequence, using the buttons in the commands column of the VP view. To continue the
acquisition click on the source button once again.
Operation ON/OFF
Click on the button Operation On/Off allows to put the system in acquisition or to stop it.
R
D
Operation On Operation Off

Figure 4-56 Operation On / Off
Note When in Operation On, certain setups are not editable.
Activate / Deactivate Sources

When in Vibrator Mode, click on this button to Activate / Deactivate vibrator sources.
Activate Sources Deactivate Sources
Figure 4-57 Activate / Deactivate Sources
328
Action Toolbar > Multi Tests View
Field ON/OFF
The Field On / Off button allows you to turn on or turn off the entire acquisition system.
Field On Field Off

Figure 4-58 Field On / Off
When you are in Field On, certain setups are not editable.
T
AF
R
D

Contextual Menus (Right-click) > Multi Tests View 4
Contextual Menus (Right-click)

The Contextual menu appears when the end-user Right-Clicks on a Graphic item. Depending
on the type of view or type of item, a menu appears.
Each CX-508 knows its LOW port and a HIGH port.
Each CX-508 is able to be connected on Transverse: T1 and/or T2
There’s no specific convention. The HCI will only allow you authorised actions on ports
according the position of the CX-508 on the spread (Transverse, Line, secondary transverse,
etc).
For a better understanding, in the following schematic, the CX-508 are connected as
described:
T
AF
R
D
Figure 4-59
330
Contextual Menus (Right-click) > CX-508 on Tranverse
CX-508 on Tranverse
CX-508 on Main Transverse (Closest to SCI-508)
T
Figure 4-60 CX-508 Layout example
AF
When a right-click is performed on the ‘green’ CX-508 illustrated in the schema. The
following contextual menu will appear.
R
D
Figure 4-61 Right-click menu example

Contextual Menus (Right-click) > CX-508 on Tranverse 4
Table 4-10 CX-508 Right-click menu options
Switch Off Transverse 1 to CX Turn OFF the next CX-508 on the Transverse.
Switch Off Transverse 1 to SCI Turn OFF the SCI-508.
Switch Off/On HIGH/LOW Turn OFF/ON the connected High/Low line.
Switch Off XDP Turn OFF the XDP port.
Switch Off/On Transverse 1 Switch OFF/ON the transverse on side ‘T1’.
T
Switch Off/On Transverse 2 Switch OFF/ON the transverse on side ‘T2’.
AF Switch OFF/ON the port on the HIGH side.
Switch Off/On HIGH A command is launched to the neighbor to switch OFF/
ON its LOW port also.
Switch OFF/ON the port on the LOW side even if no

Switch Off/On LOW
FDU-58 is connected.
Switch Off/On XDP Switch OFF/ON the XDP port.

R
Reset Reset the selected CX-508.
Neighbor on
Reset Line Reset the closest CX-508 on its LOW port.
D
LOW
All CX-508 on
Reset Line Reset all CX-508 connected on its LOW port.
LOW
Neighbor on
Reset Line Reset the closest CX-508 on its HIGH port.
HIGH
All CX-508 on
Reset Line Reset all CX-508 connected on its HIGH port.
HIGH
Neighbor on Reset the closest CX-508 on its T1 port because it’s a

Reset Transverse
Transverse 1 CX-508.
Adjacent line Reset the whole Line connected on its T1 port because
Reset Transverse
on Transverse 1 this router is a CX-508.
332
Contextual Menus (Right-click) > CX-508 on Line
Table 4-10 CX-508 Right-click menu options
Neighbor on Reset the closest CX-508 on its T2 port because it’s a

Reset Transverse
Adjacent line Reset the closest whole Line connected on its T2 port
Reset Transverse
on Transverse 2 because this router is a CX-508.
CX-508 on Line
T
AF
A right click is performed on the ‘green’ CX-508 showed on the schema:

R
The following contextual menu will appear.
D
Figure 4-63 Right-click menu example

Contextual Menus (Right-click) > CX-508 on Line 4
Table 4-11 Right-click menu options
Assign the associated receiver position and other

Set Assign
parameters of the CX-508.
Asks selected CX-508 for Concentrator information, this

Audit
will be sent to the server.
Transverse Port 1 Switch Off Transverse Port 1
Transverse Port 2 Switch Off Transverse Port 2
Switch Off High Port Switch Off the Port on the High side.
T
Low Port Switch Off the Port on the Low side.
XDP
AF
Transverse Port 1
Switch Off the XDP port
Switch On Transverse Port 1.
Transverse Port 2 Switch On Transverse Port 2
Switch On High Port Switch On the Port on the High side.

R
Low Port Switch On the Port on the Low side.
XDP Switch On the XDP port

D
Reset Resets the selected CX-508.
Neighbor on Low Resets the closest CX on Low port
All on Low Resets all CX-508 connected on Low side

Reset Line
Neighbor on High Resets the closest CX-508 on High port
All on High Resets all CX-508 connected on High side
Reset Transverse Not able to reset any port on its Transverse
Example,
On the CX-508#1384, a Switch OFF LOW port has been performed.
The CX-508 turns to “Orange” to warn the operator that a Segment is OFF.
334
Contextual Menus (Right-click) > CX-508 on Line
The next segment of FDU-508 disappears because the Segment is turned OFF.
The following Segments of FDU-508 turn to “Black” because of undetermined status.
The CX-508 neighbour and the followers, turn to “red” because they don’t respond regularly
to the central unit.
CX-508 on Line and Secondary Transverse
T
AF
R
A right click is performed on the ‘green’ CX-508 showed on the schema:
The contextual menu will appear with the following options.
Table 4-12 CX-508 contextual menu options
D
Allows you to Assign the associated receiver position and

Set Assign
other parameters of the CX-508.
Asks selected CX-508 for their Concentrator information,

Audit
this will be sent to the server.

Contextual Menus (Right-click) > CX-508 on Line 4
Not able to switch OFF the Transverse on side ‘T1’ because

Transverse Port 1
transmission is from CX-508 located above it.
Able to switch OFF the Transverse on side ‘T2’ (in this case
Transverse Port 2
nothing connected yet)
Switch Off Able to Switch Off the port on the high side: A command is
High
launched to the neighbor to switch OF it’s Low port also.
Able to Switch Off the port on the low side even f no FDU is
Low
connected.
XDP Able Switch Off the XDP port
T
Not able to switch ON the following Transverse on side ‘T1’
Transverse 1
because already ON.

AF
Transverse 2
because already ON.
Not able to switch ON the port on the high side because

Switch On High
already ON.
Not able to switch ON the port on the low side because

Low
R
already ON.
Not able to switch ON the port on the XDP side because

XDP
already ON.
D
Neighbor on Low Able to Reset the closest CX-508 on Low port
All on Low Able to Reset all CX-508 connected on Low side

Reset Line
Neighbor on High Able to Reset the closest CX-508 on High port
All on High Able to Reset all CX-508 connected on High side
Example,
On CX-508#1483 (where a redundant Transverse is connected) a switch OFF of its High port
shows it in “Orange” to warn the end-user about a Port OFF.
The connected FDU-508 on its High port disappears.
336
Contextual Menus (Right-click) > SCI-508
SCI-508
SCI-508 (Field On State)
T
Figure 4-65 SCI-508 Layout example
AF
A right click is performed on the ‘green’ SCI-508 showed on the schema:
Table 4-13 SCI-508 Right-click Menu Options
Transverse 1 Able to switch OFF the Transverse on side ‘T1’.

R
Transverse 2 Able to switch OFF the Transverse on side ‘T2’.
Switch Off High Able to Switch Off the port on the high side.
D
Low Able to Switch Off the port on the low side.
XDP Able Switch Off the XDP port

Contextual Menus (Right-click) > SCI-508 4

Transverse 1
because already ON.

Transverse 2
because already ON.
Not able to switch ON the port on the high side because

Switch On High
already ON.
Not able to switch ON the port on the low side because

Low
already ON.
Not able to switch ON the port on the XDP side because

XDP
already ON.
T
Reset All Able to Reset all the connected CX-508 on the spread.
Neighbor on
Low
AF Able to Reset the closest CX-508 on Low port
All on Low Able to Reset all CX-508 connected on Low side

Reset Line
Neighbor on
Able to Reset the closest CX-508 on High port
High
R
All on High Able to Reset all CX-508 connected on High side
Neighbor on Able to Reset the closest CX-508 on T1 port because it’s a

D
Adjacent Line Able to Reset the closest whole line connected on it’s T1
on Transverse 1 port because this router is a CX-508.
Reset
Transverse Neighbor on Able to Reset the closest CX-508 on T2 port because it’s a
Adjacent Line Able to Reset the closest whole line connected on it’s T2
on Transverse 2 port because this router is a CX-508.
Able to send a Field ON Command to all CX-508 connected

Field On
because HCI_State is Field OFF.
Able to send a Field OFF Command to all CX-508

Field OFF
connected.
338
Contextual Menus (Right-click) > SCI-508
Asks all connected CX-508 their Concentrator information,

Audit All
this will be sent to the server.
WARNING
In case of a reset to the SCI_B-508 or the SMX-508 both units must be powered
OFF, before the reset. Additionally, the SMX-508 must be powered ON, before the
SCI_B-508.
Example,
On the SCI-508, a SwitchOFF T2 port has been performed.
The SCI-508 turns to “Orange” to warn the end-user that Transverse ports have been setup
T
OFF.
The CX-508 on the transverse will turn to “red” because they don’t regularly answer the UC.
The following FDU-508 turn to “Black” because of undetermined status.The FDU-508 keep
AF
there mode: if before the Transverse switched OFF the FDU-508 were in ACQUISITION, at
next switch ON of the Transverse, they are still in ACQUISITON mode.
SCI-508 (Field OFF State)

R
D
Figure 4-66 SCI-508 (Field Off State)
A right click is performed on the SCI-508 showed on the schema:


Contextual Menus (Right-click) > SCI-508 4
Table 4-14 Right-click Menu Options
Allows you to Assign the associated receiver position and other parameters
Set Assign
of the SCI.
Audit All Disabled because HCI state is Field OFF.
Get Properties Displays the properties of the SCI.
Locate on other Displays a red bubble on other opened views at the location of the selected
Views element.
T
AF
R
D
340
Contextual Menus (Right-click) > SMX-508
SMX-508
The SMX-508 is an additional hardware equipment extending the recorder output capacity
from 2 to 12 primary transverses (@1 Gb/s).
The SMX-508 is not directly represented on the 508XT HCI. However, if available, it is
present in the Recorder Truck icon. Right-click on the Recorder truck icon will bring up the
SMX-508 menu.
Recorder Truck SMX-508
Icon right-click menu
T
AF
R
Figure 4-67 SMX-508 right click menu
Table 4-15 Right-click menu options

D
Switches OFF the indicated SMX port. Only ports that have
Switch Off SMX
a connected CX-508 are displayed.
Switches ON the indicated SMX port. Only ports that have a

Switch On SMX
connected CX-508 are displayed.
Reset
SMX Reset the selected neighboring SMX.
Neighbor
Reset Resets the CX-508 that is connected to the SMX port as well
SMX
Adjacent as the rest of the line.
Get Properties Provides the properties of the UC-508.

Contextual Menus (Right-click) > SMX-508 4
WARNING
SCI_B-508 or SMX-508 cannot be powered off individually: both units must be
powered off together. Additionally, the SMX-508 must be powered ON, before the
SCI_B-508.
T
AF
R
D
342
Chapter
T
5 Field Perspective
AF
R
• Overview (page 344)
• Instrument View (page 345)
• Concentrator View (page 347)
D
• Analog Sensor View (page 349)

• Digital Sensor View (page 351)
• Completion Acquisition view (page 353)
• Completion Test View on page 357
• Histogram Instrument View (page 358)
• Histogram Sensor View (page 359)
• History View (page 360)

Field Perspective
Overview > 5
Overview
The Field perspective provides Numeric views, Histogram views, Network views and
Completion views, concerning your survey.
Numeric views display the available results in tables.
T
AF
R
Figure 5-1 Field Perspective content
The Field Perspective allows you to view details on:

D
• Instrument Test Results and Histogram view

• Sensor Test Results and Histogram view
• Concentrator information
• History of Instrument position
• Network behaviour
• Completion Results
• Radio Box
344
Field Perspective
Instrument View >
Instrument View
The numeric instrument view displays the available Test results for FDU-508, DSU1-508,
and CX-508 in tables.
Figure 5-2 Numeric Instrument View
T
The following columns are available:
Type
AF
Type of unit: FDU-508 or DSU1-508.
State
Current state: ACQUISITION, TEST, STAND BY
R
AutoTest
Autotest status: OK or NOK.
Easting, Northing, Elevation

D
Coordinates (Easting, Northing, Elevation) of the field unit.
Test Results
Last instrument test results: Noise, Distortion, Gain & Phase. The results are also available
in the Single test view, see Single Test View (page 321).
Version
Current firmware version
Last Test Date

Indicates the last time the instrument was tested.
CX Master
Indicates the identification number of the Master CX-508.

Field Perspective
Instrument View > 5
Note In any of the numeric views (Instrument, Sensor, Concentrator), it is possible to

only display the results which do not fall within the limits defined by the system
or specified in the setup menu.
T
AF
Figure 5-3 Numeric Instrument Error
Locate on other Views

In any of the numeric views (Instrument, Sensor, Concentrator), this feature allows you to
R
locate field units from tables, completion view and QC viewer (a.) and display them in other
views (b.).
This function is available by right-clicking on a selected instrument.
D
a.
b.
Figure 5-4 Locate on other views example
346
Field Perspective
Concentrator View >
Concentrator View
The numeric concentrator view displays the available test results for CX-508 in tables.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 5-5 Numeric Concentrator View
The following columns are available:
Box Type
Type of unit: CX-508 or SCI-508.
Serial Number
Serial number of the instrument.
Line Name / Point Number

Assignment of the CX-508 or SCI-508.

Field Perspective
Concentrator View > 5
State
Current state: ON or OFF (not invisible).
Field Mode
Connected or Autonomous
AutoTest
Autotest status: OK or NOK.
Line Configuration
Date and time of the last crew setup modification.
Synchro source
T
GPS source for line synchronization: From GPS or EXTERNAL
GPS Latitude (DMS)

AF
Number of satellites seen by the CX-508.
GPS Longitude (DMS)

Number of satellites seen by the CX-508.
Battery level
R
External battery level.
Leakage Low / High

D
Leakage measurement performed by the CX-508.
Version
Current firmware version.
IP Address
Current IP address of the CX-508 in the network.
Internal Memory Occupancy Rate

Internal memory actual occupancy in (%).
348
Field Perspective
Analog Sensor View >
Analog Sensor View

The Analog Sensor table displays the available sensor results in tables.
T
AF
R
Figure 5-6 Numeric Sensor View
Type
D
Analog sensor type.
Serial Number
Serial number of the Instrument.
Channel Number
Number of instrument channels.
Type Number
Sensor Index as described in the Sensor Type (page 121)
Line Name
Indicates the line number on which the instrument is located.

Field Perspective
Analog Sensor View > 5
Point Number
Indicates the point number on which the instrument is located.

SEG-D Code
SEG-D code indicating the type of sensor used (i.e “2” for Geophone Vertical for instance).
This code has no effect on the performance of the system. It is only written to tape (byte 21
in block 1 of the Trace Header Extension).
Last Test Date

Last instrument test results: Resistance, Noise, Tilt, Leakage and Distortion (for DSU1-580
T
only). The results are also available in the Single Test View (page 321).
AF
R
D
350
Field Perspective
Digital Sensor View >
Digital Sensor View

The Digital Sensor table displays the available sensor results in tables.
T
AF Figure 5-7 Digital Sensor View
Type
Sensor Index as described in the Sensor Type (page 121)
Serial Number
Serial number of the Instrument.
R
Channel Number
Number of channels in the digital sensor.
D
Type Number
Type of Instrument.
Line Name
Line number where the instrument is located.
Point Number
Point number of the Instrument.


Field Perspective
Digital Sensor View > 5
SEG-D Code
SEG-D code indicating the type of sensor used (i.e “2” for Geophone Vertical for instance).
This code has no effect on the performance of the system. It is only written to tape (byte 21
in block 1 of the Trace Header Extension).
Test Results
Last instrument test results: Resistance, Noise, Tilt, Leakage and Distortion (for DSU1-580
only). The results are also available in the Single Test View (page 321).
T
AF
R
D
352
Field Perspective
Completion Acquisition view >
Completion Acquisition view

The completion view is useful to show the state of the retrieve for concentrators.
Horizontal Vertical Maximum
Sorting Sorting Retrieve
Option Option Delay
T
AF CX-508
Completion Cell Status
Figure 5-8 Completion View
Each cell of the completion view corresponds to a concentrator. A colour code indicates the
R
status of the data retrieval of the concentrator (including the attached field units, FDU-508,
DSU1-508 etc.).
“Zoom in” and “Zoom out” can be done with the mouse scroll wheel.
D
Maximum Retrieve Delay

The Maximum Retrieve Delay is a duration (in days) allowing a customized colour code data
retrieval monitoring.
CX-508 cell color code

For any shot, the corresponding CX-508 cell can appear with the following color codes:
Cyan: the concentrator does not have any data for the corresponding shot. This typically
happens when the corresponding CX-508 (and attached field units) is not in the active
spread.
Green: all data has been retrieved for this shot.
Yellow: some data from the corresponding CX-508 still need to be retrieved and 75% of the
“Maximum Retrieve Delay” has not been reached.

Field Perspective
Completion Acquisition view > 5
Orange: some data from the corresponding CX-508 still need to be retrieved and 75% of the
“Maximum Retrieve Delay” has been reached.
Red: some data from the corresponding CX-508 still need to be retrieved and the
“Maximum Retrieve Delay” has been exceeded.
Example:
The Max Retrieve delay is set to 8 days. The following colour code will be applied:
- During the first 6 days after the time of the shot, the corresponding cell will be displayed in
yellow.
- Between day 6 and day 8, the cell will be displayed in orange.
- After 8 days the cell will be displayed in red.
T
AF
Figure 5-9 Completion color code
Sorting options
The completion view can be sorted horizontally and vertically, based on different parameters.
R
Vertical sorting option:
In the vertical axis, there is the list of all shots done in the selected swath.
D
They can be displayed and ordered:

• by shot ID
• by TB (Time Break) Date
Figure 5-10 Completion by shot ID
354
Field Perspective
Completion Acquisition view >
Figure 5-11 Completion by TB
T
Horizontal sorting option:
In the horizontal axis, the list of concentrators (that has been included in at least one spread
of one of the shots) can be displayed and ordered:
AF
• by serial nb
• by position (last position of the CX-508 known by the
system). If the position is unknown, the Serial number is
displayed instead.
R
D
Figure 5-12 Completion by Serial number
Figure 5-13 Completion by Location

Field Perspective
Completion Acquisition view > 5
Detailed view
When the user clicks on a cell, another view is displayed at the bottom of with detailed
information on the corresponding concentrator.
In the example below. clicking on a CX-508 will give you details on each of the connected
FDU-508s.
T
Figure 5-14 Detailed completion view example
Reset
AF
You can Reset a CX-508 by selecting it in the Completion view (right-click on mouse) and
choosing Reset.
R
D
Figure 5-15 Reset selected CX-508
356
Field Perspective
Completion Test View >
Completion Test View

The Completion Test View allows you to recover test data from concentrators. It functions
in the same way as Completion Acquisition view.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 5-16 Completion Test View
Placing the cursor on a square will provide you information on the test (Test type. Date,
Location, maste CX).
Clicking on a square will display the reqults for each individual DSU.

Field Perspective
Histogram Instrument View > 5
Histogram Instrument View

Results from Instrument tests can be displayed in the form of histograms in Histogram
Instrument view.
T
AF
Figure 5-17
R
By default, the horizontal scale is automatically adjusted so that all samples can be shown.
If you choose Manual range, then the associated fields prompt the Min. and max. values of
the horizontal scale, so that you can change them and adjust the scale manually.
D
If any bar surpasses the specification limit, that part of the bar which lies outside the
specification range may be displayed in blue (rather than red — because this does not
necessarily mean that there are any results at fault).
The Bars Number option allows you to indicate the maximum number of bars to display.
358
Field Perspective
Histogram Sensor View >
Histogram Sensor View

Results from sensor tests can be displayed in the form of histograms in Histogram Sensor
view.
T
AF
Figure 5-18
By default, the horizontal scale is automatically adjusted so that all samples can be shown.
R
If you choose Manual range, then the associated fields prompt the Min. and Max. values of
the horizontal scale, so that you can change them and adjust the scale manually.
If any bar surpasses the specification limit, that part of the bar which lies outside the
specification range may be displayed in blue (rather than red — because this does not
D
necessarily mean that there are any results at fault).

The Bars Number option allows you to indicate the maximum number of bars to display.

Field Perspective
History View > 5
History View
The history view displays information concerning field units that have been at one point
connected to the spread.
History information includes the date, time and location where field units were last
connected.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 5-19 History View
360
Chapter
T
6 VE464 Perspective
AF
R
• VE464 Perspective Overview (page 344)
• Set Vib Fleet view (page 364)
• Set Servo View (page 370)
D
• Get DSD View (page 372)

• Get QC (page 375)
• Get QC Graph (page 376)
• Get Radio Similarities (page 377)
• Update Firmware view (page 380)
• Normal Acquisition views (page 382)
• Statistics View (page 392)
• Local Acquisition (page 395)
• Update Custom (page 398)

VE464 Perspective
Overview > 6
Overview
The VE464 perspective allows you to configure the Source deployment and visualize
numeric and graphical source QC. This section also allows you to update VE464 firmware.
AUTO/ Reconnect to
MANUAL DPG
T
AF
R
D
Figure 6-1 VE464 Perspective
Manual / Auto
Clicking Manual isolates the DPG from the 508XT and enables its local functions (e.g. local
acquisition). As a result data acquisition in vibroseismic operations is suspended until the
DPG is reset to Auto.
Clicking Auto connects the DPG to the 508XT (and checks the DSD Setup parameters)
allowing it to perform data acquisition (if the VE464 window is ready, with consistent
parameter settings, and if the Vib Fleet function has been completed).
With Auto activated, DPG local functions and some Operation and VE464 settings are
inhibited.
362
VE464 Perspective
Overview >
Reconnect to DPG
Click this button to re-connect to the DPG after a DPG upgrade or in case the VE464
Connection Status icon has turned red.
Figure 6-2 VE464 Connection Status
Clear QC
The Clear QC button available from the view toolbar allows you to reset the status in Normal
Acquisition views.
T
AF
R
D

VE464 Perspective
Set Vib Fleet view > 6
Set Vib Fleet view

The 508XT allows you to quickly configure Vibrator fleets.
A crew may consist of up to 100 groups of DSDs referred to as “fleets” (one fleet for each
vibration source). The VibFleet view is used to specify which DSDs each fleet includes.
Note that if you are using a TracsTDMA radio repeater between the DPG and DSDs, with
the “Dual-Frequency, no scan” option you may have to change the Frequency channel
setting on a DSD, as the source moves. In that case you have to use the VibFleet function
each time you change the Frequency channel manually.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 6-3 Set Vib Fleet
Available DSDs
This panel, prompts the list of DSDs available to the crew, see Crew VE (page 236) but
not assigned to any fleet yet.
Using the drag and drop method move the vibrators you want to incorporate into a fleet from
this panel to desired Associated DSDs panel.
364
VE464 Perspective
Set Vib Fleet view >
To select all DSDs, check the check box near the label “Available DSDs” .
Figure 6-4 Available DSD
Fleets
In this panel, all Fleets with their Radio defined in Operation / Source Setup (see Source
(page 180)) are displayed.
Check the box near the label ‘Fleet’, to select or unselect all associated DSDs. Use Ctrl or
Shift key from the client keyboard to select several DSDs.
T
AF Figure 6-5 Fleets panel
Associated DSDs
You can see which DSDs are associated to which fleet. The first Vibrator (DSD) entered in
a fleet’s list box is assigned to Position 1 in each source pattern, the second to Position 2, etc.
Ex: “p1” corresponds to the vibrator with position 1.
If you want to implement a wireless “DSD network”, you have to specify which DSD is the
Leader in the fleet.
R
Double-clicking on any DSD in the list determines which vibrator is the Leader: the truck of
the icon becomes yellow.
The colour of the DSD shows you the state of it:
D
• Grey background: The DSD is associated to the fleet but the vibfleet was not done.
• Blue background: the vibfleet is done but the Set DSD is not done.
• Green background: the set DSD is done.
• Red: the Installation or Initialization routine needs to be performed on a DSD.
Vib Fleet Button

After selecting (highlighting) the desired DSDs in each fleet's list box, clicking VibFleet
button will associate the DSDs to the corresponding fleet.

VE464 Perspective
If TDMA radios are used, the frame is set to communicate between DPG and DSD and to
send the GPS correction.
T
AF
Figure 6-6 VibFleet
The vibrators which are ready to receive a Set DSD command in each fleet are shown in blue
and the message “DSD#.. Wrong setup DSD table” appears. Use the Set DSD function to
R
load the parameters.
Note This command can be launched only in Manual Mode.
D
Update VibFleet Button

Whether in “Auto” or “Manual” mode, the Update button at the foot of the Fleet window
allows appending, removing, or replacing one or more vibrators without affecting the other
fleets. You do not have to click Vibfleet (anyway, in “Auto” mode the Vibfleet button is
dimmed).
Note that the source setup, see Source (page 180) determines which Radio is used by
which fleet, and only the Vibfleet function (clicking on Vibfleet rather than Update)
determines how many TDMA time-slots are required for communications with the DSDs in
each fleet. Therefore the Update button works as follows, for each TracsTDMA or Raveon
box:
• You cannot use “Update” to increase how many fleets (each including one or more
vibrators) are controlled by a TracsTDMA or Raveon box, nor to increase the total
number of vibrators used in the whole set of fleets controlled by that TracsTDMA or
Raveon box. For example, assuming you have 5 fleets and the Vibfleet function assigns
2 of them (each including one or more vibrators) to Tracs1 (or Raveon1), and the other 3
366
VE464 Perspective
to Tracs2 (or Raveon2). If, for any reason, you want to swap Tracs1 (or Raveon1) for
Tracs2 (or Raveon2), you cannot use “Update” to do that, since Tracs1 (or Raveon1) is
set to control only 2 fleets.
• “Update” can only be used to replace one or more vibrators (whether or not the fleet is
complete), or to add/remove one or more vibrators if the fleet is incomplete. The vibrators
that respond to the Update function are shown in blue in the list box for the fleet (like
after a click on Vibfleet).
• A fleet cannot be used for any acquisition unless and until it is complete (that is, all the
vibrators in the list should appear in bold characters). Only those fleets in which all DSDs
have responded (all shown in bold characters) are visible to other functions such as Set
DSD, Set Servo, Get DSD, Get QC, etc. There is no way of using these functions on any
DSD that is part of a fleet in which one or more DSDs failed to respond to the Update
(or VibFleet) function.
T
Advantages of using the Update function in ‘Auto’ mode
To increase productivity, you can use the Update button in “Auto” mode (rather than go to
AF
“Manual” and click on Vibfleet to launch the Fleet function), for example:
• to replace a vibrator by a spare one without stopping production;
• or to begin production even though some fleets are not ready yet.
For example, assuming you launch the Fleet function in order to use four fleets and this
reveals only three are complete, you may well want to begin production, and then you will
R
use Update to include the fourth fleet when it is ready, provided all DSD parameters are set
properly (remember in Auto mode you are not allowed to use such functions as Set DSD, Set
Servo, etc.).
D
Another example is illustrated below: Figure 6-7 shows the list box for each fleet after
clicking on Vibfleet (all DSDs in blue, except DSD 6 which failed to respond).
Figure 6-7 Associated DSDs
In the above example:

• The maximum number of fleets that can be controlled by Tracs1 is 3 (rather than 4).
Therefore, you cannot use Update to assign any DSD to Fleet4 unless and until two
DSDs are removed from another fleet.

VE464 Perspective
• The maximum number of DSDs that can be used is 6 (rather than 5), but if no change is
made, only fleets #2 and #3 can be used (i. e. only DSDs #1, #2, #3 and #4).
• The Update button can, for example, be used to:
• update Fleet4 to try again DSD 6, or replace it by another
(unused) DSD, for example DSD 7;
• or update Fleet4 to remove DSD 5 and DSD 6 from it, and
then update Fleet5 to assign two DSDs to it (#7 and #8, or #5
and #6).
T
AF
R
D
Figure 6-8 Set VibFleet
Undo Button
The undo button clears the last action done (clear fleet, drag and drop a DSD,…).
Set DSD button

This function is used to upload sweep-type parameters from the DPG to the DSDs you
specify.
The sweep parameters are read from the table containing all the acquisition types defined in
the acquisition type setup (see Acquisition Type (page 256)). They are required in the
DSDs for generating the corresponding vibratory sources. The Set DSD function allows you
368
VE464 Perspective
to have consistent parameters in all the DSDs to be used for a sweep. Those DSDs which
have inconsistent parameters are shown in blue in the fleet's list box.
After selecting blue DSDs in each fleet's list box, clicking the Set DSD button will send the
sweep parameters from the DPG to the DSDs. Then the DSD icons will turn green.
T
AF
R
Figure 6-9 Set DSD
D
Note This command can only be launched in Manual Mode.

Note With a customized basic signal (Custom option in Basic Type setup), errors may
appear at this stage as the Set DSD function checks for consistent parameters
from the custom file.
Function Progress
This panel is useful to survey the progression of VibFleet and set DSD commands.
• DSD Received : indicates the progression of the current action.
• DSD with errors : nb of DSD where there was a problem during the VibFleet or setDSD
action.

VE464 Perspective
Set Servo View > 6
Set Servo View

This function allows you to set the parameters used in each vibrator's servo control loop.
T
AF
Figure 6-10 Set Servo View
R
Note Means that a SetServo is needed on the DSD added into the fleet
D
370
VE464 Perspective
Set Servo View >
T
AF
Figure 6-11 Set Servo View - Set DSD De-activated
Available DSDs
R
This panel, prompts the list of DSDs to which the VibFleet function has been applied.
Use Ctrl or Shift key from the client keyboard to select several DSDs.
To select or deselect all DSDs, click on the label “Available DSDs”.
D
Note This command can only be launched in Manual Mode.

VE464 Perspective
Get DSD View > 6
Get DSD View

This function is used to import and view vibrator parameters (software version, results from
Installation and Identification routines, etc.) from one or more DSDs you specify.
T
AF
R
Figure 6-12 Get DSD View
D
Available DSDs
This panel, prompts the list of DSDs that responded to the Vibrator Fleet function.
Choose by clicking the vibrators you wish to get parameters from.
Units
Use this listbox to choose the type of units you wish to use to display the result : Metric (kg,
daN, etc.) or Imperial (lb, lbf, etc.).
Get DSD button

Running the Get DSD function displays parameters for each selected DSD in the Results
table.
Note This command can be launch only in Manual Mode
372
VE464 Perspective
Get DSD View >
Results
After all the data from the DSDs have been collected they are viewed in a table so that
comparisons between DSDs can be made easily.
Table 6-1 DSD parameters
Parameter Description
Serial# Serial number.
Version Firmware version.
Host Id
Sample rate
Filter Type For archived vibrator motion signals.
Line Filter Used
Reaction Mass 100 to 32767 kg.
T
Baseplate 1 100 to 32767 kg.
Baseplate 2 100 to 32767 kg.
Hold Down Weight 1000 to 327670 daN.
Hydraulic Force
Mass Polarity
AF 1000 to 327670 daN.
Valve Polarity Polarity (depending on the wiring)

Torque Polarity of the Reaction Mass, Servo Valve, Torque Motor.
Mass Back Gain - Gain of the Mass LVDT and
Valve Back Gain - Valve LVDT (Linear Variable Differential Transformer).
R
Mass offset - Reaction mass LVDT offset.
Valve offset - Main Valve LVDT offset.
Torque offset - Torque motor current.
D
Mass Rated Stroke - Active region of LVDT stroke, in percent.

Last Ident
Ident. name
Sweep1 Ident. Results from the two sweeps that were used for the identification
Sweep1 Result process.
Sweep2 Ident.
Sweep2 Result
Servo Gain - Static gain of pilot valve.
Servo Cut Freq. - Pilot valve cut-off frequency.
Servo Damping - Pilot valve damping coefficient.
Oil Compres.
Oil Viscosity
Oil Leakage - Value of leakage between the two chambers of the reaction mass.
Spool Gain - Main valve static gain.

VE464 Perspective
Get DSD View > 6
Table 6-1 DSD parameters (Continued)

Parameter Description
Excitation Ponderation - Gain weighting in the servo control loop.
Min Gv - Minimum Ground Viscosity.
Extended Over Excit. Gain - Distortion on very high frequencies
Smart LF - Distortion for low frequency vibrators
Servo Mode - Servo control type (Filtered or Raw).
Auto Level - Auto Level use.
High Drive - Amplitude level (0 to 100%) for the DSD's DRIVE "H" key.
Low Drive - Amplitude level (0 to 100%) for the DSD's DRIVE "L" key.
Min High Drive - If Auto Level = Yes, Minimum high drive level, in percent.
Min Low Drive - If Auto Level = Yes, Minimum low drive level, in percent.
Pressure Switch - Pressure switch use.
T
Dither - Mass control signal during idle periods of time.
Analog Radio Level - Transmission power if a traditional radio is used.
GPS RS232
GPS Status
Radio Id
AF - TracsTDMA or Raveon identification number.
Radio Serial Nb - TracsTDMA or Raveon serial number.
Power (W) - TracsTDMA or Raveon transmission power.
Radio Frequency #1
Radio Frequency #2
Radio Frequency #3
R
Radio Frequency #4
Radio Frequency #5 Frequency of each TracsTDMA or Raveon channel
Radio Frequency #6
Radio Frequency #7
D
Radio Frequency #8
Radio Frequency #9
Raveon Rssi Level
Mass Sensor
Plate1 Sensor Status of accelerometers after installation
Plate2 Sensor
Function Progress
This panel is useful to survey the progression of GetDSD function.
• DSD Received: indicates the progression of the Get DSD action.
• DSD with errors: number of DSD where there was a problem during the Get DSD
action.
374
VE464 Perspective
Get QC >
Get QC
To be completed.
T
AF
R
D

VE464 Perspective
Get QC Graph > 6
Get QC Graph
To be completed.
T
AF
R
D
376
VE464 Perspective
Get Radio Similarities >
Get Radio Similarities

Radio Similarity tests consist of using the VE464 radio link to return a vibrator motion signal
from a DSD to the seismic recorder so that it can be recorded to a SEGD file together with a
reference (Pilot) signal generated by the DPG.
T
AF
R
Figure 6-13 Get Radio Similarities Window
D
The Radio Similarity function opens a window contains the following elements:
Signal
Allows you to choose the signal type (Reference, Force, Mass or Plate acceleration) to be
radioed from a DSD to the DPG).
Available DSDs
Specify which DSD should return the signal. (Only one DSD can be selected).
Return Pilot
Choose the DPG reference signal (Return Pilot) to record together with the signal returned.

VE464 Perspective
Get Radio Similarities > 6
Get SIM
The "Get SIM" function allows the DPG to retrieve the signal from the DSD and to save this
information in a SEGD file. The Get Similarity function is only available in MANUAL
Mode.
Note When Get Similarity is running, other VE actions are not allowed.
IMPORTANT
Retrieving the signal from the DSD may take some time depending on the type of
radio used, radio settings, etc. For example, for a sweep of 122s@2ms [6000
samples] will take 80s to download from the DSD to DPG.
Similarity tests can be exported to any indicated output device (NAS, FTP, Local, etc...).
T
Sercel recommends storing similarity files in the folder “/508_data/similarity”.
The file number for test results is incremented at each function.
AF
How to setup Get SIM function
1. In the Setups --> Export --> Device, Select or Create the Export device for
similarity files. For example, “sim’
2. In Local Folder define the folder where Similarity files will be stored. For example,
(recommended) “/508_data/similarity”. Click Apply.
R
D
Figure 6-14 Similarity setup
Note Ensure you create the indicated folder (e.g. /508_data/similarity) in your Local
Storage.
378
VE464 Perspective
Get Radio Similarities >
3. In the Input Filters setup, under the Test tab, select the Operation
“SIMILARITY_RECORD”. Click Apply.
Figure 6-15 Input Filters setup
T
4. In the 508XT Production tab, Test Results will be exported to the indicated folder.
AF
R
D
Figure 6-16 Test Results in Production

VE464 Perspective
Update Firmware view > 6
Update Firmware view

This function allows you to load a new software version to the DPG. Prior to using this
function, you must install the new version or patch on the 508XT server with the “patcher.sh”
command (see Server Software in the 508XT Installation Manual). As a result, the files
required for updating the DPG are available from this directory on the server computer: /
com508/1.0/Server/ve464/delivery.
T
AF
R
Update Undo
button button
D
Figure 6-17 Update Firmware View
Browse
Allows you to select the Update.conf file. The file path is displayed on the view.
The Update Firmware button becomes enable.
Force update
This option allows you to reload the same version on the DPG.
380
VE464 Perspective
Update Firmware view >
Update Firmware button

After reading and checking the configuration file, the system asks if you really want to load
the new software release.
Click OK to accept : the new software release to be loaded to the DPG.. Wait until updating
is complete and then select Reconnect (turn the VE464 off then back on).
Undo button
Reverses the last change done to the perspective reverting to the previous state.
Function Progress
Current update status: Indicates for each module the progression of the load.
Total update status: Indicate the global progression
T
AF
R
D

VE464 Perspective
Normal Acquisition views > 6
Normal Acquisition views

When you are ready for a normal acquisition, click the Auto button, in the main window's
control panel. As a result the DPG waits for the Firing Order (FO) from the 508XT.
The 508XT will not generate the FO until it receives a Ready status from the DPG window.
When the Ready signal is received from the vibrator fleet leader, i.e. when all the desired
vibrators are in place with pads down, it may be retained in the DPG window or
automatically relayed to the recording system, depending on whether the fleet’s button in the
status bar is released or depressed.
When it receives the FO, the DPG generates the Time Break to the selected DSDs. The
programmed sweeps are taken and all DSDs in turn transmit their latest status reports,
corresponding to one or more completed sweeps, to the DPG. The Status and QC data
generated by the DPG are relayed to the GUI via the Ethernet link.
T
QC and status results are not only saved but also displayed in the VE464 main window which
makes it easy to measure the quality of a vibrator in real time or through statistical post-
processing. AF
The results can be presented in numeric (normal acq status view) or graphic (graphical
normal acq status view) format.
The colour of the QC data depends on the alert thresholds you set using the “DSD limits”
command in the Setup menu.
The radio link allows the DPG to see if any DSD failed to sweep for any T0. If a failure is
detected, the DPG will report a 98 status (“no T0 received”).
R
Normal Acq status view
A table is displayed, derived from the QC. It shows the status of the DPG (allowing you to
D
see at a glance if the PPS signal from the GPS receiver is continually available).
Also, for each shot, the table shows:
• the DPG status
• the date and time
For each DSD:
• The fleet nb
• The status
• The Average/Peak Ground Force, Distortion and Phase
382
VE464 Perspective
Normal Acquisition views >
T
Figure 6-18 Normal Acquisition View
AF
The Normal Acq Table is automatically updated according the choice of vibrators in the vib
Fleet Panel. The columns are sorted by Fleet number.
Example : Fleet#1 with Vibrator #1 and #6 are shown first in the Normal Acq Table.
Customize Table
R
It is possible to customise the columns in the Normal Acq Status table. Place your cursor in
the header of the table right-click and select Customize.
D
Figure 6-19 Right click to Customize table

VE464 Perspective
T
AF
Figure 6-20 Customize Table
If the option ‘Follow last rows added’ is checked, the table will automatically display the
last shot taken by a fleet. The table will thus scroll automatically.
R
Do not check this option if you would like to navigate the table without displaying the latest
statuses. For example, for troubleshooting or search within the table, etc.
Normal Acq Graph View

D
The VP and Acq fields respectively display the Vibrator Point number and Acquisition
number the results relate to.
Six bar charts are available to show the following QC data available in the status messages
from the DSDs:
• Average Phase,
• Peak Phase,
• Average Distortion,
• Peak Distortion,
• Average Ground Force,
• Peak Ground Force.
384
VE464 Perspective
A red horizontal line in each chart shows the limit specified in the Setup menu (“QC Limit”
command).
For each DSD used, each chart shows:
• A green or orange bar showing the QC value for the latest acquisition completed
(identified in the Acq field):
- Green if the QC value is below the limit,
- Orange if it exceeds the limit or an error is reported:
• OV for an overload,
• W for a warning,
• T for a timing error.
• F for a file error.
T
- If the status code from any DSD is incorrect it is displayed in place of the corresponding
QC value.
• A blue or red bar showing the average QC value over the latest 50 acquisitions:
AF
•
•
Blue if the average QC value is below the limit,
Red if it exceeds the limit.
• If the status code from any DSD is incorrect it is displayed in
place of the corresponding QC value.
R
D

VE464 Perspective
To view a graphic select one of the available icons:
T
AF
Figure 6-21 Graphical Normal Acq status view
Average Phase View

R
D
Figure 6-22 Average Phase view
386
VE464 Perspective
Peak Phase View
T
Figure 6-23 Peak Phase View
Average Distortion View AF

R
D
Figure 6-24 Average Distortion View

VE464 Perspective
Peak Distortion View
T
Figure 6-25 Peak Distortion View
Average Force View

AF
R
D
Figure 6-26 Average Force View
388
VE464 Perspective
Peak Force View
Figure 6-27 Peak Force View
T
AF
R
D

VE464 Perspective
Normal Acquisition views > DSD/DPG Status Code 6
DSD/DPG Status Code
Status generated by DPG
Status code indicative of

Meaning
successful sweep
1 OK
19 OK, Small PPS discrepancy.

Meaning
T
error
20 AF Hiline error.
21 Wrong sweep definition.
22 Custom definition error.
25 Overrun error.
27 PPS discrepancy.
R
Status generated by DSD

D

Meaning
successful sweep
1 OK, Raw mode.
12 OK, Filtered mode.
19 OK, small PPS discrepancy.

Meaning
error
2 Sweep aborted by DSD.
390
VE464 Perspective
Normal Acquisition views > DSD/DPG Status Code

Meaning
error
10 Sweep aborted by user.
11 Ethernet error between DSD and PC.
13 Discrepancy in DSD and DPG acquisition table.
14 Lift error.
20 Hiline error.
21 Wrong sweep definition.
22 Custom definition error.
T
23 AF Sweep start time expired
25 Overrun error.
26 Slave recording unit failed to start (on a slave DSD only)
27 PPS discrepancy.
28 Force level too low.

R
29 DSD didn't have time to save the previous signal to file.
30 GPS Quality (GGA Frame) is not reached.

D
90 Waiting for Status.
98 No T0 data received.
99 No T0 data received or no status report.

VE464 Perspective
Statistics View > Numerical Statistics 6
Statistics View
Numerical Statistics
This view displays a compilation of values returned by each Vibrator VE464 concerning the
state of the vibration completed. This includes the QC, the status and the alarms (warnings/
overloads).
The values are available for all fleets, by fleet or by vibrator. This view compiles the statistics
for all the shots fired.
Three tabs are available.
Overloads / warnings
Displays the number of occurrences of all possible alarms returned after a vibration.
T
AF
R
Figure 6-28 Overload/Warnings
Source emission QC
D
Displays the average QC values (phase / distortion / amplitude) for the totality of shots fired.
This view also displays for each Line, the smallest and largest VP concerned by these values.
Figure 6-29 Source Emission QC
392
VE464 Perspective
Statistics View > Graphical Results
Vibrator status
Displays the number of occurrences of all possible statuses returned after a vibration. These
statuses indicate the state of the vibration completed and indicate eventual errors (e.g. GPS
error)
Additionally, this view also displays the status for the DPG that sends its status independent
of the vibrators.
T
Graphical Results
AF Figure 6-30 Vibrator Status
Whether for statistics on DSDs or on a fleet, the following distinct views are available:
average phase, peak phase, average distortion, peak distortion, average ground force, peak
ground force, Status Codes.
R
The system calculates the statistical data from the last boot of the DPG. The Data is not lost
each time you go to Manual.
D

VE464 Perspective
Statistics View > Graphical Results 6
You can choose to view statistical data for each fleet or for each DSD by selecting one of this
view:
T
AF Figure 6-31 Statistics View
In graphic Statistics views, the vertical bar charts represent the distribution of QC values in
percentage for each vibrator (or for each fleet).
The Force/Phase limit is displayed as a red vertical line. The bar charts after this limit are
displayed in red.
R
The black curve represents the distribution of sweeps as a function of QC values computed
for the concerned DSDs (or Fleets).
The horizontal axis represents the QC values (phase or distortion or force), and the vertical
D
axis represents the number of values.

The following values are also displayed under the graphic:
• number of sweeps (n)
• mean value (mean)”
394
VE464 Perspective
Local Acquisition > Graphical Results
Graphical View Example
T
AF
Figure 6-32 Average Phase Statistic
Local Acquisition
This function allows you to check the vibrator equipment separately, as if it were not
R
connected to the recording unit. For a local acquisition the DPG may operate alone, or the
DPG and DSDs may operate normally but without being controlled by the recording unit. In
that case the Blast command (Firing Order) is replaced by a manual start (Go pushbutton).
D
Figure 6-33 Local Acquisition Status view

VE464 Perspective
Local Acquisition > Graphical Results 6
T
Prerequisites
AF
Figure 6-34 Normal Acquisition Status View
Unless already done, click the Manual button in the control panel to isolate the DPG from
the recording unit. You cannot do a local acquisition until the Set Vib Fleet view
(page 364) function has been used.
R
How to use the local acquisition function
1. Click the Local Acquisition Status function button to see the numerical results.
D
2. Click the Graphical Local Acquisition function button to see the graphical results.
3. In the list box, choose (by clicking) the vibrators you wish to use for the local
acquisition. If you do not select any vibrator, then the DPG will operate alone.
4. In the Basic Type field, enter the type of basic signal you wish to use. (Basic Types
are defined through the
5. Setups menu).
6. Click the option button to choose the execution mode:
396
VE464 Perspective
Local Acquisition > Graphical Results
• Single: 1 shot done. Results reset at each launch of Local Acquisition.

• Continuous: The basic signal repeats endlessly until you click the Stop button (which
appears at the bottom of the dialog box if you choose this option).
7. Click the Local Acq button. The local acquisition executes. In Single mode, the
local acquisition ends automatically, without any user action. In Continuous mode,
you must click the Stop button to interrupt the local acquisition, which will actually
stop after the current acquisition is complete.
T
AF
R
Figure 6-35 Local Acq Status Example
D

VE464 Perspective
Update Custom > Graphical Results 6
Update Custom
The Update customs perspective allows you to display the list of Custom sweeps stored in
the DPG, and to update that list (you can delete some files and/ or add new ones). You can
store a total Custom sweep length of up to 392 seconds (20 files max.) into the DPG.
Note This number is the theoretical allowable length and the actual available size may
be lower as a result of the internal organization of the Flash memory.
To see if the DPG’s memory contains any Custom files, click the Get button (the Update
command is dimmed until you click Get).
T
AF
R
D
Get Load Defragment Erase

Button custom Button Button
Sweep
Figure 6-36 Update Customs
Get button - used to retrieve the results of any custom files in the DPG memory.
Load Custom Sweep button - used to add a custom sweep file in the DPG memory.
Erase button - deletes custom files from the DPG memory.
398
VE464 Perspective
Vibrator Guidance > Graphical Results
Defragment button - Defragmentation reduces data access time and allows storage to be
used more efficiently.
Adding a Custom Sweep file

To load a custom sweep file.
1. Click on the button.

2. Use the Browse button to open the folder containing the file to load. The folder must
be a subdirectory of ‘ /export/home ’.
3. Click on the Open button to add the file in the list. The “identifier” field, the
comments and the Length from those files are displayed in the list.
T
4. Click on the button. to add the custom sweep file in the DPG memory.
Vibrator Guidance AF
The VE464 Guidance tool v1.6 for 508XT (optional) allows each vibrator in a fleet to be
steered to the next location where it is expected to shake, assisting the driver with a graphical
homing display.
A graphic interface (tablet) helps the driver steer the vibrator truck to the next shake location.
Shake locations do not need to be physically marked with stakes in the field.
R
The VE464 Guidance system automatically steers an Autonomous DSD (page 169) to the
nearest source point (for example for independent simultaneous-source shooting). This
requires a source SPS file to be loaded into the Guidance tool.
For complete information see Guidance (page 199) in the setup parameters, and Chapter
D
10 of the VE464 User’s Manual.

Chapter
T
7 Admin Perspective
AF
In this chapter,
R
• Download View (page 401)
D

Admin Perspective
Overview >
Overview
The Admin perspective allows you to force a download of data from CX-508 field units.
T
AF
Figure 7-1 Admin Perspective
Download View
R
Typically, you need to use the Download View after installing a new release of 508XT
software (and patches if any), to update firmware in SCI-508 and in the remote field
electronics deployed (CX-508, FDU-508, DSU1-508 etc.). You must also use this setup
window if you connect any unit that does not have the required software version and or
D
patches.

Admin Perspective
Download View > 7
T
3
1 AF 5
Figure 7-2 CX Download

R
Where,
1-Available CX-508 and SCI-508
2-Status
D
3-Targeted CX-508 and SCI-508 for firmware upgrade

4-Firmware upgrade progress status
5-Upgrade progress
402
Admin Perspective
Download View > Typical Download Procedure
Typical Download Procedure

Typically, the download procedure should be as follows:
1. Be sure the SCI-508 controller is powered up and all remote interfacing units (CX-
508, FDU-508, DSU1-508 etc.) to be upgraded are connected to it.
2. Be sure, the line is “Field On” and all connected units to be upgraded are in Test
State.
Please see State Tools Panel on page 46.
3. From the Available boxes panel, highlight the boxes to be upgraded and select the
Right Facing arrow to display them in the “Download “panel”.
4. Use the “Browse” button to select the appropriate .xml file for the download.
For instance, to upgrade field units to firmware version 1.012, use the following
path: /home/Sercel/com508/1.0/Server/parameters/1.012/
T
AF
R
D
Figure 7-3 Download Path example
3 types of download sequences are possible:

• To upgrade SCI-508 and CX-508 only, select :
downloadConfigVX.XX_CxRevE_ONLY.xml
• To upgrade CX-508 and Nodes (FDU-508, DSU1-508 etc), select :
downloadConfigVX.XX_CxRevE_NODE_STD2.xml

Admin Perspective
Download View > Typical Download Procedure 7
• To upgrade “Nodes” only (FDU-508, DSU1-508, etc.), select :

downloadConfigVX.XX__NODE_STD2_ONLY.xml
Where, VX.XX is the firmware version.
5. Click on the green download arrow to initiate the download process.
Note Choose the “Force” option if you want to update the field units with an older (or
identical) firmware version than the one currently installed.
6. The progress bar at the bottom of the panel indicates the advancement of the
download process.
T
AF Figure 7-4 Progress bar
Note With caution, during the download sequence, it is possible to abort the download
for all, or only specific units by using the cancel command:
Individual download cancel
R
D
Cancel all units

Figure 7-5 Cancel Download
404
Admin Perspective
Firmware updates for LRC-508 > Typical Download Procedure
Firmware updates for LRC-508

The Firmware update download procedure for the LRC-508 is as follows:
1. Ensure the SCI-508 controller is powered up and all remote interfacing units (CX-
508, FDU-508, DSU1-508 etc.) to be upgraded are connected to it.
2. Ensure the line is “Field On” and all connected units to be upgraded are in Test
State. See State Tools Panel on page 46.
3. Go to the Admin --> Download panel on the 508-HCI.
4. From the Available boxes For Download panel, highlight the boxes to be upgraded
and select the Right Facing arrow:
T
to display them in the “Download “panel”.
AF
5. Use the “Browse” button to select the appropriate .xml file for the download.
6. Click on the Download button to start the Download.
Note
R
CX-508s with connected LRC-508 are indicated in the corresponding column.
D
Figure 7-6 CX-508 with LRC-508 connected

Chapter
T
AF
In this Chapter,
R
D

Custom Perspective
Overview >
Overview
The Custom Perspective includes all the possible views. This allows you to configure your
own customized graphic view.
Any of the available perspectives can be moved via Drag & Drop to create a customized
screen.
Note The custom window is typically used to mix views from different perspective.
Nevertheless, the custom view does not feature any layer options such as in the
dashboard perspective view.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 8-1 Custom Perspective list

Custom Perspective
Overview > 8
T
AF
Figure 8-2 Custom Perspective example
R
D
408
Overview >
T
AF
(Page intentionally blank)
R
D
409
D
R
AF
T
Chapter
T
9 QC Analyzer
AF
This chapter includes the following,
R
• QC Analyzer Quick Start (page 413)
• QC Toolbar (page 419)
D
• QC Views (page 421)

QC Analyzer
Overview > 9
Overview
The QC analyzer is a powerful integrated tool for real-time QC of seismic data acquisition
without slowing down production. QC analyzer provides shot and receiver attributes in
graphical format.
The improved 508XT V2.0 interface provides numerous improvements to help you navigate
through the QC analyzer interface.
For information on setting up the QC analyzer see, QC Analyzer (page 219).
T
2
AF
4
R
1
D
Figure 9-1 QC Analyzer Main Interface
1. Info View (page 422)

2. 2D Data (page 426)
3. 1D Data (page 440)
4. Phase (page 444)
412
QC Analyzer
QC Analyzer Quick Start >
In addition to the high-resolution seismic record display with enhanced AGC, filtering and
equalization, QC Analyser includes the following attributes display:
• Ambient noise level
• Seismic signal level
• Seismic signal-to-noise ratio
• Traces exceeding a given threshold on the above attributes
• Sensor test errors
QC Analyzer Quick Start

This section will provide a quick introduction to the QC Analyzer.
1. Parameters for the QC Analyzer must be initially defined in the Export Setup
Parameters, see QC Analyzer (page 219).
T
2. In the Export perspective, select the export device from which to retrieve SEGD
files for Playback. Then right-click and select Playback.
AF
R
D
Figure 9-2 Select Playback from Export device

QC Analyzer
QC Analyzer Quick Start > 9
3. The list of available SEGD files is displayed. Select the file you would like to
display in the QC Analyzer and click Playback.
T
AF
Figure 9-3 List of available SEGD files
R
4. Select the Playback Export Device.
D
5. Launch the QC Analyzer by clicking QC Analyzer in the Production Perspective.
414
QC Analyzer
Production Perspective
T
AF
Figure 9-4 Production Perspective
Note You can choose to setup multiple QC Analyzers by clicking on the + symbol.
R
D

QC Analyzer
6. When you click on QC Analyzer, the following view appears. The QC Analyzer
view contains a QC Multiview and a QC Stream panel in the toolbar
QC Stream
Panel
QC Multiview
T
AF
Figure 9-5 QC View Chooser
R
7. Select a QC stream from the QC Stream Panel.
8. Select the Info perspective in order to display details concerning the selected stream.
Stream information includes, General Info, Errors, Trace subsets and Aux traces.
D
Figure 9-6 Info View
9. Click the + tab and select the type of QC analyzer data to display from the QC
Multiview. See Figure 9-5.
416
QC Analyzer
10. Depending on the QC view selected, QC analyzer results are displayed for this
stream. The views are dockable within the interface.
2D data 1D data Spectrum Freq. Time Map
T
AF
R
D
Figure 9-7 QC Analyzer main screen
The and buttons allow you to suspend or resume a real-time stream.

When a Stream is suspended the button is displayed.
Note When a stream is suspended, all the views that are attached to this stream keep
working on the experience that was used when the user clicked on “Suspend/
Resume stream” button.
Note When a stream is resumed, all the views that are attached to this stream work on
the last experiment that has been provided to this stream.
Details for each parameter are given in QC Analyzer (page 219).

QC Analyzer
Drag and Drop functionality

The improved 508XT V2.0 interface allows you to Drag & Drop certain elements in order to
view QC data.
For example, the rows of the “Trace subsets” tab can be dragged and dropped in a 2D data
sub-view. In this case, the trace selection of the 2D data view is changed in order to match
the selected trace subset.
Additionally, the rows of the “Aux traces” tab can be dragged and dropped in a 1D data, a
Spectrum or a FT-Map sub-view. In this case, the trace selection of the view is changed in
order to match the selected trace.
QC Data Actions from Geo / Topo Sensor View

The improved 508XT V2.0 interface allows you to display QC analyzer data directly from
the Sensor view.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 9-8 1D data view from Sensor view
Figure 9-9 2D data view from Sensor view
418
QC Analyzer
QC Toolbar >
QC Toolbar
Selecting a stream enables all of the elements of the toolbar.
Selected Pause / Show Show Show Stream
Stream Playback Cross Hairs Errors Horizons Type
Print Zoom Zoom RMS

Back Tool Tool
T
Figure 9-10 Toolbar
•
AF
Selected Streams is made up of the following elements:
Stream Name is the name of the QC Analyzer created in the Setup (ex : “QC Pro-
cessed”).
Stream Type is the type of QC Analyzer created in the setup (values can be Correl,
Raw, Test, Playback).
R
• Pause / Playback: Allows you to suspend/resume a live stream.
• Print: Displays a print preview with all pages which will be printed
D
• Zoom Back: Zoom to last zoom selected by clicking on the seismic or attribute view
• Zoom Reset: Zoom out and fit the view to the screen
• Show Errors: When checked, displays vertical red lines on traces in error on seismic
view.
• Show Horizons: When checked, displays the horizons (defined in the setup) on the
seismic view
• Show Cross Hair: When checked, displays a magenta cross hair over the Seismic view
and attributes.
The following toggle buttons group presents the current mouse action available on the
Seismic View. Only one tool is active at the same time.
• Zoom Tool: zoom (by drawing a rectangle zone with left click on the seismic view).
• RMS Tool: tool RMS measurement (by drawing a rectangle zone with left click on the
seismic view). The result is displayed as follows:

QC Analyzer
QC Toolbar > 9
T
Figure 9-11 RMS tool Example
The rectangle can be resized by dragging the different resize markers.

AF
The rectangle can be moved by dragging one of its sides.
The result is the computation of the samples contained in the rectangle.
• Velocity - Velocity Tool measurement (by selecting a ruler with left click on the seismic
view)
R
D
The ruler can be resized by dragging the different resize markers.

Velocities are not computed if:
• The positions are not present in current file
• The selected points are not on the same line.
In this case, the value will be “NaN”
420
QC Analyzer
QC Views >
QC Views
The improved interface in 508XTV2 provides a centralized method for analysing QC results.
The QC Views perspective is made up of several different views:
• Info View (page 422)
• 2D Data (page 426)
• 1D Data (page 440)
• Spectrum (page 443)
• Phase (page 444)
• Distortion (page 445)
• Harmonic Distortion (page 447)
• Frequency Time Map (page 448)
T
AF
R
D
Figure 9-12 QC Views

QC Analyzer
QC Views > Info View 9
Info View
The Info View tab is the central point of entry providing all information relative to the Trace
that has been selected. Other views described in this section represent different graphic
representations of the trace selected in the Info perspective.
General Info
T
AF Figure 9-13 General Info
• Experiment index: increments after each experience

• Experiment type: normal/test record
• Extended record mode: true/false (to be able to support different types of advanced
R
recording systems requiring very long record times)
• File number: SEGD file number
• Time zero: acquisition time zero (GPS time), to let the user know if the seismic data has
D
been refreshed recently

• SEGD revision: SEGD file format
• Total seismic traces: total number of seismic traces in the stream (whose Channel type is
“Seismic”)
• Total aux traces: total number of auxiliary traces (whose Channel type is different from
“Seismic”)1
422
QC Analyzer
QC Views > Info View
Errors
T
AF Figure 9-14 Error Info
One column is available per SEGD code present in the spread.

For example, above we have one auxiliary (Not Defined-Other), and 600 Accelerometers
Vertical (Accelerometer, Vertical-Seis).
The first paragraph is a summary of all errors detected in the spread.
R
The following list of errors is always available:
• Dead
• Mute
D
• Outstanding
• Overscaled
Depending on the built-in-test performed, the following types of error may be available:
• Digital Sensor Tilt
• Analog Sensor Tilt
• Analog Sensor Resistance
• Analog Sensor Leakage

QC Analyzer
QC Views > Info View 9
Trace Subsets
Figure 9-15 Trace Subsets
• Subset#: table line number (1, 2, 3…)

• Channel Type: Other/Seis
• Nb Samples: nb samples for each trace described in this line (here: 8000 samples for each
trace)
• Sampl. Intvl (µs): time interval between two samples (here: 1ms)
T
• Nb traces: nb traces concerned
• Physical unit: measurement unit for the traces (here, the auxiliary gives volt information,
AF
while Accelerometers vertical give m/s information
• Sensor Code: SEGD sensor code of the traces described in this line
Trace Info
When a trace is selected the following panel is displayed.
R
D
Figure 9-16 Trace Info Panel
424
QC Analyzer
QC Views > Info View
Clicking on displays the previous trace info and also displays it on the seismic panel.
Clicking on displays the next trace info and also displays it on the seismic panel.
Note If a Value on the line is displayed in Red font it indicates that it has been edited.
Dragging and dropping the symbol allows you to add a trace or display a trace.
Traces can be displayed in 1D Data view, Spectrum view, or Freq. Time map view.
When No trace is selected, the following tabbed pane is displayed.
T
Figure 9-17 No trace selected
Clicking on , opens the following menu;

AF
R
Figure 9-18 Open graphic view
This allows you to visualize the selected trace in a:

D
• New 1D data view

• New Spectrum view
• New Freq. Time Map view
Clicking on displays the current trace in the opened GIS Views, if the point exists in each
view. This is available on Topo view and Geo view.
Figure 9-19 Locate in other views

QC Analyzer
QC Views > 2D Data 9
2D Data
The 2D data view displays seismic data of the traces that have been selected. Each trace is
displayed vertically as a function of time. Traces are ordered in the same way as in the spread.
The 2D data view can also display a QC attribute for each trace as a bargraph. These
attributes are the signal, the noise and the SNR defined in the QC analyzer setup for the
current stream.Trace info view is available in the contextual info area.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 9-20 2D Data view
426
QC Analyzer
QC Views > 2D Data
Graphical Properties
The Graphical Properties allow you to define how QC results will be displayed in the Seismic
view.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 9-21 Graphical Properties

QC Analyzer
General Properties
The “General” properties allows you to customize your display panels. These properties will
be applied to all windows displayed in the Seismic view.
Figure 9-22 General Properties
Horizontal Fit to View

Select this field in order to fit the horizontal view to your screen.
T
Traces / inch
Type Value Units
Parameters
AF
Integer [0.1...99999999] None
Used to set horizontal display scale for both the trace wavelets and the attributes graph in the
Seismic view, by specifying the number of seismic traces to plot per inch.
Graphical Views
R
D
Figure 9-23 Graphical Views
428
QC Analyzer
QC Views > 2D Data
Plot Height
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [50...99999999] pixel
Determines the height (in pixels) of the attribute views in seismic view.
Signal
When the Signal check box is selected, the corresponding panel is displayed.
T
Figure 9-24 Signal Properties
AF
Also after apply, the following attribute is displayed in the Graphic Properties
(page 449).
R
Figure 9-25 Signal view
Max / Min
D
Type Value Units

Parameters
Integer [0.1...99999999] None
Used to specify the lower and upper ends of the vertical scale for the Signal level attribute in
the Seismic view. The unit depends on the selected sensor (mV if Geophone or mm/s² if
Accelerometer or μbar if Hydrophone).
Scale Type
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [Linear...Log] None
These buttons allow you to choose either a Linear or a Log vertical scale for displaying the
shot’s Signal level attribute.

QC Analyzer
Noise
When the Noise check box is selected, the corresponding panel is displayed.
Figure 9-26 Noise Properties
Also after Apply, the following attribute is displayed in the Graphic Properties
(page 449).
T
AF Figure 9-27 Noise View
Max / Min
Type Value Units
Parameters
R
Integer [0.1...99999999] (dB)
Used to specify the lower and upper ends of the vertical scale for the Ambient Noise level
attribute in the Seismic view. The unit depends on the selected sensor (mV if Geophone or
mm/s² if Accelerometer or μbar if Hydrophone).
D
Scale Type
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [Linear...Log] None
These buttons allow you to choose either a Linear or a Log vertical scale for plotting the
shot’s Ambient Noise Level attribute.
430
QC Analyzer
QC Views > 2D Data
Signal / Noise Ratio

When the Signal/Noise check box is selected, the corresponding panel is displayed.
Figure 9-28 Signal/Noise Properties
Also after Apply, the following attribute is displayed in the Graphic Properties
(page 449).
T
AF
Figure 9-29 Signal/Noise Ratio View
Max / Min
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [0.1...99999999] (dB)
R
Used to specify the lower and upper ends of the vertical scale for the Signal-to-Noise or
Noise-to-Signal ratio attribute in the Seismic view.
D
Seismic View
Figure 9-30 QC Analyzer - Seismic View

QC Analyzer
Time Limits
Type Value Units
Parameters
Integer [Starting Time; Ending Time] s
The Time Limits options allow you to display only a portion of each seismic trace, that is
from the time you specify in the “Starting time” field to that in the “Ending time” field.
Time Scale
Vertical Fit to View

Type Value Units
Parameters
Radio button [True / False]
T
Select this field in order to fit the vertical view to your screen.
Seconds per inch
Parameters
AF Type Value Units
Integer [0.1...99999999]
Used to set the vertical display scale for the wavelets in the Seismic view. This determines
the number of samples to plot per inch.
R
Scaling
Type Value Units
Parameters
D
Integer [0.1...99999999] dB
This button is used to specify an amplitude gain (dB), to magnify or shrink the traces in the
Seismic view. With manual scaling the scale remains the same from one record to the next.
This allows you to compare successive records more easily.
Unless you activate the button, scaling will be automatic, that is the scaling factor will be
dependent on the maximum range of the converter and on the maximum sample amplitude,
which is determined for each record.
432
QC Analyzer
QC Views > 2D Data
Traces Selection
Unless you wish to view all traces in the Line or Lines selected, use either of these options
to select a set of traces to view:
T
AF
R
Figure 9-31 Trace Selection
Selection is done sequentially in the following order: first the system finds the traces
matching your SEGD Sensor Code selection, then finds the Lines matching your Receiver
D
Line Number or Line span selection, and finally finds the channels matching your Trace
Sequential Number selection in these streamers.
Channel Type
Type Value Units
Parameters
Drop-down [Seismic; Other]
Select ‘Seismic’ for seismic channel type, and ‘Others’ for Auxiliary channel type.

QC Analyzer
SEGD Code
Type Value Units
Not Defined;
Hydrophone;
Geophone vertical;
Parameters Geophone horizontal inline; Geophone
Combo-box None
horizontal crossline; Geophone horizontal
other; Accelerometer vertical; Accelerometer
horizontal inline; Accelerometer horizontal
crossline; Accelerometer horizontal other
Makes it possible to create a Seismic view for each type of sensor. The drop-down list button
prompts the type of sensor in plain, equivalent to the Sensor Code in the SEGD file (byte 21
T
in Trace Header Extension Block # 1). The traces to display are selected from those matching
the other options activated, if any.
Filter by Line
AF Type Value Units
Parameters [All Lines; By Line Number; by
Check-box
Line Span]
These fields allow you to display a line, or a set of lines (from the ordinal number or line
R
number specified in the “First” field to the one in the “Last” field). The traces to display are
selected from those matching the other options activated, if any.
If “All Lines” is selected, “by Line Number” and “by line span” panels are disabled.
D
If “by Line Number” is selected, the corresponding panel is enabled.

If “by line span” is selected, the corresponding panel is enabled.
Scroll
Type Value Units
Parameters
Check-box [checked: un-checked]
Indicates the number of steps in the SEG-D file.
434
QC Analyzer
QC Views > Look and Feel
Filter by Channel Sequential Number

Type Value Units
Parameters
Check-box [0....99999999]
These fields allow you to display only the specified set of the matching traces, in each
matching Line. The traces to display are selected from those matching the other options
activated, if any. You can choose to select only 1 out of N matching traces, from the matching
trace sequential number (not the receiver position) you specify in the “First” field to the one
in the “Last” field.
Look and Feel

This section allows you to define the overall aspect of your QC results.
Show Colour Show Legend
T
Scale
AF
R
Clipping
D
Preview
Figure 9-32 Look and Feel
Show Legend
When selected, enables the west annotation preview under the check-box.

QC Analyzer
QC Views > Look and Feel 9
Show Color Scale

When selected, enables the colour scale preview under the check-box.
Display Grid
When selected, displays the grid on the seismic preview.
Clipping
Indicates the number of traces that can overlap in Wiggle Mode (Plot Type). Any trace
exceeding the specified overlapping limit is clipped to that limit.
For example, with a clipping of 5, one trace can be drawn (if it has great amplitude) up to the
5 under and the 5 over traces. See the examples below,
With Clipping = 5 With Clipping = 1
T
AF
R
D
Figure 9-33 Clipping Examples
436
QC Analyzer
QC Views > Data Processing
Possible Plot Types are:

• Wiggle: enables clipping and disables colour scale
• Colour: disables clipping and enables colour scale
The seismic preview is updated under the component.
Data Processing
This section allows you to apply filters to trace results.
T
AF
Figure 9-34 Data Processing
Filtering
R
These three buttons allow you to specify a Low Cut frequency, a High Cut frequency and a
Notch filter frequency for the signals to analyse.
Note The Low Cut and High Cut buttons allow you to set up different types of filters:
D
Band pass
F F F
High cut Low cut Low cut High cut
Figure 9-35
The following processing is performed:

1. To reduce the border effect:
- the trace length is extended by 10% on either side. Additional samples are
deduced using an even symmetry.

QC Analyzer
QC Views > Data Processing 9
- a Hanning taper is applied on either side, with a taper length equal to 5%

of the new trace length.
2. Fast Fourier Transform is performed.
3. The filter is determined and applied in the frequency domain.
- If a low-cut frequency is selected:
• from 0 to the low-cut frequency minus 3 Hz, the filter is equal to 0;
• from the low-cut frequency minus 3 Hz to the low-cut frequency, the
filter is equal to the Hanning function (from 0 to 1);
• from the low-cut frequency to the Shannon frequency, the filter is equal
to 1.
• Note: if the low-cut frequency is less than 3 Hz, then it is changed to
3 Hz.
T
- If a high-cut frequency is selected:
• from 0 to the high-cut frequency, the filter is equal to 1;
•
AF
from the high-cut frequency to the high-cut frequency plus 3 Hz, the
filter is equal to the Hanning function (from 1 to 0);
• from the high-cut frequency plus 3 Hz to the Shannon frequency, the
filter is equal to 0.
• Note: if the high-cut frequency is higher than the Shannon frequency
R
minus 3 Hz, then it is changed to Shannon frequency minus 3 Hz.
- If a notch frequency is selected:
• from 0 to the notch frequency minus 2 Hz, the filter is equal to 1;
D
• from the notch frequency minus 2 Hz to the notch frequency, the filter
is equal to the squared Hanning function (from 1 to 0);
• from the notch frequency to the notch frequency plus
2 Hz, the filter is equal to the squared Hanning function (from 0 to 1);
• from the notch frequency plus 3 Hz to the Shannon frequency, the filter
is equal to 1.
4. Reverse Fast Fourier Transform is performed and the result is shrunk to the original
trace length.
438
QC Analyzer
QC Views > Data Processing
Amplitude
Figure 9-36 Amplitude
Possible Amplitude values are:
None
If you choose this option, no processing is used to compensate for the differences in
amplitude in the seismic traces to display: the amplitude display gain is the same on all traces
T
and over the whole length of each trace.
Max Normalization
AF
If you choose this option, the system looks for the maximum value of samples on each trace
to display and determines the appropriate gain to apply to the whole trace.
RMS Normalization
If you choose this option, the system looks for the RMS value of samples on each trace to
display and determines the appropriate gain to apply to the whole trace.
R
AGC
If you choose this option, the system computes the average sample value over a time window
D
you have to specify in the associated “Width” field.

The average value is used to determine a gain that is applied to the sample at the centre of
the window. The system repeatedly updates the average value as the time window shifts from
the Start On time to the end of each trace. Note that the AGC option will eat more CPU time.
From the Zero Time to the Start On time, a constant gain deduced from the Start On Time
is applied. (The following options are available for the Start On Time: Zero, Extracted First
Break, Theoretical First Break).
Timen
• If you choose this option, the same gain is applied to all traces to display. The gain
increases as an exponential function of time over the whole trace.

QC Analyzer
1D Data
The 1D data sub-view displays seismic data of the traces that have been selected. Each trace
is displayed horizontally as a function of time.
T
AF
Figure 9-37 1D Data view
View Parameters - Signal Selection

R
The user can select one or many signals (trace or correlation) by checking its item. All the
signals (traces or correlations) that have been defined in the “Available signals management”
dialog box are available in the list.
D
Filter traces
Available signals
Figure 9-38 Signal selection
Traces that are listed in this dialog box can be filtered in order to find a trace more quickly.
440
QC Analyzer
QC Views > 1D Data
Manage available signals

The “Manage available signals” hyperlink opens the “Available signals management” dialog
box, described below.
T
AF
Figure 9-39 Signals management
A trace is defined by:

R
• a label
• a channel type: “Other” or “Seismic”;
• a position;
D
• a SEGD sensor code
The position can be a topo position: line number (name), and point number.
The position can also be an index position: the line index is the rank of the line that matches
the channel type and the sensor code, and the point index is the rank of the trace in this line.
Possible Segd Codes are:
• 0: Not Defined
• 1: Hydrophone
• 2: Geophone vertical
• 3: Geophone horizontal inline
• 4: Geophone horizontal crossline
• 5: Geophone horizontal other
• 6: Accelerometer vertical

QC Analyzer
• 7: Accelerometer horizontal inline

• 8: Accelerometer horizontal crossline
• 9: Accelerometer horizontal other
View Parameters - Graphical Properties

The graphical properties determine how signals are displayed. Several scenario are possible.
T
AF
R
Figure 9-40 Graphical Properties
D
• Scenario 1: DC offset (signal mean) has been removed from the samples by the
acquisition software (Crew setup, Low Cut Filter set to “Offset removed by server”).
When “Remove DC offset” is checked, the samples are not modified.
When “Remove DC offset” is not checked, the DC offset computed by the acquisition
software is added to all the samples.
• Scenario 2: DC offset (signal mean) has been removed from the samples by a Low Cut
Filter on instruments (Crew setup, Low Cut Filter set to a frequency).
Whether “Remove DC offset” is checked or not, the samples are not modified.
• Scenario 3: DC offset (signal mean) has not been removed from the samples by the
acquisition software (Crew setup, Low Cut Filter different from “Offset removed by
server”).
When “Remove DC offset” is checked, the mean of the samples is subtracted from all
samples.
When “Remove DC offset” is not checked, the samples are not modified
442
QC Analyzer
QC Views > Spectrum
Spectrum
The Spectrum sub-view displays the spectrum of the traces that have been selected. Each
trace is displayed horizontally as a function of time.
For details on the graphical parameters of this view see, Manage available signals
(page 441) and View Parameters - Graphical Properties (page 442).
T
AF
Figure 9-41 Spectrum view
Note In the view parameters, the user can select one or various signals, however
R
correlation is not possible.
D

QC Analyzer
QC Views > Phase 9
Phase
The Phase sub-view displays the difference of phases between the traces that have been
selected and the reference trace that has been selected. Each difference of phase is displayed
horizontally as a function of time.
T
AF Figure 9-42 Phase sub-view

R
box, described in Manage available signals (page 441).
You can select one or many traces (but no correlation) by checking the Available Signals
boxes. All the traces that have been defined in the “Available signals management” dialog
box are available in the “Displayed signal” list.
D
You can select the Reference Signal among all the traces that have been defined (no
correlations).
Available signals
Reference signals
444
QC Analyzer
QC Views > Distortion
Distortion
The distortion sub-view displays the distortion of the traces that have been selected in
relation to the reference trace that has been selected. Each distortion is displayed horizontally
as a function of time. .
T
AF Figure 9-44 Distortion view

You can select one or many traces (but no correlation) by checking the Available Signals
boxes. All the traces that have been defined in the “Available signals management” dialog
box are available in the “Displayed signal” list.
R
You can select the Reference Signal among all the traces that have been defined (no
correlations).
D
Available signals
Reference signals

QC Analyzer
QC Views > Distortion 9

This panel allows you to select the graphical properties for the Distortion sub-view.
T
AFFigure 9-46 Graphical Properties
When “Horizontal” grid lines is checked, an horizontal grid is displayed under the signal
display.
R
When “Vertical” grid lines is checked, a vertical grid is displayed under the signal display.
D
446
QC Analyzer
QC Views > Harmonic Distortion
Harmonic Distortion
The harmonic distortion sub-view displays the harmonic distortion of one trace in relation to
the reference trace that has been selected. The harmonic distortion is displayed horizontally
as a function of time.
For details on the graphical properties of this parameter see, View Parameters - Signal
Selection (page 445) and View Parameters - Graphical Properties
(page 446).
T
AF
R
Figure 9-47 Harmonic Distortion
D

QC Analyzer
QC Views > Frequency Time Map 9
Frequency Time Map

The Frequency Time Map distortion sub-view displays the harmonic distortion of one trace
in relation to the reference trace that has been selected. The harmonic distortion is displayed
horizontally as a function of time.
T
AF
R
Figure 9-48 Frequency Time Map
D
box, described in Manage available signals (page 441).
You can select the displayed signal among all the traces that have been defined (no
correlations).
448
QC Analyzer
QC Views > Frequency Time Map

This panel allows you to modify or customise the color scale for the frequency time map.
T
AF Figure 9-49 Graphic Properties
R
D

9 QC Analyzer
QC Views > Frequency Time Map
T
AF (Page intentionally blank)
R
D
450
Chapter
T
10 Test Functions
AF
This chapter describes the principles of Instrument and Sensor tests,
R
• DSU1-508 Test Functions (page 452)
• FDU-508 Test Functions (page 465)
D

Test Functions
DSU1-508 Test Functions > DSU1-508 Test Overview 10
DSU1-508 Test Functions
This section describes the principles of Instrument and Field tests in

a Digital Synthesizer Unit. In this section,
• DSU1-508 Test Overview (page 452)

• DSU1-508 Available Tests (page 453)
• DSU1-508 Instrument Tests (page 453)
• DSU1-508 Sensor Test (page 459)
DSU1-508 Test Overview
T
Below is a simplified block diagram of the circuitry involved in each DSU addressed when
you launch Instrument or Sensor tests on the 508XT GUI or on a FT-508.
QuietSeis new high-performance digital sensor is based on next-generation MEMS.
AF
Instrument tests are done on a “MEMS emulator” which is fully electronic, whereas Sensor
tests are performed on MEMS separate device.
R
D
Figure 10-1 Block Circuit Diagram
Test frequency is done at 31.25 Hz.

The output signal from the acquisition channel is corrected for the error amounts recorded
during the Calibration procedure (gain, tilt error).
452
Test Functions
DSU1-508 Test Functions > DSU1-508 Available Tests
No offset removal is performed in the DSU for the tests (applied only in acquisition if any
low cut filter is selected).
DSU1-508 Available Tests
Instrument Tests
Nb
Test 508XT GUI FT-508 DSU Autotest
Samples
Distortion √ √ √ 2048
Gain √ √ 2048
Phase √ √ 2048
T
Sensor Tests
Nb
Test 508XT GUI FT-508
Noise
AF √ √
Samples
2048
Tilt √ √ 2048
Distortion √ √ 2048
R
Test Records
All of the tests performed by the 508XT can be recorded to tape as test SEGD files.
The formulas provided in this chapter allow you to recompute the test results displayed on
D
the HCI workstation with the data from test SEGD records.
Tests are performed with 2048 samples whatever the sample rate is.
The first sample used for the computation starts at time 0 (the transient resulting from the
stimulus signal is not recorded).
No low cut is applied on tests.
Instruments tests limits are factory-settings.
Sensor tests limits are user-selected in the 508XT GUI Setup.
DSU1-508 Instrument Tests
DSU1-508 Instrument Distortion

This test is used to check the DSU for linear response.
A sine wave with known amplitude and frequency is applied on the MEMS emulator.

Test Functions
DSU1-508 Test Functions > DSU1-508 Instrument Tests 10
The test returns the ratio of the spectral power of all harmonics within the bandwidth
determined by the selected filter to the spectral power of the output signal.
T
AFFigure 10-2 Block Circuit Diagram
Configuration
• MEMS Emulator : ON
• TestGenerator: ON, connected to the MEMS emulator.
• Filter type: 0.8LIN or MIN selected for the test
R
• Sample Rate: 0.5, 1, 2 or 4 ms selected for the test
Test principle
D
The TestGenerator is connected to the MEMS emulator and supplies a 31.25 Hz sine wave
with an amplitude of 1.02279 m/s2.
RMS Test Signal Peak Test Signal
1.02279 m/s2 1.4464 m/s2
The DFT is computed (for the input signal frequency).
The corresponding fundamental spectral power is computed (TestFreqPower).
The harmonic spectral power of the same signal is computed too (HarmonicPower) and
divided by the fundamental spectral power (the harmonic lines are within the passband
delimited by the cut-off frequency of the filter selected, with a limitation of 9 harmonic
lines).
The test result is expressed in dB.
454
Test Functions
DSU1-508 Test Functions > DSU1-508 Instrument Tests
Fundamental spectral power computation:
TestFreqPower =
Where
= DFT of the fundamental harmonic line (31.25Hz)
Harmonics spectral power computation:

N<9
InstDistortion dB 10 x
T
AF
R
D

Test Functions
DSU1-508 Instrument Gain

This test is used to check for any drift of the gain of the digital channel.
The test returns the relative error (%) compared to the expected RMS value (Gain error).
T
AF
Configuration
R
• MEMS Emulator: ON
D

456
Test Functions
DSU1-508 Test Functions > DSU1-508 Instrument Tests
Test principle
with an amplitude of 1.02279 m/s2 (TheoretRms).
RMS Test Signal (TheoretRms) Peak Test Signal
1.02279 m/s2 1.4464 m/s2
The gain test result is a gain error value, expressed in %, which corresponds to the amplitude
ratio of the signal and a theoretical response.
RMS value of the measured signal:

Vrms = RMS value of the measured signal
Gain relative error:
T
GainDeviation % AF
DSU1-508 Instrument Phase
This test is used to check for any drift of the phase of the digital channel.
The test returns the phase difference between the response and a template.
R
D

Test Functions
Configuration
• MEMS Emulator : ON
Test principle
with an amplitude of 1.02279 m/s2 .

1.02279 m/s2 1.4464 m/s2
T
The phase test result is a phase error value, expressed in µs, which corresponds to the phase
difference between the signal and a theoretical response.
AF
The theoretical response depends on the sample rate, and the selected filter.
DFT computation
Phase value of the measured signal:

R
Arg = Argument (Dft), is the Phase of frequency line at TestFreq frequency
TheoretArg = Argument (TheoretDft)
TheoretArg is depending on SR, filter (LIN or MIN) and is given by following table:
D
Sample rate LIN filter MIN filter

0.5ms -2.67948079F 0.029530527F
1 ms 1.14933514F 0.283593535F
2 ms 2.52378177F 0.786873757F
4 ms -1.01050984F 1.74532282F
TestFreq is 31.25Hz.
Phase error:
PhaseDeviation μs
458
Test Functions
DSU1-508 Test Functions > DSU1-508 Sensor Test
DSU1-508 Sensor Test
DSU1-508 Sensor Noise

This test is used to evaluate the field noise measured by the digital channel.
The MEMS emulator is OFF.
The TestGenerator is OFF.
A DFT is performed and the noise spectral power below 3 Hz is computed. As the total
energy of the output signal is known, the total noise within the bandwidth can be deduced.
T
AF
R

D
Configuration
• MEMS Emulator : OFF
• TestGenerator: OFF
Calculation
Total power of the 2048 samples:

Test Functions
DSU1-508 Test Functions > DSU1-508 Sensor Test 10
Where
N = 2048
X = scaled sample amplitude, 24 bit coded
Power below 3 Hz:

M 2
PowerLT3Hz =  Xˆ j
0
where M Number of harmonic lines below 3 Hz,
(depends on Δf = 1/N.SR).
^
Xj DFT of the DSP’s output signal X(t).
T
Instrument noise RMS value:
AF
InstNoise = TotalPower – PowerLT3Hz
R
D
460
Test Functions
DSU1-508 Sensor Tilt

The tilt test consists of measuring the DC offset, caused by the gravitational force. (The DSU
has no low-cut frequency).
No test signal is used.
The test returns the tilt angle, expressed in degrees, of the sensor with respect to the vertical
direction axis.
T
AF
R
Configuration
• MEMS Emulator : OFF
• TestGenerator: OFF
D


Test Functions
Test principle
Test is performed in one sequence of 2048 samples where offset compensation measurement
determine the tilt of the sensor.
• Mean value of the measured signal is computed:
Where
N = 2048
G is the gravity (9.81m/s2)
T
TiltV ° 180/ PI * AF
TiltV is a positive value between 0° and 180°.
Note that in case of DSU1, since only the vertical axis is available, the tilt measurement is
not very accurate if the sensor is vertical (AccV ~ G).
Typical tilt accuracy is 1° for a tilt of 5° at 25°C, or 3° for the overall temperature.
13.9/5 factor comes from offset compensation measurement, which is done with dedicated
electrodes of the MEMs with a sensitivity different from the electrodes used for data
R
acquisition.
Currently, this factor is a bit different on each DSU, so this calculation is an approximation.
Real value is only known by the DSU.
D
462
Test Functions
DSU1-508 Sensor Distortion

This test is used to check the DSU for linear response.
A sine wave with known amplitude and frequency is applied on the MEMS.
T
AF
R
Configuration
• MEMS Emulator: OFF
D
• TestGenerator: ON, connected to the MEMS.


Test Functions
Test principle
• The TestGenerator is connected to the MEMS and supplies a 31.25 Hz sine wave with an
amplitude of 1.02279 m/s2.
1.02279 m/s2 1.4464 m/s2
lines).
T
AF
TestFreqPower =
Where
= DFT of the fundamental harmonic line
R
D
Where
N≤9
SensorDistortion dB 10 x
Note Note that sensor Distortion is noise-dependent.
464
Test Functions
FDU-508 Test Functions > FDU-508 Test Overview
FDU-508 Test Functions
This section describes the principles of Instrument and Field tests in

a Field Digitizer Unit. In this section,
• FDU-508 Test Overview (page 465)

• FDU-508 Available Tests (page 466)
• FDU-508 Instrument Tests (page 467)
• FDU-508 Sensor Tests (page 478)
FDU-508 Test Overview
T
Below is a simplified block diagram of the circuitry involved in each FDU addressed when
you launch Instrument or Sensor tests on the 508XT GUI or on a FT-508.
AF
R
D
Figure 10-8 Block diagram circuitry
The test circuitry in each FDU mainly consists of a current generator (Digital-to-Analog
Converter), and a test network.
The input to the acquisition channel is selected depending on the test function to carry out:
• signal from the sensor (e. g. Noise test),
• signal from both the sensor and the DAC (e. g. Tilt test),
• signal from both the DAC and the test network (e. g. Gain test).
The necessary test signals (DC voltage, sine wave or pulse) are generated by the FDU’s DAC
from basic digital signals stored FDU memory.

Test Functions
FDU-508 Test Functions > FDU-508 Available Tests 10
Its maximum output voltage is 2828 mV for the 0dB gain and 707 mV for the 12dB gain
(maximum DAC current × RNetwork; RNetwork = 4 kΩ or 1 kΩ respectively).
Test frequency is done at 31.25 Hz.
The input signal to the Analog-to-Digital Converter is scaled by the appropriate factor,
depending on the selected pre-amplifier gain: 1.6√2 for 0 dB gain, 0.4√2 for 12 dB gain.
The output signal from the acquisition channel is corrected for the error amounts recorded
during the Calibration procedure (gain, current gain for the DAC, input network resistance
calibration).
No offset removal is performed in the FDU for the tests (applied only in acquisition if any
low cut filter is selected).
FDU-508 Available Tests
T
Instrument Tests
Nb
Test 508XT GUI FT-508 FDU Autotest
Internal Reference
AF √
Samples
x
Noise √ √ 2048
Distortion √ √ 2048
Gain √ √ 2048
R
Phase √ √ 2048
CMRR √ √ 2048
Pulse √ √ 2048
D
Sensor Tests
Nb
Test 508XT GUI FT-508
Samples
Resistance √ √ 4096
Noise √ √ 2048
Tilt √ √ 2048
Leakage √ √ 4096
Pulse √ √ 2048
Note Instruments tests limits are factory-settings.
466
Test Functions
FDU-508 Test Functions > FDU-508 Instrument Tests
All of the tests performed by the 508XT (except Internal Reference which is an autotest only)
can be recorded to tape as test SEGD files.
The formulas provided in this chapter allow you to recompute the test results displayed on
the HCI workstation with the data from test SEGD records.
Tests are performed with 2048 or 4096 samples whatever the sample rate is.
The first sample used for the computation starts at time 0 (the transient resulting from the
stimulus signal is not recorded).
No low cut is applied on tests.
Instruments tests limits are factory-settings.
FDU-508 Instrument Tests
T
FDU-508 Instrument Internal Reference Check
This test is an autotest performed by the FDU during power up.
AF
This test is used to check for any drift of the FDU’s built-in reference voltage for the ADC
converter. It cannot be launched with the Test menu on the 508XT GUI, but it is automatically
performed every time the Line is powered up.
Configuration
• Pre-amplifier gain: 0dB.
R
• DAC: OFF.
• Filter type: 0.8LIN; Sample Rate: 1 ms.
Test Principle
D
Test is performed in two sequences of 2048 samples each.

During the first sequence, the built-in reference voltage is fed to the ADC converter. The
mean value (Mean1) of the resulting output signal is computed, relative to the input of the
ADC.
During the second sequence, the input of the ADC is terminated on the internal test network.
The mean value (Mean2) of the resulting output signal is computed, relative to the input of
the ADC. This amounts to measuring the offset.
From the two measurements, the actual value of the reference voltage is computed using the
following expression:
VrefMes = Mean2 – Mean1
VrefMes is then compared to TheoretVref which is the calibrated value stored in the FDU’s
non volatile memory during calibration.

Test Functions
FDU-508 Test Functions > FDU-508 Instrument Tests 10
The relative error between the value actually measured and the theoretical value of the
reference voltage is computed using the following expression,
RefVoltageError = 100 ×  -------------------------------- – 1

VrefMes
TheoretVref
FDU-508 Instrument Noise
This test is used to measure the noise of the ADC converter in the FDU.
The noise is the energy of the signal above 3 Hz up to the Nyquist Frequency.
The converter’s input is connected to the internal test network.
A DFT is performed and the noise spectral power below 3 Hz is computed.
The total noise within the bandwidth is then calculated.
T
AF
R
Figure 10-9 Block diagram circuitry
Configuration
D
• ADC input: connected to the internal test network

• Pre-amplifier gain: 0dB or 12dB selected for the test.
• DAC: OFF.
Calculation
N–1
1
 Xi
2
TotalPower = ----
N
0
468
Test Functions
Where
N = 2048
Power below 3Hz:
N–1
 Xi
2
PowerLT3Hz =
0
Where
M = Number of frequency lines below 3Hz
(depends on Δf = 1/ N.SR)
Xˆ j = DFTofX ( t )signal
T
InstNoise = TotalPower – PowerLT3Hz
AF
FDU-508 Instrument Distortion
This test is used to check the FDU’s built-in ADC converter for linear response.
A sine wave with known amplitude and frequency is applied to its input via the internal test
network.
R
D
Figure 10-10 Block Diagram Circuitry
Configuration

Test Functions
• DAC: ON, connected to the internal test network.

Test Principle
The DAC supplies a 31.25 Hz sine wave with an amplitude of 97% of the FDU’s full scale.
Gain RMS Test Signal Peak Test Signal
0 dB 1552 mV 2194.9 mV
12dB 388 mV. 548.7 mV.
The ADC input is connected to the internal test network and the voltage at the internal test
network outputs is measured.
T
AF
lines).

R
ˆ 2
TestFreqPower = X1
Where
D
= DFT of the fundamental harmonic line

N
ˆ 2
HarmonicPower =  Xi
2
Where
N≤9
InsDistortion ( db ) = 10 × log  HarmonicPower

--------------------------------------------
10  TesFreqPower 
470
Test Functions
FDU-508 Instrument Gain

This test is used to check for any drift of the gain of the FDU’s built-in ADC converter within
the band from DC to the filter’s cut-off frequency.
T
Configuration
AF
R
Test principle
D
The DAC supplies a 31.25 Hz sine wave with an amplitude of 97% of the FDU’s full scale
(TheoretRms).
Gain RMS Test Signal TheoretRMS Peak Test Signal
0 dB 1552 mV 2194.9 mV
12dB 388 mV. 548.7 mV.
The gain test result is a gain error value, expressed in %, which corresponds to the amplitude
ratio of the signal and a theoretical response.
DFT computation

Test Functions

Vrms = Dft
Gain relative error:
GainDeviation(%) = 100 ×  -------------------------------- – 1
Vrms
TheoretRms
FDU-508 Instrument Phase

This test is used to check for any drift of the phase of the FDU’s built-in ADC converter
within the band from DC to the filter’s cut-off frequency.
T
AF
R
D
Configuration
472
Test Functions
Test principle
The DAC supplies a 31.25 Hz sine wave with an amplitude of 97% of the FDU’s full scale,
0 dB 1552 mV 2194.9 mV
12dB 388 mV 548.7 mV
The phase test result is a phase error value, expressed in µs, which corresponds to the phase
difference between the signal and a theoretical response.
The theoretical response depends on the sample rate, gain, and the selected filter.
DFT computation
T
Phase value of the measured signal:
Arg = Argument (Dft), is the Phase of frequency line at TestFreq frequency
AF
TheoretArg = Argument (TheoretDft) + DevFreqArg
DevFreqArg represents the product of all phase correction factors induced by the acquisition
channel circuitry, like phase corrections from digital filters and from
the ADC and DAC.
DevFreqArg is not involved in the computation of TheoretDft.
The different DevFreqArg values depend on the type of filter used and on the Sample rate
R
and on the frequency.
TestFreq is 31.25Hz.
DevFreqArg represents the product of all phase correction factors induced by the acquisition
D
channel circuitry, like phase corrections from digital filters and from the ADC and DAC.
DevFreqArg depends on the selected gain:
DevFreqArg = -0.03357179F for 0dB gain
DevFreqArg = -0.03504441F for 12dB gain
Argument (TheoretDft) is depending on SR, filter (LIN or MIN) and is given by following
table:
Sample Rate LIN Filter MIN Filter
0.5ms -2.67948079F 0.029530527F
1 ms 1.14933514F 0.283593535F
2 ms 2.52378177F 0.786873757F
4 ms -1.01050984F 1.74532282F

Test Functions
Phase error:
+ π ⁄ 2 – TheoretArg-
PhaseDeviation (µs) = 10 6 ×  Arg
--------------------------------------------------------------

2π × TestFreq
FDU-508 Instrument CMRR

This test is used to measure the Common Mode Rejection Ratio of the FDU’s built-in ADC
converter. A sine wave with known amplitude and frequency is applied to both of its inputs
via the internal test network.
The test returns the ratio of the RMS value of the output voltage, relative to the input, to the
common mode voltage.
T
AF
R
Figure 10-13 Instrument CMRR
Configuration
D

The ADC input is connected to the internal test network so that the ADC receives the same
signal on both inputs.
474
Test Functions
Test principle
The DAC supplies a 31.25 Hz sine wave with an amplitude of 97% of the FDU’s full scale,
0 dB 1552 mV 2194.9 mV
12dB 388 mV 548.7 mV
The theoretical input RMS value of the Common Mode voltage, CMSignalRms, is
computed from theoretical resistance of the test network.
IDac = 388μA rms
CMRRNetworkRes = 1kΩ
CMSignalRms = 388μA x 1kΩ = 388mVrms
T
Vrms = RMS value of the measured signal
CMRR Computation:
AF
InstrCMRR ( dB ) = 20 × log 10  -------------------------------------- + 20 × log 10 ( CMfactor )
CMSignalRms
Vrms
where CMfactor represents the Common Mode resistance correction factor corresponding to
the equivalent CMRR level with respect to the earth and not to the analog ground (which is
R
the reference used for the test).
CMfactor = 21.4
The result is expressed in dB.
D

Test Functions
FDU-508 Instrument Pulse

This test is used to record the response of the instrument channel to a pulse (one sample
long).
T
Figure 10-14
Configuration AF
R
Test Principle
Test is performed in one sequence of 2048 samples where the DAC supplies a pulse with two
different current levels with known amplitude and specific sequence:
D
Figure 10-15 Test Principle
The first part of the sequence corresponds to 512ms.

The pulse is 1 sample long and is generated so that the middle of the pulse is placed at the
sampling time.
The test returns the samples that can be recorded to a SEGD file.
476
Test Functions
FDU-508 Instrument Test Limits

Below are the FDU-508 instrument test limits for overall temperature
(-40°C to +70°C) depending on selected sample rate:
0.5 ms Sample Rate

• Max. Distortion: -103 dB.
• Min. Common Mode Rejection (CMRR): 100 dB.
• Max. Gain error: 1.5%.
• Max. Phase error: 25 μs.
• Max. Noise (0 dB gain, 1600 mV scale): 2.0 μV.
T
1 ms Sample Rate
•
•
AF
Max. Gain error: 1.0%.
Max. Phase error: 20 μs.
R
2 ms Sample Rate
D

4 ms Sample Rate

Test Functions
FDU-508 Test Functions > FDU-508 Sensor Tests 10
FDU-508 Sensor Tests
FDU-508 Sensor Resistance
This test is used to measure the resistance of the seismic sensor connected on the channel
input,
T
AF
Configuration
R
• ADC input: connected to the input circuitry from the sensor
• Pre-amplifier gain: 0dB is used.
• DAC: ON, connected to the sensor.
D
• Filter type: 0.8LIN is used

Test principle
Test is performed in two sequences of 2048 samples each where the DAC supplies two
different current levels with known amplitude to the sensor channel.
Idac level 12.5%

(% of generator
Full scale)
0%
2048 samples 2048 samples
Sequence 1 Sequence 2
478
Test Functions
FDU-508 Test Functions > FDU-508 Sensor Tests
During the first sequence, The DAC supplies a 0% level to the ADC converter. The mean
value (Mean1) of the resulting output signal is computed, relative to the input of the ADC.
During the second sequence, The DAC supplies a 12.5% level to the ADC converter. The
mean value (Mean2) of the resulting output signal is computed, relative to the input of the
ADC.
Measuring the total sensor input channel resistance:
InputRes = ( mean2 – mean1 ) ⁄ ( IDac2 – IDac1 )
where IDac2 and IDac1 are the two different current levels used for the test.
IDac2 = 88.39µA
IDac1 = 0 µA
T
• Sensor resistance:
InputRes = SensorRes // InputNetworkRes
AF
InputNetworkRes = 20kΩ
FDU-508 Sensor Noise

This test is used to measure the noise at the channel input. The ADC converter’s input is
connected to the channel input. A DFT is performed and the noise spectral power below 3
Hz is computed. As the total energy of the output signal is known, the total noise within the
R
bandwidth can be deduced.
D
Configuration
• DAC: OFF.

Test Functions
Calculation:
N–1
1
 Xi
2
TotaPower = ----
N
0
Where
N = 2048
Power below 3Hz:
T
M
ˆ 2
PowerLT3Hz =  Xj
AF0
Where
M = Number of frequency lines below 3Hz
(depends on Δf = 1/ N.SR)
= DFT of X(t) signal
R
FieldNoise = TotalPower – PowerLT3Hz
FDU-508 Sensor Tilt
D
This test is used to check the seismic channel for compliance with a reference response,
480
Test Functions
Configuration
• Pre-amplifier gain: 0dB is used.
• Filter type: 0.8LIN is used.
• Sample Rate: 0.5ms is used.
Test Principle
T
AF
During the first 32 samples of the sequence (16ms), The DAC supplies a 12.5% level to the
ADC converter, and then return to 0% for the other samples.
R
The ADC input is connected to the sensor channel and the voltage at the sensor channel
outputs is measured.
The DSP’s output signal (pulse response) is then compared to a model recorded during the
Save Receiver test.
D
The error is computed in terms of difference from the model expressed in %.

• Computation of the signal offset (tilt offset) represented by the mean value of the DSP’s
output signal scaled by the 1.6√2 factor, acquired during the test.
• Computation of the correlation coefficient between the Tilt response and the model
response is the "mean" of all Tilt responses of all active FDUs.

Test Functions
FDU-508 Sensor Leakage

This test is used to measure the global leakage resistance between the seismic channel and
the earth ground.
Note that leakage measurement is based on distant CX-508 earth ground reference.
Earth ground “link” may vary depending on the environment, and may represent a ground
resistance that may affect leakage value accuracy.
T
AF
R
D
482
Test Functions
T
Configuration AF
• ADC input: connected to the input circuitry from the sensor and the internal test network
R
Test principle
The principle behind this test consists of applying a voltage across the FDU's ground and the
earth reference.
D
Test is performed in two sequences of 2048 samples each where the DAC supplies two
During the first sequence, The DAC supplies a 50% level to the ADC converter. The mean

Test Functions
During the second sequence, The DAC supplies a 0% level to the ADC converter. The mean
Knowing the output voltage and the current level, the system computes the leak resistance
value of the input sensor channel,expressed in Ohms.
With no leakage between the conductors of geophone arrays, the impedances, with respect
to the ground (earth), of the two conductors connecting a geophone array to an FDU are
equal. The unwanted signals picked up (atmospheric interferences, earth potential, etc.) are
then sensed in common mode and thus rejected by the FDU.
If any leakage takes place (due to water penetration in cables, or connectors or geophones,
etc.) then the links exhibit unbalanced impedances. As a result, the common-mode signals
are somewhat converted into differential signals and therefore added to the seismic signal.
FDU-508 Sensor Pulse
T
This test is used to record the response of the seismic channel to a pulse (one sample long).
AF
R
D
Figure 10-20
Configuration
484
Test Functions
Test principle
different current levels with known amplitude and specific sequence:
T
AF Figure 10-21
The first part of the sequence corresponds to 512ms.

The pulse is 1 sample long and is generated so that the middle of the pulse is placed at the
sampling time.
The test returns the samples that can be recorded to a SEGD file.
R
D

Chapter
T
11 VP Report 508
AF
In this chapter,
R
• Operator Reports (page 488)
D

VP Report 508
Overview >
Overview
The Observer report allows you to generate reports required to verify QC and to control
Experiences. The Observer Report also allows you to generate statistics concerning your
Experiences.
The Observer Report is displayed by clicking the corresponding icon on the 508XT start-up
bar.
Observer
Report
T
AF Figure 11-1 Startup bar
Report Date Report Types

R
D
Figure 11-2 Observer Report Types

VP Report 508
Operator Reports > Operator Reports Formats 11
Figure 11-3 Observer Report action buttons
Operator Reports
T
Operator Reports Formats
From the main window, you may display Report data in table format or text format. The
following reports are available
Observer Report
AF
The Observer Report provides a comprehensive list of all shot parameters.
The Observer report allows you to generate reports required to verify QC and to control
experiences. You may also generate report statistics.
R
Test Report
The Test Report provides a list of all completed Tests.
D
APS
(VE464 users only).
Vibrator QC and co-ordinate information can be exported in the form of
SPS-like files to an external computer for the purpose of QC analysis or to the Positioning
main window for geographical display.
The APS option extracts the status figures returned for every sweep by each vibrator. Any
field with invalid data is left blank. Unless the coordinates supplied by the radio positioning
receiver to the DPG are already in a projection format, the vibrator coordinates are converted
using the projection selected in the Geodesy (page 106). Check to see if the appropriate
projection is selected.
APS Verbose
(VE464 users only).
As the name suggests, the verbose version gives additional information
488
VP Report 508
Operator Reports > Operator Reports Formats
Source COG
The following information on the Centre Of Gravity of the source is logged into a daily file
identified by its Julian day:
• Identification (Line Number, Point Number, Point index from the input SPS Source file)
of the planned shot points,
• Position and QC status of the computed COG,
• Deviation between planned source positions and actual source COG positions.
SPS
SPS consists in four types of files:
• Source file (also called SPS S-file) including source positions,
• Receiver file (also called SPS R-file) including receiver positions,
T
• Relation file (also called SPS X-file) used to relate the S-file and Rfile,
See the 508XT Data format manual for more details on data formats and revisions.
AF
SCI-TB Check
The “SCI-TB Check” allows the user to collect in a report the check between the T0 time of
the DPG and the T0 Time of the SCI-508. If a discrepancy is over +/-20µs the report indicate
the concerned shot.
R
D
Figure 11-4 SCI-TB Check Report example

VP Report 508
Operator Reports > Operator Reports Formats 11
DCM Event File

The ‘DCM Event File” function allows the 508 system to export a file structured specifically
for DCM. This file (.csv or .txt), can be imported into SEGD-Gen software, and exported as
a SEGD file.
Finally, the SEG-D file can be imported to DCM software as an event.
T
Figure 11-5 DCM Event file example
AF
R
D
490
VP Report 508
Operator Reports > Displaying Reports
Displaying Reports
Report are displayed by double-click on any swath name.
T
AF
R
Figure 11-6 Observer Report Table format
D

VP Report 508
Operator Reports > Saving Operator Reports 11
It is possible to display data in Textual or Table format using the “Table/Text” tab.
T
AF
R
Figure 11-7 Observer Report Text Format
Saving Operator Reports

D
There are two options to save operator reports:

1. Click on the save button to individually save an operator report. The button only
saves the current observer report.
2. Use the Save all reports option in the upper left corner to save all operator reports of
the selected directory at once.
All operator reports are saved on the client computer hard disk.
The system allows you to save ALL reports by day (for all production days on all Swathes)
The system allows you to sort by Swath and then save Results for a Swath for several
production day.
492
VP Report 508
Operator Reports > Saving Operator Reports
2 1
T
Figure 11-8 Save all Reports
Save Selected Report

AF
You may choose to Save only the selected Report.
1. Select the format in which you would like to save the report.
R
D
Figure 11-9 Save Report as...
2. Select the directory where you wish to save the report.
Export Results
You may choose to export the report results.

VP Report 508
1. On the Main report screen right click and select Export Reports.
Figure 11-10 Export Reports
2. A wizard opens...
T
AF
R
D
Figure 11-11 Report Export Wizard
3. By default, all Reports are selected to be exported. De-select the reports that you
would NOT like to Export. Click Next.
494
VP Report 508
Operator Reports > Saving Operator Reports
4. Select the Export format. Click Next.
T
AF
R
Figure 11-12 Output format selection
D

VP Report 508
5. Select the directory to save the reports. Then click Finish.
T
AF
Figure 11-13 Directory selection
R
6. Reports will be generated. the progress bar is displayed. Click Finish, the reports will
be generated in the specified directories.
D
Figure 11-14
496
VP Report 508
Operator Reports > Creating Custom Reports
Flush Result
The Flush Result functionality allows you to delete all data corresponding to the selected
item.
1. On the Main report screen right click and select Flush Results.
Figure 11-15 Flush Results
T
2. The following dialog is displayed.
AF
R
Figure 11-16 Flush Results confirmation
D
Creating Custom Reports

It is possible to save parameters for all Reports with the desired contents for a .csv data
format.
How to create Custom Reports

1. Open the report you wish to customise.
2. Select the columns that you would like to include in your report.
3. Click on the button “Save as Default <report> table configuration”.

4. Save the Report.
The saved report will contain only the desired information.
To return to the standard report format, click the button

VP Report 508
Operator Reports > Creating Custom Reports 11
Return to
Save as Standard
Default Report Report
T
AF
R
D
Figure 11-17 Save Custom Reports
498
VP Report 508
Operator Reports > Export/Import Custom Configuration
Export/Import Custom Configuration

Custom configurations for Observer Reports can be Exported in XML format and saved on
a client machine for later use or safeguarding purposes.
The XML file is saved on the Client machine in the following directory:
T
Figure 11-18 XML folder for export files
AF
After a format reset (for columns), it is possible to import a report configuration that was
previously saved using the “Import custom configuration” function.
R
D
Figure 11-19 Custom configuration Export/ Import

VP Report 508
Operator Reports > Statistics 11
Statistics
The Statistics window allows you to display information concerning the Slip time and the
number of generated VPs.
T
AF
R
Figure 11-20 Statistics window
D
500
VP Report 508
Operator Reports > Statistics
Slip Time
The Slip time graph allows you to see shots that were fired within or outside of the Dynamic
Slip Sweep Time limits. Proper operation is indicated if, as in the graph below, all shots are
within the allowable limits.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 11-21 Slip Time example

VP Report 508
Operator Reports > Statistics 11
VP/ Hour
This option allows you to display in a graph, the number of VP’s executed on an hourly basis.
T
AF
Figure 11-22 VP’s / Hour example
R
D
502
Chapter
T
12 FT-508 Software
AF
In this chapter:
R
• FT-508 Application Interface (page 505)
D

FT-508 Software
Overview > Connection Panel 12
Overview
The FT-508 is a software application, running on a Logic Instrument TETRA RT 12 tablet,
dedicated for outdoor work to help Troubleshooters, Observers and Customer Support
Engineers to test the Field Units deployed along the 508XT Line.
The FT-508 application provides the line configuration settings for autonomous field units
as well as allowing you to perform instrument tests for all connected field units.
Additional information concerning the use of the FT-508 in the field can be in
Chapter 19: Case Study Autonomous Functionality in 508XT.
Connection Panel
The FT-508 application is automatically launched when you power on the tablet, the section
below is for information purposes only.
T
Leave the connections settings as is. Simply enter the password and click on Connect.
AF
R
D
Toolbar Applications
This toolbar allows the user to start the FT-508 applications. The following applications area
available:
• FT-508 HCI client: the main FieldTester application
• FT-508 Admin client: enable to restart, stop the FieldTester application, or the operating
system.
• FT-508 SME client: used for debugging the memory
Note This chapter only describes the FT-508 HCI client.
504
FT-508 Software
FT-508 Application Interface > Launching FT-508 application
FT-508 Application Interface

Launching FT-508 application
Once you Power On the FT-508 tablet, the splash screen is displayed until the client
application is completely ready to be used.
T
AF
Figure 12-1 508XT Splash Screen
Note If the splash screen is not displayed just after clicking on FT-508 HCI client in
R
the toolbar, restart the operating system.
D

FT-508 Software
FT-508 Application Interface > Home view 12
Home view
You can display the Home view by clicking on in the status bar.
T
AF
R
The Home screen displays a View Chooser that shows you all available views in the
application:
• Topo Views: graphical views that shows field units of the current spread.
D
• Numeric Views: grid views that shows field units parameters (e.g. CX serial Nb, battery
level, …).
• Settings View: used to view and modify setup values.
• Download View: used to download firmware updates to field units.
Note You can also display these application icons by clicking on .

A vertical panel on the left is displayed. See Figure 12-2.
506
FT-508 Software
FT-508 Application Interface > Home view
T
AF
Figure 12-2 Side view of icons
R
Connecting FT-508 to the Spread
To connect the FT-508 tablet to the spread:
D
1. Ensure the units in the spread that you want to check are powered On.
2. Connect an XDP network cable between the tablet and the CX-508 in the spread that
you want to check.
3. The serial number of the connected CX-508 appears in the information panel. For
example CX-508 number 416 in the figure below.

FT-508 Software
FT-508 Application Interface > Home view 12
The CX-508 serial number on which you are cable-connected is displayed on the
panel on the left:
T
AF
R
When you finish testing the spread, you can click on Disconnect and unplug the XDP
network cable.
D
508
FT-508 Software
FT-508 Application Interface > Settings View
Settings View
In Settings view, you can view (but not modify) the Setup values defined in the 508 HCI
setup parameters.
Crew Setup
You can view the Crew Setup values, such as the Sample Rate or the Acquisition Seismic
Gain.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 12-3 Crew setup

FT-508 Software
FT-508 Application Interface > Settings View 12
Sensor Type Setup

You can view the Sensor Type Setup values, such as the Leakage or Resistance Min. and
Max.
T
AF
R
Figure 12-4 Sensor Type Setup
State Panel
D
The State panel provides the following information:

• The Battery level icon, or an icon indicating that the tablet is plugged in and charging.
• The Disk Usage in percent.
510
FT-508 Software
FT-508 Application Interface > Topo Views
• FT508
Green: if the client is ready and started.
Red: a problem occurred with the tablet software. Try to restart to solve this problem.
• UC508
Green: if connected to the 508 central unit.
Red: if not connected to the 508 central unit.
• CX
Green: you are connected to a spread. The CX-508 serial number on which you are
connected is displayed just below (ex: 416).
Red: You are not connected to a spread.
Topo Views
Topo view displays field units as a kind of “map”. You can see graphically the spread using
T
the following toolbar at the bottom of the screen:
AF
Snapshot Selection Pan Center Zoom Labeling
Tool Tools Tool Tool Tools Tools
R
D
Snapshot Tool: Clicking this button allows you to take a snapshot of

the current spread and test results. Snapshots are saved in the Numeric
views.
Zoom selection mode: In this mode, you can zoom on field units by
drawing a zoom rectangle (red selection).

FT-508 Software
FT-508 Application Interface > Topo Views 12
Field Unit selection mode: In this mode, you can select field units by
drawing a selection rectangle (blue selection). Then, only the selected
field units of the current view displayed is tested.
Pan selection mode: In this mode you can move the current rectangle
display of the spread by touching the screen with your fingers. This
mode resembles what you can do with smartphones.
T
Zoom to fit: Display field units in order to fit all the spread on the
screen.
AF
Zoom Out
R
D
Zoom In
Note If no selection is made, all field units in the spread will receive the test
commands.
512
FT-508 Software
Topo State view

The Topo State view is used to change the state of field units. If you would like to perform
tests on units, the units must be in TEST state. If some units are in ACQUISITION state,
you can use this view to change the state of units to TEST. Use the Field Unit selection tool
to select field units.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 12-5 Topo State View

FT-508 Software
Select the desired field units (if no selection, all units in the spread are selected) and click on
Set Test or Set Acq on the left panel.
T
AF
R
Figure 12-6 Example, unit in TEST state
Once the state changed, you can see that the unit color has changed:
• Blue: Unit is in TEST state.
D
• Green: Unit is in ACQUISITION state.
514
FT-508 Software
The progress bar indicates if all units have successfully changed state.
T
AF
Figure 12-7 Example, unit in Acquisition state
Reset All
R
D
The Reset all button alows you to reset all field units.

FT-508 Software
Topo Instrument QC View

The Topo Instrument QC view is used to Test field instruments.
T
AF
R
Figure 12-8 Topo Instrument View
D
• Select the desired field units (if no selection, all units in the spread are selected).
• Select the gain (0 or 12 dB).
• Click on Go Test to run selected individual tests.
• Or, click Chain Tests to run all test that have been programmed during Test Hours.
516
FT-508 Software
Select the desired Instrument test type:
Figure 12-9 Instrument Test Types
The progress bar indicates if all units answered successfully.

Be careful, it does not indicate that all unit tests are OK.
T
Once the instrument test finished, you can see that the unit color has changed:
• Green: Test is OK for the unit.
AF
• Red: Test is NOT OK for the unit.
Topo Field QC View

The Topo Field view is used to test the field sensors.
R
D

FT-508 Software
• Select the desired field sensors(if no selection, all sensors in the spread are selected).
• Select Go Test or Chain Test.
T
AF
If Go Test is selected, select the desired Field test type:
R
D
Once the instrument test finished, you can see that the unit color has changed:
• Green: Test is OK for the unit.
• Red: Test is NOT OK for the unit.
If Chain Tests is selected the system will run all test that have been programmed during Test
Hours.
518
FT-508 Software
The progress bar indicates if all units answered successfully.

Be careful, it does not indicate that all unit tests are OK.
T
AF
R
D

FT-508 Software
Topo Transmission View

The Topo Transmission View allows you to test transmission rates for FDU-508s between
neighbouring CX-508s.
T
AF
R
To perform a Transmission Test
1. Select a CX-508 in the From: list. The To: list will display the two neighboring
CX-508s.
D
2. Select the neighboring CX which you would like to test. In the example above #719
and #1389.
3. Click Go Test. FDU links will disappear from the display. A Transmission Test
Running Message will be displayed during the test time (approx. 1 minute). Once
the test is concluded the FDU’s will be displayed in:
• Green: Transmission test is OK
• Red: Transmission rate Error is detected
• Orange: Transmission rate Warning
520
FT-508 Software
FT-508 Application Interface > Numeric Views
T
AF
Figure 12-10 Transmission test ongoing
R
Numeric Views
Numeric view displays field unit as a “table”. You can see the following tables:
D
CX Table: Displays information about all the CX connected in the spread.
FDU Instruments: Display information about all the FDU Instruments in the spread.

FT-508 Software
FT-508 Application Interface > Numeric Views 12
FDU Sensors: Display information about all the FDU Sensors in the spread.
DSU Instruments: Display information about all the DSU Instruments in the spread.
DSU Sensors: Display information about all the DSU Sensors in the spread.
T
AF
Snapshot View: Allows you to see the list of snapshots and their accompanying test results.
R
D
522
FT-508 Software
Filtering
If too many lines are displayed in a table, you can filter the content of the table using the
checkboxes in the left panel.
T
AF
For example, you can choose to display only field units that have failed the Gain test (Gain
Error), Distortion, etc.
R
D

FT-508 Software
Paging
In order to optimize display, lines in the tables are paged. The following toolbar displayed at
the bottom of the screen allow the user to navigate into pages:
These buttons allows the user to display directly the first / last page.
T
These buttons allows the user to display directly the next / previous page.
AF
Shows the user the actual page displayed / and the total number of pages.
R
Saving Test Data
D
Test results can be saved by inserting a recognized USB key. Test data is automatically saved
in a .CSV file.
WARNING
Test data must be saved on a USB key before proceeding to test another CX-508.
Test data for a CX-508 is not stored on the tablet PC.
In a Numeric view. Click on the Save button to save Test data to an export folder or to a
recognized USB device.
Figure 12-11 Save test data icon
524
FT-508 Software
CX Table View
Displays information about all the CX-508 connected in the spread.
T
AF
R
D

FT-508 Software
FDU Instruments Table View

Displays information about all the FDU Instruments in the spread.
T
AF
R
D
526
FT-508 Software
FDU Sensors Table View

Displays information about all the FDU Sensors in the spread.
T
AF
R
D

FT-508 Software
DSU Instruments View

Displays information about all the DSU Instruments in the spread.
T
AF
R
D
528
FT-508 Software
DSU Sensors View

Displays information about all the DSU Sensors in the spread.
T
AF
R
D

FT-508 Software
FT-508 Application Interface > Download View 12
Download View
The Download View allows you to update all field units with the latest firmware.
T
AF
R
Figure 12-12 Download View before Firmware Update

D
To download Firmware updates ensure Field Units are in Test state:

1. Click Browse to open the Firmware directory.
530
FT-508 Software
FT-508 Application Interface > Download View
T
AF
R
Figure 12-13 Browse to Firmware update folder
2. Select the type of update you want to Download. The following options are
available:
D
• Firmware for CX and LRC

• Firmware for CX and LRC and Nodes
• Firmware for CX only
• Firmware for LRC only
• Firmware for Node only
3. Click Open.
4. Click Start to download firmware to field units.

FT-508 Software
FT-508 Application Interface > Download View 12
Note Field Units that are already updated with the firmware will not be re-updated
unless you select Force.
Note You can also Downgrade firmware to a previous version by selecting Force.
5. Once the donwload process is complete, select the Reset All button to
ensure the latest Firmware update is visible.
6. Once the operation is complete the message Reset All - Reset Succeeded will be
displayed.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 12-14 Firmware Update after successful update
532
FT-508 Software
FT-508 Application Interface > Snapshots View
Snapshots View
Snapshots represent a line configuration at a given moment of time.
The Snaphots view provides a list of all the snapshots you have taken and their test results.
Additionally, Snapshots include Test Results associated with the snapshot.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 12-15 Snapshot view

FT-508 Software
FT-508 Application Interface > Snapshots View 12
Snapshots are updated to the 508 central unit when the FT-508 is connected to the Server-
508.
T
AF
R
Figure 12-16 Update to Server
D
534
FT-508 Software
FT-508 Application Interface > Modify Assignment
Modify Assignment
For Autonomous lines, the FT-508 allows you to modify the marker of the CX-508 on which
the FT-508 is connected.
To modify assignment configuration for autonomous field units:
1. Upon connection (plugging) of the FT-508 to the CX-508 concentrator, the
following window is displayed on the FT-508.
T
AF
Figure 12-17
R
This window allows you to modify the following default values.
• Line Name
D
• Point Number
• Side to assign
• Increment
2. Click OK once you have modified the values as required.
The FT-508 will display a graphical representation of your autonomous line with the
updated parameters.
3. Once the FT-508 is disconnected from the CX-508, parameters will be stored and
available upon the next connection.

Chapter
T
13 Data Harvester CX-508
AF
In this chapter,
R
• Operating mode (page 538)
• Connection of the DH CX-508 to the Central Unit
D
(page 540)
• Views (page 543)

Data Harvester CX-508
Overview >
Overview
508XT V2.0 introduces the management of Autonomous Concentrators. This allows the
508XT to handle both connected and autonomous node in the same spread.
Data from connected nodes is retrieved from the network. However, when nodes are not
connected to the network, a solution is required to retrieve the data from the autonomous
nodes. This is the purpose of the Data Harvester CX-508 (DH CX-508) (ref. 10011987).
T
AF
R
Figure 13-1 Data Harvester connected to autonomous CX-508
D
Unfortunately, in most cases, for Autonomous Concentrators and nodes, we cannot know in
which concentrator the data is stored. This depends on the line orientation at boot time.
Therefore data must be harvested from all concentrators in order to ensure we have recovered
all necessary data. However, data can optionally be recovered from all concentrators
simultaneously. See Harvester (page 120).
Radio QC data for Autonomous Concentrators is available in the Numeric Concentrator
View, see page 347.
For additional details on working with the DH-508, see Case Study: Autonomous
Functionality in 508XT (page 634).

Operating mode > 13
Operating mode
To retrieve the data from nodes and upload it to the central unit, proceed as described below.
Keep in mind that the data is not in the nodes but in the CX-508 managing the nodes.
Figure 13-2 Data retrieval from CX-508
Therefore, a DH CX-508 must harvest both CX-508 around a given node to be sure to
retrieve the data.
T
First step
Connect your DH CX-508 to the Central Unit. The Central Unit will send to the DH CX-508:
•
•
AF
The list of CX-508 to harvest
For each CX-508 the list of each experience to retrieve
Second step
Connect your DH CX-508 to one of the CX-508 to Harvest. The CX-508 will send to the
DH CX-508:
R
• The seismic data for each node for each seismic experience to be harvested
• The test data for each node for each test experience to be harvested
D
• The test result for each node for each test experience to be harvested
Repeat this step for all the concentrators to harvest.
Note The Harvesters Setup parameters allow you to select whether you want to collect
data from a singles concentrator or from the complete autonomous segment. See
Harvester (page 120).
Third step
Connect your DH CX-508 to the Central Unit. The DH CX-508 will send to the Central Unit:
• The harvested seismic data for each node
• The harvested test data for each node
• The harvested test result for each node
538
Operating mode > Limits
Limits
The DH CX-508 can only harvest the spreads that were previously assigned using the DT-
508 and FT-508.
The DH CX-508 can only harvest the data of the CX-508 to whom it is connected. It can’t
harvest data from other autonomous CX-508 connected through the line.
T
AF
R
D

Connection of the DH CX-508 to the Central Unit > Switch 13
Connection of the DH CX-508 to the Central Unit

Switch
If a Switch is available on the eth1 Ethernet port (line port), it is possible to connect the
Ethernet port of the DH CX-508 to the Switch using a RJ45 Ethernet cable. It is not possible
to use one of the other switches (client/server, NAS, …)
Tranverse concentrator
It is possible to connect the DH CX-508 on the XDP plug of a transverse CX-508. Be careful
to use the XDP cable with impedance detection (reference 10035282).
Line concentrator
T
It is possible to connect the DH CX-508 on the XDP plug of a CX-508 line. Be careful to use
the XDP cable with impedance detection (reference 10035282).
This is less efficient that connecting to a transverse CX-508 because line baud rate is not as
AF
high as transverse baud rate.
Connection of the DH CX-508 to the CX-508

It is possible to connect the DH CX-508 on the XDP plug of a CX-508. Be careful to use the
XDP cable with impedance detection (reference 10035282).
R
D
540
Connection of the DH CX-508 to the Central Unit > Connection Panel
Connection Panel
The DH CX-508 application is automatically restarted at boot time.
Use the following window if for any reason you need to restart the application
T
Figure 13-3 DH CX-508 connection window
AF
Leave the connections settings as is. Simply enter the password and click on Connect.
(password is pwd).
Toolbar applications
R
D
The toolbar enables the user to start the 508 Harvester applications:
• 508 Harvester client: the main Harvester application
• 508 Harvester Admin client: enable to restart, stop the Harvester application, or the
operating system.
• 508 Harvester SME client: used for debugging the memory.
Figure 13-4 DH CX-508 connection button
Note This document only describes the DH CX-508 Harvester Client

Connection of the DH CX-508 to the Central Unit > Splash Screen 13
Splash Screen
The splash screen is displayed until the client application is completely ready to be used.
T
AF
Figure 13-5 DH CX-508 Splash screen
If the splash screen is not displayed just after clicking on DH CX-508 Harvester Client in
the toolbar, restart the operating system.
R
D
542
Views > System Information
Views
System Information
The screen is divided into three sections:
• An upper frame
• A lateral frame
• A main window
The Upper Frame
T
The Exit Menu
AF
R
D
Use this menu to collect information on the current software release or to exit the DH CX-
508 software.
Disk Usage
This indicates the amount of internal memory remaining in the DH CX-508.
Local Time
Indicates the local time.
Minimize
Minimizes the main window.

Views > System Information 13
Side Frame
The lateral frame indicates on which device the DH CX-508 is connected.
There are three possibilities:
• The DH CX-508 is connected to the central unit
Figure 13-6 DH CX-508 connected to central unit
• The DH CX-508 is not connected to any device
T
AF
Figure 13-7 DH CX-508 not connected to any device
• The DH CX-508 is connected to a CX-508

R
D
Figure 13-8 DH CX-508 connected to a CX-508
At the active state, the icon is green. When inactive it is grey. As the three states are not
compatible, there is always one green icon and two grey icons.
Figure 13-9 Inactive State
544
Views > The Main Window
The Main Window
DH CX-508 Connected to CU
There are two reasons to connect a DH CX-508 to the Central Unit:
• To collect information for harvesting
• To upload all the data harvested to the Central Unit
When you connect your DH CX-508 to the central unit, the sequence of actions is the
following;
• The DH CX-508 sends the test results retrieved on the concentrators
• The DH CX-508 sends the test data retrieved on the concentrators
• The DH CX-508 sends the seismic data retrieved on the concentrators
• Once the central unit acknowledges the reception of this data, the DH CX-508 clears all
T
the data.
• The Central Unit sends to the DH CX-508 the list of experiences with missing data for
the next harvest.
•
AF
The Central Unit sends to the DH CX-508 the list of concentrator to be harvested.
R
D
Figure 13-10 Waiting for Central Unit connection

Views > The Main Window 13
T
AF
Figure 13-11 Data upload in progress
Upload of the data (test results, test data, seismic, data)

The main progression bars decreases from 100% (nothing done) to 0% (upload finished).
R
In front of each concentrator, the progression bar behaves the same way decreasing from
100% to 0%.
D
Figure 13-12 Download timebreaks
546
Download of timebreaks (list of experiences and concentrators to retrieve)
T
AF
Figure 13-13 Timebreaks downloaded
List of concentrators to harvest

The “data” field is an indication of the amount of data to harvest. In explosive mode it
corresponds to the number of shots to harvest. In slip sweep (and generally when there is an
R
overlap of the sweeps) it’s an internal value. The bigger it is the more data is to be harvested.
D
Figure 13-14 List of concentrators to Harvest
In the case above there is nothing to harvest

DH CX-508 not connected

This window is displayed when you disconnect your DH CX-508 from the central unit in
order to harvest or when you disconnect your DH CX-508 from a CX-508 to harvest another
one then return to the central unit.
T
AF
R
Figure 13-15 DH CX-508 not connected
On the left panel the list of CX-508 to harvest is displayed.

D
On the right panel the list of CX-508 already harvested is displayed
548
DH CX-508 Connected to CX-508

This window automatically opens when you connect your DH CX-508 to an autonomous
CX-508
T
AF
Figure 13-16 DH CX-508 connected to CX-508
During the harvest, the list of Tbs and their length is displayed.
R
The corresponding line disappears once harvested.
The progress bar goes from 0% to 100%.
D

T
AFFigure 13-17 Harvest in progress
When the harvest of the concentrator is finished, the following window is displayed.
R
D
Figure 13-18 Harvest concluded
550
Chapter
T
14 Sercel 508 Launcher
AF
Application
R
In this chapter,

D
• Operating Mode (page 552)

Sercel 508 Launcher Application
Overview > 14
Overview
Purpose
The Sercel 508 Launcher application provides a convenient method of starting other Sercel
installed applications on the Motorola Workabout Pro 4.
Operating Mode
Main Screen
When the Sercel Launch application runs, the main screen below appears. From this screen,
other Sercel application may started. Tap on any of the large buttons to start another
application. For example, tap on Deploy Tool 508 V1.0 to start the DT-508 application.
T
AF
R
D
Components
Application
The Sercel application to start.
Status
Current status of the application:
• green – running
• red – stalled
• white – not running
552
Operating Mode > About
Auto Start
If checked, the selected application will also auto-start when the WAP4 is powered on. Note
that only one application may be selected to auto-start.
Status Bar
The main screen contains a status bar that contains messages that correspond to actions or
results of actions by the user. To examine a history of these messages, tap on the arrow on
the right-hand side of this box.
Menu Bar
The bottom panel contains the main menu.
T
AF
From this menu, the user can:
• access other Mobile Windows functions by tapping on the Windows
button
R
• exit SercelLaunch by tapping File > Exit
• Get information about the Sercel Launch application by tapping on the About button
• minimize SercelLaunch by tapping the X button (when the SercelLaunch application is
D
restarted, it immediately reappears without a startup time)
• erase the status bar by tapping the erase button to the left of the status bar
About
From the Main screen tap About to go to the about screen.
The About screen shows versions of the executables and DLLs used in the Sercel Launch
application, along with the Device Id of the WAP4.

Operating Mode > About 14
T
AF
If Copy to Clipboard is tapped, this information is saved in the clipboard of the WAP4
device.
R
D
554
Chapter
T
15 DT-508 Software
AF
In this chapter,
R
• Operating Mode (page 558)
• Troubleshooting (page 595)
D

DT-508 Software
Overview > 15
Overview
The Sercel Deploying Tool 508 (DT-508) (ref. 10011986) software application is used to
assist in the deployment of field units such as Concentrators (CX-508) and Nodes (FDU-508
and DSU-508) on an autonomous spread.
This consists of managing assignments, detours, snaking detours, and mutes. After this
information is collected, the DT-508 is able to connect to the 508-HCI Server to upload the
deployment list via Ethernet cabling.
The DT-508 software application runs on a handheld PDA.
T
AF
scan
R
button
On / Off
D
button
Figure 15-1 Handheld PDA
556
DT-508 Software
Overview > Specifications and Part Numbers
Specifications and Part Numbers
PC System Requirements
(used to download application .cab files to the PDA)
Item Description
Operating System Windows 7
USB port
Windows Mobile Device Center Microsoft application to download .cab files
T
PDA System Requirements
Item AF Description
Psion WorkAbout Pro 4 (WAP4) Handheld PDA
Operating System Windows ® Embedded Handlheld 6.5 Professional
RFID
Ethernet Port
R
D

DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Startup 15
Operating Mode
Startup
Run the DT-508 application by tapping on the DT-508 button from the Sercel 508 Launcher
screen.
When the WAP4 is first powered on, the Sercel Launcher application automatically starts.
T
AF
R
Alternatively, the DT-508 may also be started by tapping on the DT-508 icon on the Windows
D
Start screen.
558
DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > DT-508 Interface
T
AF
Note that several applications use RFID drivers but only one may be running at a time. If
another application is running, you may see a message like this:
R
In this case, close the currently running application that is using the RFID drivers and restart
D
DT-508.
DT-508 Interface
Main Screen
When the DT-508 application is run, the main screen below appears. From this screen, all
other parts of the application may be accessed. Tap on any of the large buttons below to go
to a particular function. For example, tap on Assign to go to the Assignment management
function (section Assignment).

DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > DT-508 Interface 15
T
AF
Most screens within the DT-508 contain a status bar and a menu bar.
The status bar contains messages that correspond to actions or results of actions by the user.
To examine a history of these messages, tap on the arrow on the right-hand side of this box.
The menu bar lets the user perform several actions specific to the individual screen and are
R
described in each section.
Main Menu
D

• Access other Mobile Windows functions by tapping on the Windows
button
• Exit DT-508 by tapping File > Exit
• Minimize DT-508 by tapping the X button (when the DT-508 application is restarted
(Startup), it immediately reappears without a startup time)
• Erase the status bar by tapping Edit > Clear Status Bar
560
DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > DT-508 Interface
T
•
AF
Save all user entries (e.g. assignments, detours) to a file by tapping File > Save Database
As … , choosing a file name, and Save
R
D
• Open a previously saved file by tapping File > Open Database … , confirming it is okay
to clear the current (internal) database, and selecting a file containing the saved database

DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Assignment 15
T
Assignment
AF
From the Main screen tap Assign to go to the Assignment screen.
Create an Assignment
To create an assignment,
1. Enter the Line and Point location
R
2. Using the DT-508 scan the unit, by pressing the Scan button see Figure 15-1
(page 556), to obtain the Box Type and Serial Number.
3. Tap on Assign to save this entry into the assignment table.
D
In the screen below, the user entered Line 10.0, Point 6.0. He scanned the unit (FDU_508)
and obtained serial number 1098. After tapping the Assign button, the information is
internally saved – note the confirmation message in the status window – “Line 10 Pt 6 serial#
set to 1098”.
562
DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Assignment
T
Also note that the green arrow on the screen above indicates the direction of assignments.
AF
That is, when an assignment is made, the point number is auto-incremented up or down
depending upon the Assignment Increment-Point Increment of the Settings > Database
screen (see section Assignment Increment).
In the example above, the Point Increment was 1.0 and the direction was advancing High
(low to high).
For scanning operations, depress the scan button for a few seconds. The scan button of the
R
AP4 is circled in red, see Figure 15-1.
If multiple units are scanned, a dialog box will appear requesting to select the correct one.
After choosing the correct unit/serial number, this information appears on the Assign screen.
D
Note also that the Serial Nb may also be manually entered via the WAP4 keyboard.

DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Assignment 15
Modify an Assignment
When the user changes the location (line/point) on the screen, if this location already has an
assignment, the text of the Assign button will change to Modify. In this mode, the Serial Nb
can be updated if needed.
T
AF
List
From the Assign screen, tap List to see a listing of all assignments.
Home
R
Tapping the Home button returns the user to the Main screen (Main Screen).
D
564
DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Assignment List
Assignment List
From the Assign screen, tap List to see a listing of all assignments.
The assignment list screen displays all assignments. From this screen the user can define a
new assignment, change an existing assignment; and sort, filter, find, and/or remove
assignment(s).
T
AF
R
New
To define a new assignment, tap New. This returns you to the Assign screen (section Create
D
an Assignment).
Modify
To modify an assignment, select an entry and tap Modify. This returns you to the Assign
screen (section Modify an Assignment Assignment) with the Line, Point, Box Type, and
Serial Nb already filled in.
Filter
The assignment list can be filtered in a variety of ways –
• Show all
• Show only FDU508s and DSU508s
• Show only FDU508s
• Show only DSU508s

DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Assignment List 15
• Show only concentrators (Cx)

• Show only all the assignments on one line.
Below is an example of displaying only concentrators:
T
AF
When Show Line is selected, a dialog box first appears for the user to select which line to
display. Once selected, the list only displays assignments from the selected line.
R
D
To return to displaying all assignments, use the Filter to Show All.
566
DT-508 Software
T
Search
AF
The assignment list may also be searched. Tap Find … to display the screen below. Then
select All Columns or select a Column, choose the Search Text and tap Search. The
assignment list will scroll to where the first match is found, and selects it.
R
D
If a search has multiple results, tap Find Next to find the next match.
Sort
Tap on a column header to sort the table. For example, to sort the table based on serial
numbers, tap on the text Serial #. To reverse the sort, tap on the column header again.

DT-508 Software
T
Remove
AF
By tapping the Remove button, the user can choose to remove the currently selected item in
the list, remove all assignments on a selected line, or remove all assignments.
Before assignment(s) are removed, the user must confirm the removal.
R
Remove selected assignment:
D
568
DT-508 Software
Remove assignments on one line:
T
AF
Remove all assignments:
R
D

DT-508 Software
Context Menu
If the user holds down the stylus (or finger) for a few seconds on an entry in the table, a menu
appears to allow the user to modify or delete the selected entry, or go to a different screen
altogether. If Modify Assignment is chosen, it is the same as first selecting an entry and then
tapping Modify (see section Modify). If Delete Assignment is chosen, a confirmation
appears to confirm removal of this entry. If one of the other menu items is chosen, the Assign
List screen is closed and the selected screen appears.
T
AF
R
D
570
DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Detour
Detour
From the Main screen tap Detour to go to the Detour creation screen.
Create a Detour
To define a detour, specify a start line and point; an end line and point; and the number of
nodes that are detoured. Then tap on Create to create the detour. A confirmation message is
displayed in the status window.
T
AF
R
Modify
See Modify step in section Tapping New returns the user to the Detour creation screen (From
the Main screen tap Detour to go to the Detour creation screen.)..
D
List
From the Detour screen, tap List to see a listing of all detours.
Home

DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Detour List 15
Detour List
From the Detour screen, tap List to see a listing of all detours.
The detour list screen displays all defined detours. From this screen the user can define a
new detour, change an existing detour, and/or remove detour(s).
New
Tapping New returns the user to the Detour creation screen (From the Main screen tap Detour
to go to the Detour creation screen.).
Modify
To modify a detour, first select an entry in the table and tap Modify. This returns you to the
Detour screen with values preset from the entry of the detour table. Change any value and
tap Modify on this screen to make the modification. In the example below, the number of
T
nodes (FDU-508s or DSU-508s) was modified.
AF
R
D
Sort
Tap on one of the column headers Begin Line or End Line to sort the detour table. To reverse
the sort, tap on the column header again.
Remove
the list, remove all detours on a selected line, or remove all detours.
Before detour(s) are removed, the user must confirm the removal.
572
DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Detour List
Remove selected detour:
T
AF
Remove all detours on a selected line:
R
D

DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Detour List 15
Remove all detours:
T
Home
AF
R
D
574
DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Detour List
Context Menu
altogether. If Modify Detour is chosen, it is the same as first selecting an entry and then
tapping Modify (see section Tapping New returns the user to the Detour creation
screen (From the Main screen tap Detour to go to the Detour creation
screen.). on page 572.
If Delete Detour is chosen, a confirmation appears to confirm removal of this entry. If one
of the other menu items is chosen, this screen is closed and the selected screen appears.
T
AF
R
D

DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Snaking 15
Snaking
From the Main screen tap Snaking to go to the snaking creation screen.
Create Snaking
To define a snaking detour, the user defines a start line, point, and direction (limit); an end
line, point, and direction; and the number of nodes (FDU508s or DSU508s) that are detoured.
Note that the four buttons on the bottom left, represent the different start and end orientation
combinations that are possible. In fact, the user can either select the Low/High buttons in the
Detour Start/Detour End panels or select the picture buttons to choose the appropriate
orientation of the snaking.
Finish the snaking creation by tapping Create. A confirmation message is displayed in the
status window.
T
AF
R
D
Modify
See Modify step in section Modify.
List
From the Snaking screen, tap List to see a listing of all snakings.
Home
Tapping the Home button returns the user to the Main screen (Main Screen
(page 559)).
576
DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Snaking List
Snaking List
From the Snaking screen, tap List to see a listing of all snakings.
The snaking list screen displays all defined snaking. From this screen the user can define a
new snaking, change an existing snaking, and/or remove snaking(s).
T
AF
R
New
Tapping New returns the user to the Snaking creation screen (From the Main screen tap
D
Snaking to go to the snaking creation screen.).
Modify
To modify a snaking, first select an entry in the table and tap Modify. This returns you to the
Snaking screen with values preset from the entry of the snaking table. Change any value and
tap Modify on this screen to make the modification.

DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Snaking List 15
T
AF
Sort
Tap on one of the column headers Begin Line or End Line to sort the snaking table. To
reverse the sort order, tap on the column header again.
R
Remove
the list or remove all snakings.
D
Before snaking(s) are removed, the user must confirm the removal.
578
DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Snaking List
Remove selected snaking:
T
Remove all snaking:
AF
R
D
Home
Tapping the Home button returns the user to the Main screen (Main Screen
(page 559)).

DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Mute 15
Context Menu
altogether. If Modify Snaking is chosen, it is the same as first selecting an entry and then
tapping Modify (see section Modify (page 577)). If Delete Snaking is chosen, a
confirmation appears to confirm removal of this entry. If one of the other menu items is
chosen, this screen is closed and the selected screen appears.
T
AF
R
Mute
D
From the Main screen tap Mute to go to the Mute assignment screen.
Create a Mute Assignment

To create a Mute, the user first selects the Line and Point and then taps on the checkbox to
enable the mute for this location. If the checkbox is unchecked, then this location is not
muted.
580
DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Mute
T
List
AF
From the Mute screen, tap List to see a listing of all mutes.
Home
R
D

DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Mute List 15
Mute List
From the Mute screen, tap List to see a listing of all mutes.
The mute list screen displays all mutes. From this screen the user can define a new mute or
sort, filter, find, and/or remove mute(s).
T
AF
New
R
To define a new mute, tap New. This returns you to the Mute screen (section From the
Main screen tap Mute to go to the Mute assignment screen. (page 580))
D
582
DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Mute List
Filter
The mute list can be filtered to display only the mutes defined on one line.
T
AF
To return to displaying all mutes, use the Filter to Show All.
R
D

DT-508 Software
Search
The mute list may also be searched. Tap Find … to display the screen below. Then select
All Columns or select a Column, choose the Search Text and tap Search. The mute list
will scroll to where the first match is, and selects it.
T
AF
Sort
Tap on one of the column headers Line or Point to sort the mute table. To reverse the sort
R
tap on the column header again.
Remove
D
the list, or remove all mutes.
Before mute(s) are removed, the user must confirm the removal.
584
DT-508 Software
Remove selected mute:
T
AF
Remove all mutes on a line:
R
D

DT-508 Software
Remove all mutes:
T
AF
R
D
Home
Context Menu
altogether. If Modify Mute is chosen, this screen is closed and the Mute screen is opened.
586
DT-508 Software
If Delete Mute is chosen, a confirmation appears to confirm removal of this entry. If one of
the other menu items is chosen, this screen is closed and the selected screen appears.
T
AF
R
D

DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Transfer 15
Transfer
From the Main screen tap Transfer to go to the transfer screen.
In order to send the deployment list to the HCI server, use the Transfer screen. The status
LED indicates whether the Ethernet port is physically connected or not – green connected,
red disconnected. Tapping on this LED pings the HCI server to test the physical link.
T
AF
R
Next, tap Connect to login to the 508-HCI server. Once this logical connection is successful,
tap Send to send the deployment list to the server. The WAP4 sends an XML file to the HCI
server containing all elements of the deployment list – assignments, detours, snakings, and
mutes.
D
Need other screen captures when connected to server.

Once the transfer is complete, the user is asked if the database within the WAP4 should be
removed or not. If the WAP4 is to be used on a new autonomous spread, the answer should
be Yes to remove it.
Settings
Tapping the Settings button takes the user to the Settings-FTP screen (see page 589). If
there are problems with pinging the HCI server or connecting to it, please check the FTP
settings.
Home
588
DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Settings
Settings
From the Main screen tap Settings to go to the settings screen.
FTP
The FTP tab of the Settings screen contains all information necessary to set up the transfer
of information from the WAP4 to the HCI server. That is, the
• IP address of the HCI Server
• Remote Directory name of the server
• User name of the account on the server
• Password of the account
T
AF
R
D
When you tap on a field to change the Remote Directory, User, or Password, a popup
keyboard appears to allow you to entry the letters required.

DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Settings 15
T
AF
R
D
590
DT-508 Software
Database
The Database tab of the Settings screen allows the user to change the Default Increment
values or Assignment Increment values.
T
AF
Default Increment
R
D
The Default Increment values are the Line and Point values used when one taps on the up or
down arrows on certain numeric boxes. The Line Increment and Point Increment values are
used on the Assign, Detour, Snaking, and Mute screens for the incrementing/decrementing
of the Line and Point values. In the example below, with a Line Increment of 10, when the
user taps on the left (down) arrow in the Line field, the number would decrement from 40.0
to 30.0. Likewise, if the user taps on the right (up) arrow in the Line field, the number would
increment from 40.0 to 50.0. The same management is used for the Point Increment.

DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > Settings 15
T
Assignment Increment
AF
R
The Assignment Increment values are the Point Increment and Direction values used after a
new assignment is made. For example, with the Point Increment set as 1 and the Direction
set to High, after the user taps on the Assign button, since the direction is High, the Point
D
number on the Assign screen increments by 1. If the direction had been set to Low, the Point
number would have been decremented by 1. If no increment or decrement of the Point
number is desired, the user can set the Direction to None. In this case, the Point number is
not changed after the assignment is made.
592
DT-508 Software
T
Clear All
AF
All of the deployment settings may be removed by tapping on Clear All and confirming the
deletion.
R
D

DT-508 Software
Operating Mode > About 15
About
The About screen shows versions of the executables and DLLs used in the DT-508
application, along with the Device Id of the WAP4.
T
AF
device.
R
D
594
DT-508 Software
Troubleshooting > Ethernet Connection
Troubleshooting
Ethernet Connection
To troubleshoot problems with the Ethernet connection:
• verify the physical connection between the WAP4 and HCI server
• verify the Ethernet Configuration
• verify that all settings are correct on the Settings > FTP tab screen (section From the Main
screen tap Settings to go to the settings screen.).
• verify that the 508-HCI server is configured to allow the DT-508 to login to it
RFID Test
T
Start
The reading of RFID tags may be checked by running the RFIDTest program. To start this
program, first close (File > Exit) the DT-508 application. Then use File Explorer to navigate
AF
to the My Device/Program Files/DT-508 directory. Tap on RFIDTest.
R
D
Scan
Scan one or more tags at a time and see the results on the screen. Below is an example of
where three different tags were read at the same time. Note that the tag information may be
displayed in either its raw form or a decoded form.

DT-508 Software
Troubleshooting > RFID Test 15
T
RFID Reader Information
AF
Additional information about the RFID reader can be displayed by tapping on the Reader
Info button.
R
D
Additional Information
Additional information may be found in the Motorola Workabout Pro4 RFID Mobile
Computer Integrator Guide.
596
Chapter
T
16 IT-508 Software
AF
In this chapter,
R
• Troubleshooting (page 614)
D

IT-508 Software
Overview > Startup 16
Overview
IT-508 software is used to help maintain a list of Sercel equipment that has been tagged with
RFID. After this information is collected in the DT-508 tool (ref. 10011986) (Workabout Pro
4 Mobile Computer), it can later be uploaded to the HCI server.
T
AF
R
Figure 16-1 IT-508 software on DT-508 tool
D
Startup
To run the IT-508 application, tap on the Inventory Tool 508 button from the Sercel 508
Launcher screen. Note: when the WAP4 is first powered on, the Sercel Launcher application
598
IT-508 Software
Overview > Startup
automatically starts.
T
AF
Alternatively, the IT-508 may also be started by tapping on the IT-508 icon on the Windows
Start screen.
R
D
Note that several applications use RFID drivers but only one may be running at a time. If
another application is running, you may see a message like this:

IT-508 Software
Overview > Startup 16
In this case, close the currently running application that is using the RFID drivers and restart
IT-508.
Main IT-508 Screen

When the IT-508 application is run, the main screen (below) appears. From this screen, all
T
other parts of the application may be accessed. Tap on any of the large buttons below to go
to a particular function. For example, tap on Scan to go to the scan function (section Scan
Screen (page 602)). AF
R
D
Most screens within the IT508 contain a status bar
and a menu bar.

The status bar contains messages that correspond to actions or results of actions by the user.
To examine a history of these messages, tap on the arrow on the right-hand side of this box.
The menu bar lets the user perform several actions specific to the individual screen and are
described in each section.
600
IT-508 Software
Overview > Startup
Main Menu

• access other Mobile Windows functions by tapping on the Windows button
• exit IT508 by tapping File > Exit

• minimize IT508 by tapping the X button (when the IT508 application is restarted
(Startup), it immediately reappears without a startup time)
• erase the status bar by tapping the erase button to the left of the status bar
T
• save all user inventory to a file by tapping File > Save Database As … , choosing a file
name, and Save
AF
R
D
• open a previously saved file by tapping File > Open Database … , confirming it is okay
to clear the current (internal) database, and selecting a file containing the saved database

IT-508 Software
Overview > Scan Screen 16
T
Scan Screen
From the Main screen tap Scan to go to the scan screen.
AF
Scan
R
D
602
IT-508 Software
Overview > Scan Screen
For scanning operations, depress the scan button for a few seconds. The scan button of the
WAP4 is circled below in red.
T
AF Figure 16-2 Scan button
Comment
Before adding scanned RFID tags to the internal database, you may add a comment to the
listing of these tags.
R
D

IT-508 Software
Overview > List 16
Add
Tap Add to add the newly scanned tags into the database. If a serial number is already found
to be in the database, a popup question will appear:
• To replace all tags listed on the Scan screen, tap Replace All.
• To replace just the unit listed in the question, tap Replace (In the example above, it is to
replace Node 561). When this choice is made, if more items are duplicated, further
T
questions will be asked.
• To ignore all tags listed on the Scan screen and keep the tags as is in the inventory, tap
AF
Skip All.
• To ignore just the tag listed in the question and keep it in the inventory as is, tap Skip.
List
From the Scan screen, tap List to see a listing of all scanned inventory.
Home
R
Tapping the Home button returns the user to the Main screen (Main IT-508 Screen).
List
D
From the Main screen tap List to go to the inventory list screen.
The inventory list screen displays all scanned inventory. From this screen the user can go
back to the Scan screen, change a comment on an existing entry; and sort, filter, find, and/or
remove inventory.
604
IT-508 Software
Overview > List
T
Scan AF
To define new inventory, tap Scan. This returns you to the Scan screen (section Scan)
Modify
To modify the comment field on a selected item of the inventory, tap Modify. This takes you
to the Modify Comment screen. Tap on the Comment field and enter the desired comment.
R
D
Filter
The inventory list can be filtered to display only nodes, only concentrators (Cx), or all other
units that are not nodes or concentrators. Below is an example of displaying only
concentrators:

IT-508 Software
Overview > List 16
T
To return to displaying all inventory, use the Filter to Show All.
AF
R
D
606
IT-508 Software
Overview > List
Search
The inventory list may also be searched. Tap Find … to display the screen below. Then
select All Columns or select a Column, choose the Search Text and tap Search. The
inventory list will scroll to where the first match is found, and selects it.
T
AF
Sort
Tap on a column header to sort the table. For example, to sort the table based on serial
R
numbers, tap on the text Serial #. To reverse the sort, tap on the column header again.
D
Sorting the Unit type or sorting the Date may also be useful:

IT-508 Software
Overview > List 16
T
Remove
AF
the list or remove all items in the inventory.
Before inventory is removed, the user must confirm the removal.
Remove selected item in inventory:
R
D
Remove all inventory:
608
IT-508 Software
Overview > List
T
Context Menu
AF
appears to allow the user to delete the selected entry, modify the comment, or go to the
Settings screen. If Delete Entry is chosen, a confirmation appears to confirm removal of this
entry.
R
D
If Modify Comment is chosen, this is the same as tapping on the Modify button (see section
Modify).
If Settings is chosen, the List inventory screen is closed and the Settings screen opens.

IT-508 Software
Overview > Transfer 16
Transfer
From the Main screen tap Transfer to go to the transfer screen.
In order to send the inventory list to the HCI server, use the Transfer screen. The status LED
indicates whether the Ethernet port is physically connected or not – green connected, red
disconnected. Tapping on this LED pings the HCI server to test the physical link.
T
AF
Next, tap Connect to login to the HCI server. Once this logical connection is successful, tap
R
Send to send the inventory list to the server. The WAP4 sends a CSV file to the HCI server
containing all entries scanned in the inventory.
Need other screen captures when connected to server.
D
Once the transfer is complete, the user is asked if the database within the WAP4 should be
removed or not. If the WAP4 is to be used on a new autonomous spread, the answer should
be Yes to remove it.
Settings
Tapping the Settings button takes the user to the Settings-FTP screen (From the Main screen
tap Settings to go to the settings screen.). If there are problems with pinging the HCI server
or connecting to it, please check the FTP settings.
Home
Tapping the Home button returns the user to the Main screen (Main IT-508 Screen).
610
IT-508 Software
Overview > Settings
Settings
From the Main screen tap Settings to go to the settings screen.
FTP
The FTP tab of the Settings screen contains all information necessary to set up the transfer
of information from the WAP4 to the HCI server. That is, the
• IP address of the HCI Server
• Remote Directory name of the server
• User name of the account on the server
• Password of the account
T
AF
R
D
When you tap on a field to change the Remote Directory, User, or Password, a popup
keyboard appears to allow you to entry the letters required.

IT-508 Software
Overview > Settings 16
T
Database
AF
All inventory may be removed by tapping Clear Inventory and confirming the deletion.
R
D
612
IT-508 Software
Overview > About
About
The About screen shows versions of the executables and DLLs used in the IT508 application,
along with the Device Id of the WAP4.
T
AF
R
device.
D

IT-508 Software
Troubleshooting > Ethernet Connection 16
Troubleshooting
Ethernet Connection
To troubleshoot problems with the Ethernet connection:
• verify the physical connection between the WAP4 and HCI server
• verify the Ethernet Configuration
• verify that all settings are correct on the Settings > FTP tab screen (section From the Main
screen tap Settings to go to the settings screen.).
• verify that the HCI server is configured to allow the IT508 to login to it
RFID Test
T
Start
The reading of RFID tags may be checked by running the RFIDTest program. To start this
program, first close (File > Exit) the IT508 application. Then use File Explorer to navigate
AF
to the My Device/Program Files/DT508 directory. (Note: the DT508 application must be
installed.) Tap on RFIDTest.
R
D
614
IT-508 Software
Troubleshooting > RFID Test
Scan
Scan one or more tags at a time and see the results on the screen. Below is an example of
where five different tags were read at the same time. Note that the tag information may be
displayed in either its raw form or a decoded form.
T
AF
RFID Reader Information
Additional information about the RFID reader can be displayed by tapping on the Reader
Info button.
R
D
Additional Information
Additional information may be found in the Motorola Workabout Pro4 RFID Mobile
Computer Integrator Guide.

Chapter
T
17 Admin 508
AF
This chapter includes the following sections:
R
• User Profiles (page 618)
• Sessions (page 620)
D
• Server Installation (page 621)

• License information (page 623)
• Start/Stop Management (page 624)
• Start/Stop window (page 624)
• Debug (page 638)

Admin 508
Overview >
Overview
Open a user session unless this is already done, and click on the Administration Tool icon in
the launcher bar to open the Administration window.
Admin 508
T
Figure 17-1 Admin 508
If you log on with Observer privileges, the Administration window allows you to start/stop
AF
the server, manage user sessions, load a patch from a remote (client) computer. If you log on
with Senior Observer privileges, it also allows you to register users and manage user
passwords.
The Debug tab is only intended for Sercel customer support engineers and therefore not
described in this manual.
R
D

Admin 508
User Profiles > 17
User Profiles
A new user cannot log on to a crew’s server until he is registered on that server. Only a user
with Senior Observer role privileges is allowed to register a remote user.
To register a new user, do the following:
1. Click on the Profiles tab.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 17-2 Administration window
2. Right-click in the list of profiles and select New from the menu that pops up.
- In the “Name” and “Password”

fields, enter the login name and
password you wish to create for
the new user.
- Click OK. As a result, the new
user appears in the list of
authorized users.
618
Admin 508
User Profiles >
- Choose the desired Password Expiry Date option (either choose Never
or enter the desired expiry date). The Expiry Date takes effect at 12 a.m.
(server local time).
- From the Role button, choose the privileges you wish to grant to that user
(Guest, or Observer, or Senior Observer permissions).
Table 17-1
Role Permissions
• Opening any client window and:
- Viewing the crew’s parameter settings (changes are of no
Guest effect),
- Viewing results, generating reports;
T
• Website access.
All “Guest” role privileges plus the following:
• Changing the crew’s parameter settings.
Observer
AF
• Session administration.
• Changing the installation parameters.
All “Observer” role privileges plus the following:
Senior Observer
• User administration (registering new users).
- Click Apply.
R
3. Notify the user of the Login name and Password you have created.
Note: After a profile is created, you can change or delete it by right-clicking on it in the list
of profiles and using the menu that pops up.
D

Admin 508
Sessions > 17
Sessions
Open the Administration window and then click on the Sessions tab. This displays a session
manager view with a navigation panel showing all opened sessions.
Unless you are logged on to the crew’s server with Observer or Senior Observer role
privileges, you are not allowed to make any changes in the session manager window.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 17-4 Session manager
Clicking on any session causes detailed information to be displayed in the Action session
log.
Right-clicking on any session causes a contextual menu to pop up, prompting the necessary
commands for the management of sessions:
To close a session, right-click on it and select “Kill now”.
620
Admin 508
Server Installation >
Server Installation
Open the Administration window and click on the Install and Core tabs. This lets you view
the Server Id code (you have to supply the Server Id code to Sercel when you make a request
for a licence).
T
AF
R
D
Figure 17-5 Server installation window
Unless you are logged on to the crew’s server with Observer or Senior Observer role
privileges, you are not allowed to make any changes to the “Installation” parameters.
In the Import tab, the address of the acquisition system’s Host machine (in the Host field)
must be 172.27.128.1 for a 508XT acquisition server.

Admin 508
Server Installation > 17
T
AF
R
Figure 17-6 Import driver window
D
622
Admin 508
License information >
License information
Within the Install tab, you will find License information. By clicking on the ‘Check’ mark,
you will able to display this information.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 17-7 Install
Note A message will appear in the Terminal window of the server computer 24 hours
before your software license expires, but it is advisable to use the Administration
window to check the expiry date before that.
Note In case the license has expired, it is possible to use this interface to enter a new
license, after approximately 20 seconds.

Admin 508
Start/Stop Management > 17
Start/Stop Management
Open the Administration window and click on the Start/Stop tab. If you are logged on to the
crew’s server with Observer or Senior Observer privileges, you can stop and/or restart the
server, or reboot or shut down the computer, using the buttons available in this window.
T
AF
R
Figure 17-8 Start/Stop window
D
624
Chapter
T
18 Reference information
AF
This chapter contains advanced reference information on
miscellaneous technical aspects. It includes the following sections:
R
• Geophone strings (page 626)
D

Reference information
Geophone strings > Number of geophones per trace 18
Geophone strings
Number of geophones per trace

The goal of seismic acquisition is to capture a signal. Unfortunately, the signal is always
affected by undesirable signals known under the generic name of noise. So, the quality of an
acquisition mostly depends on the signal-to-noise ratio (S/N), also known as dynamic range
(DR), often expressed in dB: DR = 20 x log (S/N).
In seismic, the useful signal can be increased at the expense of a stronger source, up to a
certain level where it becomes corrupted by the sensors (distortion occurs when the coil of
the geophones starts going outside of the linear zone of the magnetic field).
The dynamic range of a string, in field conditions, is limited at its low side by the ground
noise of the area (other noises like thermal or Brownian noise are generally negligible).
T
The number of geophones per string (N) increases the dynamic range in dB by 10 x log(N),
whatever the arrangement (N = Np x Ns: Np sub-string in parallel of Ns geophones in series)
because in-phase signals add linearly while uncorrelated signals add quadratically. For
AF
instance, with 16 geophones per string, a gain of 12 dB can be expected.
With the 508XT, in most areas, the FDU noise figure is so low that the arrangement (series/
parallel) does not influence the result in terms of signal to noise ratio: for the serial
arrangement, the signal voltages captured by the geophones are multiplied by N and the noise
voltages (RMS value) are multiplied by √Ν, while for the parallel arrangement the signal
voltages are not amplified (x1) but the noise voltages are divided by √Ν. Therefore, the S/N
R
ratio benefit is the same in both cases.
Series / parallel arrangement

D
The arrangement does not impact the S/N ratio but it impacts:
1- the gain;
2- the impedance of the string (hence, the Common Mode Rejection Ratio, see
Common Mode Rejection Ratio on page 627).
The geophones in a string can be connected as follows:
- arrangement 1: all in parallel (Ns = 1, Np = N)
- arrangement 2: all in series (Ns = N, Np = 1)
- arrangement 3: Np sub-strings in parallel of Ns geophones in series (N = Np x
Ns).
Note Arrangements 1 and 2 are special cases of arrangement 3.
626
Geophone strings > Series / parallel arrangement
String gain
The sensitivity of a geophone is the output voltage to ground velocity ratio (Gg in V/m/s)
also called transconduction constant.
The gain of a string, Gs, is the string output voltage to geophone output voltage ratio. Gs
depends on the geophone arrangement.
The gain of a string is equal to Ns, Ns being the number of geophones in series in the string
or sub-string:
- arrangement 1 (all in parallel): Gs = 1
- arrangement 2 (all in series): Gs = N
- arrangement 3 (Np x Ns): Gs = Ns
String impedance
T
Depending on the series/parallel arrangement the string differential impedance can be lower
or higher than the impedance of a single geophone.
AF
The string impedance to geophone impedance ratio (Ir) is given by:
Ir = Ns / Np
- arrangement 1 (all in parallel): Ir = 1/N
- arrangement 2 (all in series): Ir = N
R
- arrangement 3 (Np x Ns): Ir = Ns / Np
For a given number of geophones per string, the impedance ratio between arrangement 2 (all
in series) and arrangement 1 (all in parallel) is N2 (e.g. 256 for 16 geophones).
D
This is important for the Common Mode Rejection Ratio (CMRR) of the string.
Common Mode Rejection Ratio

A geophone string acts as a receiver (antenna) for electro-magnetic fields produced by
atmospheric or industrial activities. When the two conductors of the string exhibit equal
impedance with respect to ground (balanced string), the electro-magnetic field is turned into
the same voltage (with respect to ground) across the two string terminals (same amplitude,
same phase). The differential input nature of the recording instrument rejects this common
mode voltage.
If, for leakage reasons or by construction (see String wiring on page 630), the
impedance-to-ground of one conductor is different from the impedance-to-ground of the
other conductor, a current flows through the differential string impedance causing a
differential voltage to appear across the string terminals (spikes, Hi-line pick-up, etc.). This
is known as the common-mode to differential-mode voltage conversion. The amplitude of

Geophone strings > Series / parallel arrangement 18
the picked-up signals is nearly proportional to the differential impedance of the string i.e.
proportional to Ir (Ns/Np).
With N geophones, in an Np x Ns string configuration, the signal increases proportionally to
Ns, the parasitic signals proportionally to Ns/Np. Therefore, the signal to picked-up signal
ratio increases by Np.
The more branches in parallel, the better. A series-type geophone string is much more likely
to capture parasitic signals than aparallel-type (in a given imbalance configuration).
Also, low-impedance geophones should be preferred. Especially, the coil resistance should
be low, as it is the dominant factor at high frequencies.
Best string arrangement

We have seen that the string arrangement does not affect the dynamic range if we consider
the ‘normal’ noise generated in differential mode (ground noise, thermal noise of the
T
geophones). Only the number of geophones matters.
A parallel-type arrangement gives more pick-up noise immunity and therefore seems
optimum.
AF
However, when the string is connected to a recording system, one must think in terms of
system (sensors + recording instrument) dynamic range, as two new factors intervene: the
recording instrument noise and the recording instrument maximum input voltage
(themselves a function of the preamplifier gain).
The sensitivity of the receiver configuration (which is the geophone sensitivity times the
string sensitivity: Gg x Gs) must be selected in such a way that the string dynamic range best
R
fits the instrument dynamic range. A too high sensitivity will make the system clip large
signals (overscaling). A too low sensitivity will make the instrument noise limit the signal-
to-noise ratio. Both cases degrade the system dynamic range.
D
First, what is the best preamplifier gain?

The 508XT offers two selectable preamplifier gains (G1 and G2) which scale the instrument
dynamic range as follows:
Table 18-1
Max. signal Dynamic range

Gain Noise (typical 2 ms, nVrms)
(mVrms) (dB, typ.)
G1 450 1600 131

G2 145 400 129
628
Geophone strings > Series / parallel arrangement
The 508XT has an unprecedented dynamic range at both gains with a little advantage for G1.
However, G2 will be the reference for configuring the geophone arrangement since it
requires a lower receiver sensitivity (remember: higher sensitivity means serial-type string
arrangement, hence more pick-up). This G2 gain should be used in the lowest field noise
conditions. G1 should be selected in noisy field conditions without loss in dynamic range
provided that the source energy is increased accordingly.
Let us go back to the best geophone arrangement in a string or more generally in a receiver
group.
The optimum receiver group sensitivity is the one that is “just high enough” to make the
lowest ground noise of the area higher than the instrument noise for the selected preamplifier
gain.
The input noise density of the 508XT is about 10 nV/ √Hz in G2 gain. The earth back-ground
noise is about 0.1 nm/s/√Hz at 20 Hz (New Low Noise Model, Peterson 1993). Then, the
T
receiver group sensitivity should be in the order of at least 100 V/m/s. With a common
geophone sensitivity (Gg) of 30 V/m/s, a string gain (Gs) of 4 seems adequate. However, this
must be corrected by the fact that ideal back-ground noise conditions are very seldom met in
AF
the field.
A realistic suggestion would be a string gain of 2 or 3 (Np sub-strings in parallel of 2 or 3
geophone in series), which leads to strings built according to the following table:
Table 18-2 Suggested string configurations
N Np Ns Gs Irs DRBs (dB)

R
6 3 2 2 0.66 7.8
6 2 3 3 1.5 7.8
D
9 3 3 3 1 9.5
8 4 2 2 0.5 9
N: number of geophones in the string

Np: number of branches in parallel
Ns: number of geophones in series in each branch
Gs: gain of the arrangement
Irs: impedance ratio (string to geophone impedance ratio)
DRBs: dynamic range benefit.
Note High sensitivity geophones are favorable as they minimize the required number
of geophones in series for a given receiver group sensitivity.

Geophone strings > String wiring 18
Group of strings
Of course, for better resolution, further dynamic range improvement can be obtained through
combining several strings of Table 18-2 in series/parallel configuration (group of
strings). Once again, parallel-type string combinations should be preferred as long as the
instrument noise is not the limiting factor.
The following (non exhaustive) table gives the corrections to be made to the figures of
Table 18-2 when several strings are used:
Table 18-3 Corrections for group of strings
NS NSp NSs Gg Irg DRBg (dB)
2 2 1 1 0.5 3
2 1 2 2 2 3
T
3 3 1 1 0.66 4.8
3 1 AF 3 3 3 4.8
4 2 2 2 1 6
NS: number of strings per group

NSp: number of strings in parallel
NSs: number of strings in series
R
Gg: gain of the group of strings
Irg: impedance ratio of the group (group-to-string impedance ratio)
DRBg: dynamic range benefit of the group of strings
D
To obtain the global figures of the receiver group, apply the following formulas:
Total number of geophones of the group: N x NS
Group gain: Gs x Gg
Group to geophone impedance ratio: Irs x Irg
Group to geophone dynamic range benefit(dB): DRBs +
DRBg
String wiring
We have seen (Common Mode Rejection Ratio on page 627) that a
parallel-type string arrangement minimizes common mode to differential mode conversion
for a given imbalance configuration i.e. reduces parasitic signals (atmospheric and industrial
noise) in the records.
630
Geophone strings > String wiring
Another factor of major importance to minimize the common mode to differential mode
conversion is the impedance-to-ground matching of the two terminals of the string (or the
group of strings).
A string is balanced when the impedance seen between one terminal and the local ground
equals the impedance seen from the other terminal.
The impedance-to-ground is made of resistance and capacitance.
The resistive part of this impedance is due to leakage arising mostly from water intrusion in
the connectors, the geophones or wounded string cables. This must be carefully checked and
fixed.
Besides resistive leakage, this impedance-to-ground is mainly made of the capacitance-to-
ground of each piece of wire in the string, connected to each other through geophone
impedance.
The capacitance of each piece of wire is proportional to its length. Therefore, the wiring of
T
the string must be symmetrical, i.e. the length of the pieces of wire seen from one terminal,
including those seen through the geophones, must be identical to the length of the wires seen
from the other terminal.
AF
If we consider that all the strings are built with several serial-type sub-strings in parallel, all
of these sub-strings, including the last one (at the end of the string) must comply with the
rule of symmetry. If this condition is met at the sub-string level, the strings and the groups of
strings will be balanced.
Must be
R
Symmetrical substring connected
T1
D
T2
Substring 1 Last substring
Figure 18-1 Example of symmetrical string wiring

Geophone strings > String wiring 18
L1
L5
L3
L4
L6
L2
(L1 = L2, L3 = L4, L5 = L6)

Figure 18-2 Symmetrical sub-string
T
Note that with geophone cables having only 2 wires, often used in all-in-series strings, it is
difficult to respect the balance condition. The imbalance can be minimized through
dispatching the geophones in the 2 wires in turn:
AF
Figure 18-3 Minimizing imbalance effect of 2-wire cables
R
D
632
Geophone strings > Conclusion
Conclusion
For better seismic acquisition quality, the following tips should be borne in mind:
1. A high number of geophones per trace improves the signal-to-noise ratio (spatial
filtering is not taken into account in this paper).
2. The G2 preamplifier gain is optimum with a 508XT recording system, in low-noise
areas (G1 in noisy environments).
3. Parallel-type arrangement of geophones or strings should be preferred to serial-type
arrangement as long as the instrument noise is not the limiting factor for the dynamic
range (lower impedance, less pick-up). Run field noise test and instrument noise
tests at both gains in order to select the gain that brings the average field noise just
above the instrument noise.
4. Strings made up of geophones with low coil resistance and high sensitivity are less
T
sensitive to pick-up noise. The right quality factor for a geophone is the normalized
transconduction constant expressed in V/m/s/√Rc (or V/in/s/√Rc, Rc: coil
resistance). AF
5. A symmetrical string wiring is a condition for a good common-mode rejection ratio
(atmospheric or industrial disturbances). Two-wire string cables should be avoided
(except for all-in-parallel arrangements).
R
D

Chapter
T
19 Case Study: Autonomous
AF
Functionality in 508XT
R
In this chapter,
• Autonomous Functionality in 508XT (page 635)

D
• Working with LRC-508 (page 649)

Case Study: Autonomous Functionality in 508XT
Autonomous Functionality in 508XT >
Autonomous Functionality in 508XT

A new functionality in 508XT V2.0 is the addition of the single channel autonomous node
which extends the cross-technology architecture to include autonomous node acquisition on
a single platform.
This chapter describes a typical case study for using field units in autonomous mode in
508XT.
The image below illustrates a typical autonomous layout example.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 19-1 Autonomous Layout example

Autonomous Functionality in 508XT > Use Case: Typical Autonomous Layout 19
Use Case: Typical Autonomous Layout
Step 1: Identify Autonomous units

The first step when creating an autonomous layout is to identify the units in the
autonomous line.
In the example below, an autonomous line (130) has been deployed.
Assignment information is collected using the DT-508. The list includes the CX-508 and
FDU-508 field units to assign to the topographic location of the Autonomous line.
The DT-508 uses RFID scan to identify (serial number) the first CX-508 (CX-775) in the
autonomous line.
All other field units connected to this line will be identified. Other field units do not need to
be scanned. Any CX-508 on the autonomous line can be used to recover assignment data.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 19-2 Identify Autonomous Units
636
Autonomous Functionality in 508XT > Use Case: Typical Autonomous Layout
IMPORTANT
When assigning a CX-508 you must assign the first FDU-508 on the High or Low Port side
of the CX-508.
Step 2. Upload Field Unit identity to 508-CU

Once autonomous field units have been identified using the DT-508, the information must be
transmitted to the 508-CU (central unit).
Two methods for uploading this information are possible:
• Connect a DT-508 to a CX-508 in the connected area (Ethernet to XDP cable)
• Or Connect the DT-508 directly to the 508-CU on IP address 172.27.128.X (via Ethernet
cable)
The following information is sent from the DT-508 to the 508-CU:
T
• List of field units to assign to the Topo location
• Append/Replace information with the current setup on the Layout Assignment on the
AF
508-CU.
The transfer of data is done automatically using the FTP protocol between the 2 devices.
R
D
Figure 19-3 Upload Assignment Information

Step 3. Line Configuration

The Line Configuration indicates the unique set of Parameters that will be loaded into all
of the CX-508 of the prospect.
The Line Configuration includes:
• Crew setup
• Planning setup
• Test type setup
• Line parameters
• Radio Parameters (for LRC-508)
Field units must always have the latest line setup information.
For a Connected Spread, the line setup is sent from the 508-CU to the spread via the
network.
T
For Autonomous units, this information is retrieved by connecting the FT-508 to a CX-508
on the connected spread or directly on the 508-CU.
AF
R
D
Figure 19-4 Retrieve Line Configuration using FT-508
638
A unique identifier, or Version Release, is created when the line setup is generated. This
identifier, visible in the Line Configuration column (see Crew Setup Panel (page 90),
indicates the date and time of the latest line configuration parameters registered by the
system.
If there is a difference between the setup registered in the FT-508 and the Line Configuration
of the 508-CU, an error will be generated. In this case the FT-508 must recover the latest Line
Configuration Version from the 508-CU.
The FT-508 alerts you when new line configuration information has been downloaded.
Note The Tilt Model is downloaded at the same time as the line setup information.
T
AF
R
D

Step 4. FT-508 Transferring Autonomous Line Configuration to CX-508

After you have recovered the latest Line Configuration from the 508-CU the information
must be transferred to all of the CX-508 on the Autonomous line.
In order to Transfer the Line Configuration, connect the FT-508 to an autonomous CX-508.
The line configuration appears on the screen of the FT-508.
In addition to transferring the Line Configuration, the FT-508 will perform all Instrument
and Field Tests (if test rest results have been requested). Test results and Test data are
collected by the FT-508.
The troubleshooter displays tables with test results, in case any anomaly is detected on the
line (test result failures, bad resistance, tilt, etc.)
Finally, the FT-508 takes a Snapshot of the Autonomous line. The snapshot includes all
necessary information to represent this line in the 508XT Topo view.
T
AF
R
D
640
WARNING
In order to retrieve SoH data (via LRC-508). A snapshot of each autonomous line must be
transferred to the FT-508.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 19-5 Snapshot example

Step 5: FT-508
As soon as the FT-508 is connected to the 508-CU, the FT-508 uploads its snapshots.
If tests have been conducted by the FT-508, test results are visible in the Numerical views
of the 508 interface. These field units are distinguishable by their status “Autonomous”.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 19-6 FT-508 Upload
642
Step 6: Production
As soon as the seismic source is ready, FDU-508 are in Acquisition mode. Therefore,
production can be launched.-- even if the spread involves autonomous traces. The Production
only warns the user of the state of field units.
All experiences which involve Autonomous traces are Incomplete. The completion views,
and VP view, allow you to have an overview of all experiences.
Incomplete experiences are flushed automatically to QC Analyzer. QC Analyzer allows you
to show errors from received channels.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 19-7 Field units in Acquisition

Step 7: Test Hours

Production is automatically stopped during Test Hours. Before a test begins a short period
elapses, allowing the system to stop connected source and change the FDU-508 from
Acquisition to Test mode.
Test Hours are planned in the Planning Setup. The choice of tests are defined in Test Setup.
The same tests are conducted for connected and autonomous units.
Test Results and Test data are stored on Autonomous CX-508.
For Connected traces, the Data and Test results are retrieved and Test Experiences are
Incomplete (Test Completion and Multi Test view allow you to verify).
When planned tests are completed, the system will automatically Return to Acquisition
Mode. For vibroseis acquisition mode, the production is automatically launched.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 19-8 Test in Progress
644
Step 8: DH-508
The DH-508 connects directly on the line to recover TB-list and the list of incomplete
experiences for CX-508s.
The TB-list includes production data as well as Test data performed during test hours (Test
data and Test results).
The TB-list can be downloaded on the DH-508 during production.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 19-9 Download from 508-CU to DH-508

Step 9: Harvesting CX-508

The DH-508 must be connected to CX-508 where Seismic and Test data are stored. The DH-
508 requests the necessary data according to the TB list.
The DH-508 retrieves all seismic data and test data as well as test results if test hours have
been performed.
The DH-508 must be connected to a CX-508 in order to harvest data. An option is available
in the 508XT Setup parameters (in 508 software version 2.0.4 or greater). You must indicate
whether to harvest from a single CX-508. Or select to harvest the full autonomous segment.
See Harvester (page 120)
T
AF
R
D
Figure 19-10 DH-508 recovers data from each CX-508
646
Step 10: Upload data from DH-508 to 508-CU

To upload data to the 508-CU, the DH-508 can be connected to one CX-508 on the
Transverse, or on a CX-508 line, or directly to the 508-CU.
Note Data speed will be faster if you connect directly to the Transverse.
The DH-508 automatically uploads all data and the 508-CU can complete the pending
experiences (production, and Test).
The uploading sequence can be done during production.
At the end of the uploading sequence, the DH-508 receives the order from the 508 CU to
clear its memory.
Experiences are completed and flushed to the NAS. Test results are uploaded to the numeric
views.
If a New TB List is available on the 508-CU, it is transferred to the DH-508 at the end of the
T
uploading sequence.
Generated SEG-D are not sent again to the QC Analyzer. If you would like to check data, the
playback is available from the NAS.
AF
R
D
Figure 19-11 Upload data from DH-508 to 508-CU

Step 11: DH-508 ready for a new job

The DH-508 contains a new list of TBs to recover. It can return to the autonomous line to
harvest new data.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 19-12 DH-508 recovers data from autonomous CX-508
648
Working with LRC-508 > SoH Description
Working with LRC-508

The LRC-508 (Long Range Communication) is a low data rate radio integrated in the 508XT
acquisition system. The LRC-508 ensures the transfer of State of Health (SoH) information
between concentrators, up to the central unit.
The LRC-508 is primarily used in situations where communication is required between
autonomous concentrators and the 508 central unit (Use case 2). However, the LRC-508 can
also be used to ensure communication between connected concentrators in case of a cable
cut disruption (Use case 1).
In this section:
• SoH Description (page 649)
• Use Case 1: Deploying LRC-508 on Connected Network (page 650)
T
• Use Case 2. Deploying LRC-508 on Autonomous network (page 655)
SoH Description
AF
The LRC-508 is based on ‘Pathfinder’ technology used in the WTU-508. As with the WTU-
508, the LRC-508 transmits SoH (State of Health) data which includes:
• Topology information
• Battery level
• Sensor status
R
• Memory status
• GPS Status
• Ambient noise
D
For complete details on the SoH please refer to: Table 3-2 (page 119)

Working with LRC-508 > Use Case 1: Deploying LRC-508 on Connected Network 19
Use Case 1: Deploying LRC-508 on Connected Network
Case 1. LRC present on a connected network

On a connected network, configuration of LRC-508 is done via 508-HCI. Generation of
snapshots is done automatically.
If an LRC-508 is connected to a CX-508 concentrator it will automatically be detected by the
system. However, ensure that you have entered your setup parameters for the LRC-508 as
indicated in the Instrument setup section. See, LRC (page 116).
Note: On a connected network, QC data is transmitted via the connected line not via the
LRC-508.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 19-13 LRC-508 on connected network Illustration
650
Working with LRC-508 > Use Case 1: Deploying LRC-508 on Connected Network
In the layout below, QC data is transmitted via the connected line.
LRC
LRC
T
AF
Figure 19-14 Connected line on 508-HCI
On a connected line, QC data is available. SoH information is not available.
QC data for SoH for

connected CX-508 connected CX-508
R
D
Figure 19-15 Table view on connected line

In case of a line cut

In case of a line cut on a connected line. CX-508 units will go into Autonomous state
(black). However, if an LRC-508 is present, SoH data is transmitted from the LRC-508
to the SCI (violet). See Figure 19-16.
For concentrators in an autonomous zone that do not possess an LRC-508, SoH data is Not
transmitted to the central unit.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 19-16 LRC-508 in case of Line cut Illustration
652
Working with LRC-508 > Use Case 1: Deploying LRC-508 on Connected Network
In the snapshot below, field units are in violet color to indicate that they are autonomous and
that SoH data is being transmitted to the 508-CU.
T
AF
Figure 19-17 508-HCI view
R
D

The Table in the 508-HCI view displays SoH data for autonomous CX-508 units connected
to an LRC-508.
QC data is only available for connected units.
QC data only for SoH data only for autonomous

connected CX-508 CX-508 with LRC-508
T
AF
Figure 19-18 Table view SoH via LRC-508
R
D
654
Working with LRC-508 > Use Case 2. Deploying LRC-508 on Autonomous network
Use Case 2. Deploying LRC-508 on Autonomous network

In this scenario, the LRC-508 transmits data on a fully autonomous network. SoH data is
transmitted from one LRC-508 to the next LRC-508 using Pathfinder technology.
T
AF
R
Figure 19-19 LRC-508 transmission via Pathfinder
D

Working with LRC-508 > Use Case 2. Deploying LRC-508 on Autonomous network 19
LRC
LRC
T
Figure 19-20 Autonomous with SoH in 508 HCI
AF
QC data only for SoH data only for autonomous
connected CX-508 CX-508 with LRC-508
R
D
Figure 19-21 508-HCI Table
656
Working with LRC-508 > Use Case 2. Deploying LRC-508 on Autonomous network
In case of a line cut

In case of a line cut on an autonomous line. Concentrators whose connection is separated
from the LRC-508 will not transmit SoH data.
Autonomous Concentrators with SoH Autonomous Concentrators with

No SoH
Line cut
T
Figure 19-22 Autonomous with SoH and without
The HCI table will indicate that the autonomous SoH data is in error.
AF
R
D
Figure 19-23 HCI table

Chapter
T
20 Case Study: Use of 508XT
AF
Transition Zone
R
In this chapter,
• Transition Zone Operation with 508XT (page 659)

D
• Case Study: Line Cut Simulation (page 678)

Case Study: Use of 508XT Transition Zone
Transition Zone Operation with 508XT >
Transition Zone Operation with 508XT

508XT Transition Zone equipment allow you to use the 508XT in zones up to 25 metres
depth. TZ-508XT equipment also allows you to connect Dual Sensors to TZ Link FDU-508.
Dual sensors (not provided by Sercel) allow you to assign a Geophone and a Hydrophone to
a single receiver point. For details concerning TZ installation see the 508XT Installation
Manual, Chapter 14.
This chapter describes a typical case study for using field units in transition zones using Dual
Sensors and an Airgun source type. Please note that transition zone equipment can also be
used with Mono Sensors and with other seismic source types (vib, explosive).
The image below illustrates a typical 508XT-TZ layout example with field units on land and
under water, GPS synchronisation is received from the LRC-508.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 20-1 TZ-508 Layout example 1

Transition Zone Operation with 508XT > 20
In the example below, GPS synchronisation for Transition Zone field units is received from
the CX-508 connected to the transverse on land.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 20-2 TZ-508 Layout example 2
660
Transition Zone Operation with 508XT > 508TZ Operation
508TZ Operation
Step 1: Setup Parameters

In order to use transition zone equipment, several parameters must be defined in the 508 HCI
Setup Parameters.
• Sensor Type: In addition to traditional Geophones, Hydrophones must be defined when
working in transition zones.
T
AF Figure 20-3 Sensor Type setup
• Point Code Setup: The point code describes all the sensor types co-localized on the same
Receiver Point. Typically in case of dual-sensor, the Point Code must include 2 Sensor
Types: one for the Geophone and another one for the Hydrophone.
In the example below, for Point Code 1. The Sensor type includes S1 & S2. Where S1 is
R
the Geophone and S2 is a Hydrophone. P2 corresponds to Sensor Type 3, for example a
Marshphone.
Note Point Codes may also be imported from the SPS R files.
D
Figure 20-4 Point Code Setup

Transition Zone Operation with 508XT > 508TZ Operation 20
• Process Type: Airgun

For this use case, the ‘Airgun’ process type is used when working with Transition Zone
equipment.
Note Only one Airgun Process type can be defined.
T
AF
Figure 20-5 Airgun setup
• Source Point: In transition zone operations, when the Source datagram is received from
the navigation system, it contains the corresponding Source Points (and their
R
coordinates). The 508 system recovers this information, and verifies that it corresponds
to a Source Point in its own ‘Source setup’. This allows the 508 system to determine
which spread corresponds to the source and thus send a Retrieve command for the
corresponding traces. Source setup is updated when SPS files are loaded.
D
662
• Seismic Modes: Airgun Seismic Mode must be defined for transition zone configuration.
T
AF
R
D

Dashboard
The examples below illustrate the dashboard of a 508XT-TZ layout.
T
Figure 20-6 Example of dual sensors on single receiver point
AF
R
D
664
Step 2: TZ Equipment Layout

508XT TZ may imply the use of Dual Sensors (not supplied by Sercel) -- Hydrophones +
Geophones, at the same receiver point. The following pictures provide information for a 508-
TZ dual sensor deployment. For specific instructions please see the 508XT Installation
Manual Chapter 14.
T
AF
R
Figure 20-7 Dual Sensors deployment example

D

Step 3: TZ Equipment Test

All standard tests are authorized on transition zone equipment.
Step 4: Source datagram from Navigation System

In order for the 508XT system to retrieve messages from the Navigation system, a special
UDP message structure is required.
For details on the message structure please see the 508XT Data Format Manual, Chapter 3.
The example below outlines a UDP message structure.
Example
For the message:
T
We have the following data:
Header
Record
Identific
-ation
Line
Name
Point
Number
AF
None
Point
Index
Point
code
Static Point
Correction Depth
Seismic
Datum
Uphole
time
Water
Depth
1-5 6-6 7-16 17-26 27-28 29-29 30-31 32-35 36-39 40-43 44-45 46-51
$SPS_ S 1234567 1791.00 1 A1 10.0 1005.3

R
890
Map Grid Map Grid Surface Day of Time Decimal Shot time in
Separator User Header
D
Easting Northing Elevation Year hhmmss Point microseconds
52-60 61-70 71-76 77-79 80-85 86-86 87-92 93-93 94-593
193171.2 3094006.5 0.0 134 101510 649994 # This will be added

to the user header
Figure 20-8 UDP Message structure
666
In case of communication interruption

Source datagram are sent from the Source vessel to the Recorder vessel so long as there is
communication between these vessels.
IMPORTANT
In case of a communication interruption, where Source datagram are not received by the
508 Recorder Vessel, shot information messages are stored in a text file with the ‘.sps’
extension. These files must be imported to the 508 system manually.
The figure below illustrates an example of a text file with the .sps extension.
T
AF Figure 20-9 Status file example
Importing datagrams to 508XT

Two options are available for importing these files.
Files with .sps extension must be copied to one of the following directories.
1. Client-508 - A shortcut folder is available on the Client-508 desktop.
R
D
2. FTP-508 - Files can be copied to the 508 FTP:

Host: 172.27.128.1
User: airgun
Password: airgun
IMPORTANT
508 software monitors the Airgun folder at regular (1 minute) intervals to check if a .sps file
is available. If a file is present in this folder it will create a VP in 508. The VP will be visible
in the 508 VP table.

Importing to Airgun folder via Client-508

1. Click on the Airgun folder on your desktop.
The following dialog may appear, if it is not displayed go to step 3.
• Enter “user508” as the user name and password.
T
•
AF
Select the Classic encryption type and click Finish.
R
D
668
• Create a Password for the kwallet
T
2. Copy your .sps file to the airgun directory.
AF
R
D

3. The 508 system checks the Airgun folder periodically (every 1 minute). If the 508
detects files in this folder they will be imported to the 508 system.
Imported .sps files can be seen in the Dashboard VP view.
T
AF
4. Once the files have been imported to the 508 system, they will disappear from the
Airgun folder.
R
D
670
Importing to Airgun folder via FTP Client

1. On your PC, open an FTP Client (e.g. FileZilla) connected to the Server 508 using
the following connection parameters.
URL: 172.27.128.1
login: airgun
password: airgun)
2. Drag and drop the header file from the Navigation folder on your PC towards the
Airgun folder on the server.
T
AF
R
D
3. The 508 system will recover this file and import it to the list of VPs.

Step 5: SEGD Format

SEGD files are structured by channel Set. Hydrophones will provide an additional channel
set in you SEGD files. These usually appear at the end of the SEGD file.
T
AF
R
D
672
508TZ Line Cut Simulation > 508TZ Operation
508TZ Line Cut Simulation

This section outlines what can occur during a line cut, and how the 508XT synchronization
redundancy allows you to continue operations after an interruption.
Normal Operation
During normal operation, GPS synchronization is received from the External LRC-508 as
well as neighbouring CX-508 field units.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 20-10 508XT during normal operation

508TZ Line Cut Simulation > 508TZ Operation 20
Line cut simulation

In case of a line cut on a TZ line, the 508XT system provides Synchronization Redundancy
for autonomous units via the LRC-508 connected on each end of the line.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 20-11 Line Cut example
674
508TZ Line Cut Simulation > 508TZ Operation
In the example below, the LRC-508 on the autonomous section will maintain GPS
synchronisation, allowing you to continue your operations without losing acquisition data.
T
AF
R
D
Figure 20-12 Synchronization Redundancy

Index
> 21
21
Alias filter
· Frequency at - 3dB point (SEGD)
Index DFM: 119
· Slope (SEGD) DFM: 120
Angle from skew (SPS) DFM: 10,
DFM: 20, DFM: 50, DFM: 61
508XT manuals Archive
IM = Installation Manual · PFT lists FM2: 288
Array
FM1 = Functional Manual Vol. 1 · Forming (SEGD) DFM: 121
Arrays, sub, number of DFM: 25,
FM2 = Functional Manual Vol. 2
DFM: 66
T
DFM = Data Format Manual Assembly
AF · Location (SEGD) DFM: 142
A · Serial number (SEGD) DFM: 142
· Type (SEGD) DFM: 142
Abbreviations FM2: 334
Assign Markers
Absolute · from PFT list FM2: 287
· Spread, tests FM1: 87
Assigning boxes to stakes FM2: 178
Acquisition
Auto
R
· Error description (SEGD)
· Export FM2: 216
DFM: 128
· Length (SEGD) DFM: 122
Auto-assignment FM2: 178
Auto-check
D
· Number (SEGD) DFM: 127

· parameters FM2: 76 · GPS and SPS FM2: 183
Acquisition type tables (SEGD) · GPS, no SPS FM2: 186
· WTU assignment to RP
DFM: 127
FM2: 183
Additional
Autocorrelation peak time (SEGD)
· blocks (SEGD general header)
DFM: 113 DFM: 127
AGC FM1: 433 Automation
· Continuous, shooting FM1: 181
Aided assignment FM2: 116
· Discontinuous, shooting
Air FM1: 181
· gun (SPS) DFM: 14, DFM: 54 · Manual, shooting FM1: 181
· pressure psi (SPS) DFM: 25,
Auto-processing FM2: 60
DFM: 66
676
Index
>
Aux · error (SEGD) DFM: 140

· Channel contents (SPS) · high limit (SEGD) DFM: 140
DFM: 11, DFM: 22, · low limit (SEGD) DFM: 140
DFM: 51, DFM: 63 · value (SEGD) DFM: 140
· Traces, number of DFM: 122 Channel
Auxiliary · data error overscaling (SEGD)
· channels, deploying IM: 300 DFM: 146
· edited status (SEGD) DFM: 146
· filter (SEGD) DFM: 145
B · gain control method (SEGD)
Base scan interval (SEGD) DFM: 119
DFM: 114 · gain scale (SEGD) DFM: 145
T
Beginner FM2: 13 · increment (SPS) DFM: 16,
BIT DFM: 29, DFM: 57,
· generate VPs FM2: 50 DFM: 70
Blaster
· id (SEGD) DFM: 124
AF · number (SEGD) DFM: 142
· process (SEGD) DFM: 147
· status (SEGD) DFM: 125 · sample to mV conversion factor
Blocking (SEGD) DFM: 146
· trace FM2: 212 · Set End Time (SEGD) DFM: 118
R
Blocks in General Trailer · Set Number (SEGD) DFM: 133
DFM: 116 · set number (SEGD) DFM: 118
· Set Starting Time (SEGD)
Browser
D
DFM: 118
· settings FM1: 6
· set, number of channels in
Button FM2: 3 DFM: 118
Bypass · sets per record DFM: 114
· file exports FM2: 225 · type (SEGD) DFM: 143
Bytes per scan (SEGD) DFM: 114 · type id (SEGD) DFM: 147
· Type Identification (SEGD)
C DFM: 119
Channels, number of (SPS)
Cable
· length, Line IM: 299
DFM: 11, DFM: 21, DFM: 51,
· Line cable length IM: 299 DFM: 62
Calendar FM2: 84 Charge
Capacitance · Depth DFM: 24, DFM: 66

Index
> 21
· Length DFM: 24, DFM: 66 DFM: 145

Circular bearing of H256 (SPS) · unit type (SEGD) DFM: 145
DFM: 10, DFM: 20, DFM: 50, Conversion
DFM: 60 · sample to mV DFM: 146
Cleaning Coord. status final/prov (SPS)
· boxes IM: 290 DFM: 14, DFM: 25, DFM: 54,
· plugs IM: 290 DFM: 66
Click FM2: 3 Coordinate location (SPS) DFM: 9,
Client DFM: 18, DFM: 49, DFM: 59
· main window FM2: 13 Copy
· SPS DFM: 9, DFM: 18, · and Paste FM2: 6
DFM: 49, DFM: 58 · function (Export window)
T
Clock FM2: 223
· time w.r.t. GMT (SPS) DFM: 9,
AF Core FM1: 618
DFM: 18, DFM: 49, Correlator, noise supp (SPS)
DFM: 59 DFM: 13, DFM: 24, DFM: 53,
CMRR DFM: 65
· geophone string FM1: 624 Corrosion IM: 305
Colour code FM2: 106 Crew
Comment
R
· name, Comment (SPS) DFM: 11,
· VP table FM2: 43 DFM: 21, DFM: 51,
Comments DFM: 62
· SEGD DFM: 131 Cut off
D
Common mode · error (SEGD) DFM: 140

· rejection ratio, geophones · high limits (SEGD) DFM: 140
FM1: 624 · low limit (SEGD) DFM: 140
Connection · value (SEGD) DFM: 140
· opening a session FM1: 3 CX-508 Concentrator IM: 9
Continuous
· shooting FM1: 181
Continuous monitoring FM2: 27
D
Control Damp coeff, natural freq. (SPS)
· type (SPS) DFM: 13, DFM: 24, DFM: 12, DFM: 52
DFM: 53, DFM: 65 Damping coeff, natural freq (SPS)
· unit serial number (SEGD) DFM: 23, DFM: 64
678
Index
>
Data · Channels (tests) FM1: 87

· Bypass FM2: 225 · of grid units (SPS) DFM: 9,
· record sorting order (SPS) DFM: 19, DFM: 49,
DFM: 7, DFM: 46 DFM: 60
Data Harvester · of survey area (SPS) DFM: 9,
· connecting FM2: 296 DFM: 17, DFM: 49,
· disconnecting FM2: 297 DFM: 58
· harvesting FM2: 298 Desktop FM1: 7
· software, installing IM: 344 Destination Devices FM2: 220
· uploading data FM2: 300 Diagnostic codes FM2: 133
· user guide FM2: 292 Dialog box FM2: 3
Date Digital
T
· of survey (SPS) DFM: 9, · Sensor Unit, deploying IM: 295,
DFM: 18, DFM: 49, IM: 484
DFM: 58
· SEGD DFM: 128
Day
AF Discontinuous
· shooting FM1: 181
Double-click FM2: 3
· of year (SPS) DFM: 15, DSU
DFM: 27, DFM: 55, · Deploying IM: 295, IM: 484
DFM: 68 DSU1-508 IM: 8
R
DCM Dump FM2: 61
· Launch FM2: 13 Dump stacking fold (SEGD)
· Patcher FM2: 11
DFM: 127
D
· Server
Start/Stop FM2: 10
Duplicate
· stakes FM2: 118
Dead seis traces, number of
DFM: 122
Deploying E
· field equipment IM: 288, Ethernet
IM: 481 · port, identifying IM: 30
Depth Event
· charge DFM: 24, DFM: 66 · definition text file FM2: 245
· towing DFM: 25, DFM: 66 Expanded file number (SEGD)
Descale Multiplier (SEGD) DFM: 116, DFM: 117
DFM: 118 Explosive (SPS) DFM: 14,
Description

Index
> 21
DFM: 54 · unit type (SEGD) DFM: 143

Exponent, subscans DFM: 119 FDU-508 IM: 7
Export · functions IM: 7
· Auto/Manual FM2: 216 Fibre Optics
· client window FM2: 204 · TFOI, connecting IM: 298,
· markers FM2: 48 IM: 489
Export window FM2: 204 Field
Extended · computer system(s) (SPS)
· channel set number (SEGD) DFM: 9, DFM: 18,
DFM: 121, DFM: 133 DFM: 49, DFM: 59
· Channel Sets/Scan Types (SEGD) · record increment (SPS) DFM: 16,
DFM: 116 DFM: 29, DFM: 56,
T
· file number (SEGD) DFM: 133 DFM: 70
· header (SEGD) DFM: 122 · record number (SPS) DFM: 16,
· header blocks (SEGD) DFM: 116 DFM: 29, DFM: 56,
AF
· header flag (SEGD) DFM: 121
· header length (SEGD) DFM: 114
DFM: 70
· tape number (SPS) DFM: 16,
· receiver line number (SEGD) DFM: 29, DFM: 56,
DFM: 135 DFM: 70
· receiver point number (SEGD) File
R
DFM: 136 · count (SEGD) DFM: 128
· Record Length (SEGD) · Header block (SEGD) DFM: 113
DFM: 116 · number (SEGD) DFM: 113,
D
Extender DFM: 133

· TFOI, connecting IM: 298, Files
IM: 489 · per tape FM2: 211
External · per tape (SEGD) DFM: 128
· header (SEGD) DFM: 131 Filter
· header blocks (SEGD) DFM: 116 · alias Hz, dB pnt, slope (SPS)
· header length (SEGD) DFM: 115 DFM: 11, DFM: 21,
DFM: 51, DFM: 62
· low Hz, dB pnt, slope (SPS)
F DFM: 11, DFM: 21,
Factor to metre (SPS) DFM: 9, DFM: 51, DFM: 62
DFM: 19, DFM: 49, DFM: 60 · notch Hz, -3 dB points (SPS)
FDU DFM: 11, DFM: 51
680
Index
>
· notch Hz, -3dB points (SPS) DFM: 113

DFM: 21, DFM: 62 · Header block 2 (SEGD)
· type FM1: 76 DFM: 116
· type (SEGD) DFM: 128 · Header block 3 (SEGD)
Filtering DFM: 117
· seismic trace display FM1: 431 · Header Block Number (SEGD)
Firmware update FM2: 62 DFM: 116, DFM: 117
First · Trailer blocks, number of
· Notch Frequency (SEGD) DFM: 116
DFM: 121 Geodetic datum
· Timing Word (SEGD) DFM: 133 · parameters (SPS) DFM: 9,
Floppy disk DFM: 19, DFM: 49,
T
· specifications (SPS) DFM: 7, DFM: 59
DFM: 8, DFM: 46, · spheroid (SPS) DFM: 9,
DFM: 48 DFM: 18, DFM: 49,
Format
AF
· code (SEGD) DFM: 113 Geophone
DFM: 59
· SEGD, Rev 2.1 DFM: 151 · arrangement FM1: 625

· SPS, initial DFM: 1 · number per trace FM1: 623
· SPS, Rev. 2.1 DFM: 41 · parallel FM1: 623
R
· version num. (SPS) DFM: 9, · series FM1: 623
DFM: 17, DFM: 49, · strings FM1: 623
DFM: 58 Geophysical contractor (SPS)
D
Frequency DFM: 9, DFM: 18, DFM: 49,

· Nyquist FM1: 77, FM2: 238 DFM: 58
From channel (SPS) DFM: 16, Getting started FM2: 7
DFM: 29, DFM: 57, DFM: 70 · 508XT GUI FM1: 1
From receiver (SPS) DFM: 17, GPS
DFM: 29, DFM: 57, DFM: 70 · correcting geometry errors
Geometry
correcting with GPS posi-
G tions FM2: 178
Gain · correcting Stake ID errors
· geophone string FM1: 624 FM2: 116
General GPS position FM2: 26
· Header block 1 (SEGD) Grid

Index
> 21
· coord. at origin (SPS) DFM: 10, I

DFM: 20, DFM: 50,
DFM: 60 Icon FM2: 3
· origin (SPS) DFM: 10, Impedance
DFM: 20, DFM: 60 · geophone string FM1: 624
Group Import
· geophone string FM1: 627 · administration window FM1: 618
Guest · markers from CSV FM2: 48
· privileges FM1: 616 · WTU list from PFT FM2: 286
Index
· box FM2: 3
H Install
T
Hardware · administration window FM1: 618
· installing IM: 25 Installing
Harvest Multiple Autonomous CX- · Data Harvester software IM: 344
508 FM1: 105
Harvesting FM2: 298
AF · hardware IM: 25
· PFT software IM: 264
· recommendations FM2: 332 Instrument
Harvesting CX-508 FM1: 643 · Code (I) tables (SPS) DFM: 11,
Header record DFM: 51
R
· description (SPS) DFM: 17, · Code (SPS) DFM: 16, DFM: 29,
DFM: 58 DFM: 56, DFM: 70
· specification (SPS) DFM: 8, Internal
D
DFM: 48 · time break (SEGD) DFM: 126

Help
· language FM1: 6 J
Historic
· editing type (SEGD) DFM: 126 Julian day (SEGD) DFM: 113
· range (SEGD) DFM: 126
· taper length (SEGD) DFM: 126 L
· threshold Init value (SEGD)
Language
DFM: 126
· help FM1: 6
· zeroing length (SEGD)
DFM: 126 Lat. Long
· initial line (SPS) DFM: 10,
Hour of day (SEGD) DFM: 113
DFM: 20, DFM: 50,
682
Index
>
DFM: 60 · user FM1: 4

· scale factor (SPS) DFM: 10, Log in
DFM: 20, DFM: 50, · connecting to server FM1: 4
DFM: 60 · name FM1: 5
Lat. of standard parallel(s) (SPS) Long. of central meridian (SPS)
DFM: 9, DFM: 19, DFM: 49, DFM: 10, DFM: 19, DFM: 50,
DFM: 60 DFM: 60
Launcher Low
· bar, customizing FM1: 9 · stacks, number of DFM: 147
· icons FM1: 8, FM2: 31 · Trace Percentage (SEGD)
Leakage DFM: 126
· error (SEGD) DFM: 141 · Trace Value (SEGD) DFM: 126
T
· limit (SEGD) DFM: 141 Low-cut
· value (SEGD) DFM: 141
AF · Filter frequency (SEGD)
Length DFM: 120
· record (SEGD) DFM: 127 · Filter slope (SEGD) DFM: 120
Limits
· WTU parameters FM2: 78 M
Line
· name (SPS) DFM: 15, DFM: 16, Management
R
DFM: 26, DFM: 29, · sessions FM1: 617
DFM: 55, DFM: 56, Manual
DFM: 67, DFM: 70 · Export FM2: 216
D
· number format (SPS) DFM: 10, · shooting FM1: 181

DFM: 20, DFM: 50, Manual assignment FM2: 182
DFM: 61 Manufacturer’s
· sequence number, SPS DFM: 49, · code (SEGD) DFM: 114
DFM: 58 · serial nb (SEGD) DFM: 114
Linear Map grid
· Phase FM1: 83, FM2: 238, · easting (SPS) DFM: 15,
FM2: 239 DFM: 27, DFM: 55,
List DFM: 68
· box FM2: 3 · northing (SPS) DFM: 15,
Live seis traces, number of DFM: 27, DFM: 55,
DFM: 122 DFM: 68
Local Markers

Index
> 21
· assigning, PFT list FM2: 287 · seismic data setup FM1: 433
· history FM2: 120 Normalization
· import from CSV FM2: 48 · seismic traces FM1: 433
Max Notch
· of max, Aux (SEGD) DFM: 127 · frequency (SEGD) DFM: 121
· of max, Seis (SEGD) DFM: 127 Number of
MEMS IM: 8 · Auxes (SEGD) DFM: 122
Minimum · blocks of General Trailer (SEGD)
· Phase FM1: 77, FM2: 238, DFM: 116
FM2: 239 · channel sets per record (SEGD)
Minute of day (SEGD) DFM: 113 DFM: 114
Mouse · channels (SPS) DFM: 11,
T
· Buttons FM2: 3 DFM: 21, DFM: 51,
Multi-component DFM: 62
· channels in this channel set
DFM: 22, DFM: 51,
AF
· recording (SPS) DFM: 11,
(SEGD) DFM: 118
· dead Seis traces (SEGD)
DFM: 63
DFM: 122
· geophones per trace FM1: 623
N · live Seis traces (SEGD)
R
Name DFM: 122
· Log in FM1: 5 · sample skew 32 byte extensions
NAS4000 (SEGD) DFM: 114
D
· shock-mount parts IM: 223 · samples in trace (SEGD)

No. sub arrays, nom depth (SPS) DFM: 122
DFM: 25, DFM: 66 · samples per trace DFM: 131
Noise · samples per trace (SEGD)
· elimination type (SEGD) DFM: 134
DFM: 126 · Seis traces (SEGD) DFM: 122
Noisy · stacks low (SEGD) DFM: 147
· stacks noisy (SEGD) DFM: 147
· stacks, number of DFM: 147
· subscans exponent (SEGD)
· trace percentage (SEGD)
DFM: 126 DFM: 119
· traces (SEGD) DFM: 122
Nominal towing depth DFM: 25,
· windows (SEGD) DFM: 126
DFM: 66
Nunits, len, width (SPS) DFM: 12,
None
684
Index
>
DFM: 13, DFM: 23, DFM: 24, IM: 194, IM: 394, FM1: 500
DFM: 52, DFM: 53, DFM: 64, Permission FM1: 616
DFM: 65 PFT
Nyquist FM1: 77, FM2: 238 · software, installing IM: 264
PFT lists
· archive FM2: 288
O · Assigning markers FM2: 287
Observer Phase
· privileges FM1: 616 · angle (SEGD) DFM: 117
Offset · Control (SEGD) DFM: 117
· to coord. location (SPS) DFM: 9, · Linear FM1: 83, FM2: 238,
DFM: 18, DFM: 49, FM2: 239
T
DFM: 59 · Minimum FM1: 77, FM2: 238,
Open FM2: 239
· session FM1: 3, FM2: 8
Operation window FM1: 613
AF Pilot length (SEGD) DFM: 127
Ping IM: 30
Optical Fibre Plug
· TFOI, connecting IM: 298, · cleaning IM: 290
IM: 489 Point (to) FM2: 4
Organization Point Code
R
· code DFM: 286 · SPS DFM: 15, DFM: 26,
Outstanding DFM: 55, DFM: 67
· VP FM2: 99 Point Depth (SPS) DFM: 15,
D
DFM: 26, DFM: 55, DFM: 67

P Point Index
· SPS DFM: 15, DFM: 16,
Parallel
DFM: 26, DFM: 29,
· geophone FM1: 623
DFM: 55, DFM: 56,
Parameters DFM: 67, DFM: 70
· acquisition FM2: 76
Point number
· loading to WTU FM2: 93
· SPS DFM: 15, DFM: 16,
Password DFM: 26, DFM: 29,
· expiry date FM1: 616 DFM: 55, DFM: 56,
· opening a session FM1: 5 DFM: 67, DFM: 70
Paste FM2: 6 Point record
Peripherals IM: 133, IM: 182,

Index
> 21
· description (SPS) DFM: 26, Q

DFM: 67
· specification (SPS) DFM: 15, QC
DFM: 55 · age FM2: 99
Polarity · age, max. FM2: 36
· SEGD DFM: 114 · Time FM2: 99
Pos. proc. contractor (SPS) DFM: 9, Quadrant bearing of H256 (SPS)
DFM: 18, DFM: 49, DFM: 59 DFM: 10, DFM: 20, DFM: 50,
POSC DFM: 286 DFM: 61
Positioning Quality Control
· contractor (SPS) DFM: 9, · check records (SPS) DFM: 14,
DFM: 18, DFM: 49, DFM: 54
T
DFM: 58 QuietSeis IM: 2
Post-plot date of issue (SPS)
R
DFM: 58
AF
DFM: 9, DFM: 18, DFM: 49,
R,S,X file quality control (SPS)
Power DFM: 14, DFM: 54
· requirements IM: 31
Rate
P-P bar/m,prim/bubble (SPS) · refresh FM2: 16
DFM: 25, DFM: 66
R
· sample FM1: 76
Prestack within field units (SEGD) Raw SEG-D FM2: 36
DFM: 126 Real-time alerts FM2: 26
Printer IM: 196
D
Reaper window FM2: 308

Privileges FM1: 616 Receiver
Process · code (Rx) tables (SPS) DFM: 12,
· Type, SEGD DFM: 127 DFM: 52
· VPs FM2: 41 · index (SPS) DFM: 17,
Project code and description (SPS) DFM: 30, DFM: 57,
DFM: 10, DFM: 20, DFM: 50, DFM: 71
DFM: 61 · line number (SEGD) DFM: 134
Projection · point easting (SEGD) DFM: 137
· type (SPS) DFM: 9, DFM: 19, · point elevation (SEGD)
DFM: 49, DFM: 60 DFM: 137
· zone (SPS) DFM: 9, DFM: 19, · point index (SEGD) DFM: 134
DFM: 49, DFM: 60 · point northing (SEGD)
686
Index
>
DFM: 137 · int. Record Len. (SPS) DFM: 11,

· point number (SEGD) DFM: 134 DFM: 51
Record · int., Record Length (SPS)
· identification (SPS) DFM: 15, DFM: 21, DFM: 62
DFM: 16, DFM: 55, · Rate FM1: 76
DFM: 56 · skew extensions, number of
· length (SEGD) DFM: 127 DFM: 114
· type (SEGD) DFM: 114 · skew, SEGD DFM: 133
Record length · to mV conversion factor
· SEGD DFM: 114 DFM: 146
Refraction Sample Rate
· delay, SEGD DFM: 126 · SEGD DFM: 122
T
Refresh Samples
· rate FM2: 16 · in trace, number of DFM: 122
Relation record · per trace, number of DFM: 131,
AF
· description (SPS) DFM: 29,
DFM: 70 Scale
DFM: 134
· specification (SPS) DFM: 16, · factor (SPS) DFM: 10,

DFM: 56 DFM: 20, DFM: 50,
Remote DFM: 60
R
· user FM1: 4 Scan Type
Remote Connection FM1: 4 · Header (SEGD) DFM: 118
Resistance · Number (SEGD) DFM: 133
D
· error (SEGD) DFM: 139 · per record (SEGD) DFM: 114

· high limit (SEGD) DFM: 139 Scheduled
· low limit (SEGD) DFM: 139 · BIT VPs, generate FM2: 50
· value (SEGD) DFM: 139 · tests FM2: 79
Revision Number (SEGD) SCI-508 IM: 19
DFM: 116 Scrollbar FM2: 4
RMS normalization FM1: 433 Second
Role FM1: 616 · Notch Frequency (SEGD)
RSSI FM2: 99 DFM: 121
· of minute (SEGD) DFM: 113
SEGD
S · format, Rev 2.1 DFM: 151
Sample · Trace Blocking FM2: 212

Index
> 21
Seis traces, number of DFM: 122 Setup

Seismic · AGC FM1: 433
· datum (SPS) DFM: 15, · Filtering, seismic trace display
DFM: 26, DFM: 55, FM1: 431
DFM: 67 · Normalization, seismic traces
· instrument header records (SPS) FM1: 433
DFM: 21, DFM: 62 · Time, exponential FM1: 433
· receiver header records (SPS) SH geophone IM: 294
DFM: 23, DFM: 64 Shock-mount
· source header records (SPS) · NAS4000 IM: 223
DFM: 23, DFM: 65 Shooting
Select FM2: 4 · system, connecting IM: 41
T
Selecting Shot
· table cells FM2: 6 · Depth, charge len. (SPS)
Senior DFM: 14, DFM: 54
AF
· Observer, privileges FM1: 616 · depth, charge len. (SPS)
DFM: 24, DFM: 66
Sensor
· sensitivity (SEGD) DFM: 144 · number (SEGD) DFM: 122
Sensor Type Size
· Number (sensor tests) DFM: 137 · vert. stk fold (SPS) DFM: 13,
R
· SEGD code DFM: 136 DFM: 53
Sequence Size, vert. stk fold (SPS) DFM: 24,
· Line, SPS DFM: 49, DFM: 58 DFM: 65
D
Series Skew, sample, number of extensions

· geophones FM1: 623 DFM: 114
Server Sleep
· log on to FM1: 4 · time, WTU FM2: 85
· start/stop FM2: 10 · WTU FM2: 49
Session Slip-sweep
· manager FM1: 617 · mode used (SEGD) DFM: 128
· opening FM1: 3, FM2: 8 Software
Sets, channel DFM: 114 · version (SEGD) DFM: 128
Settings SoH FM2: 49
· browser FM1: 6 Soil, drill method (SPS) DFM: 14,
· help FM1: 6 DFM: 25, DFM: 54, DFM: 66
688
Index
>
Source Stake ID mapping

· aux nb (SEGD) DFM: 127 · Aided assignenment FM2: 178
· code (Sx) tables (SPS) DFM: 13, · Auto-assignment FM2: 178
DFM: 53 · Manual assignment FM2: 182
· easting (SEGD) DFM: 128 Starting
· elevation (SEGD) DFM: 128 · DCM server FM2: 10
· Line Number (SEGD) DFM: 117 State of Health FM2: 49, FM2: 158
· northing (SEGD) DFM: 128 Static correction (SPS) DFM: 15,
· Point Index (SEGD) DFM: 117 DFM: 26, DFM: 55, DFM: 67
· Point Number (SEGD) DFM: 117 Stopping
· Set Number (SEGD) DFM: 117 · DCM server FM2: 10
Source Devices FM2: 220 Streamer cable number (SEGD)
T
Spacing DFM: 121
· IM: 299 String
· FDU IM: 299
· FDU-508
Spacing IM: 299
AF · gain, geophone FM1: 624
· group, geophone FM1: 627
· impedance, geophone FM1: 624
Spread · wiring, geophones FM1: 627
· number (SEGD) DFM: 123 Subarrays, number of DFM: 25,
· type (SEGD) DFM: 123
DFM: 66
R
SPS
Subscan exponent DFM: 119
· format, initial DFM: 1,
DFM: 274 Sum VP/WTU FM2: 106
Super-spread FM2: 43
D
· Rev. 2.1 DFM: 41

· Sercel (over 10000 traces) Surface
DFM: 38 · elevation, SPS DFM: 15,
Stacking Fold DFM: 55
· SEGD DFM: 127 Surface elevation
Stacks, number of · SPS DFM: 27, DFM: 68
· Low DFM: 147 Swath
· Noisy DFM: 147 · first line (SEGD) DFM: 123
Stake ID FM2: 116 · first number (SEGD) DFM: 123
· correcting with GPS position Sweep
FM2: 116 · freq start, end (SPS) DFM: 13,
· loading to Position FM2: 167 DFM: 53
· updating FM2: 118 · frequency start,end (SPS)

Index
> 21
DFM: 24, DFM: 65 · event definition FM2: 245

· length (SEGD) DFM: 127 TFOI
· type, length (SPS) DFM: 13, · connecting IM: 298, IM: 489
DFM: 24, DFM: 53, TFOI-508 IM: 10
DFM: 65 Theft Alarm
· WTU FM2: 27
T Third Notch Frequency (SEGD)
DFM: 121
Table
· how to select FM2: 6
Threshold
· Hold/Var (SEGD) DFM: 126
Tape
· type tables (SEGD) DFM: 127
· drive IM: 23
Tilt
T
· Label FM2: 210
· error (SEGD) DFM: 139
· label (SEGD) DFM: 127
· limit (SEGD) DFM: 139
· number of files FM2: 211
AF
· number, SEGD DFM: 128
· type, format, density (SPS)
· value (SEGD) DFM: 139
Tilt Model
DFM: 11, DFM: 21, · create FM2: 43, FM2: 110
DFM: 51, DFM: 62 · WTU parameters, load FM2: 76
Tape/disk identifier (SPS) DFM: 9, Time
· delay, FTB-SOD (SPS) DFM: 11,
R
DFM: 18, DFM: 49, DFM: 58
DFM: 21, DFM: 51,
Taper
DFM: 62
· length start, end (SPS) DFM: 13,
· exponential, trace display
D
DFM: 24, DFM: 53,

FM1: 433
DFM: 65
· SPS DFM: 15, DFM: 27,
TB DFM: 55, DFM: 68
· window, SEGD DFM: 122
Time break
Tb to T0 time (SEGD) DFM: 126 · SEGD DFM: 123
Test · window, SEGD DFM: 133
· Record, type (SEGD) DFM: 123 To channel (SPS) DFM: 16,
· Spread FM1: 87
DFM: 29, DFM: 57, DFM: 70
Tests
To receiver (SPS) DFM: 17,
· on request FM2: 83
DFM: 29, DFM: 57, DFM: 71
Text
· box FM2: 4
Toggle
· button FM2: 4
Text file
690
Index
>
Topo view · Live seis DFM: 122

· Complete window FM2: 107 · Seismic DFM: 122
· Data Harvester FM2: 314 Trailer, general DFM: 116
Total number of traces (SEGD) Type
DFM: 122 · Model, Polarity (SPS) DFM: 11,
Towing depth DFM: 25, DFM: 66 DFM: 12, DFM: 13,
Trace DFM: 21, DFM: 23,
· blocking FM2: 212 DFM: 24, DFM: 51,
· data block DFM: 131 DFM: 52, DFM: 53,
· edit (SEGD) DFM: 133 DFM: 62, DFM: 64,
· Number (SEGD) DFM: 133 DFM: 65
· number of samples in DFM: 122 · of process (SEGD) DFM: 127
T
Trace Header · of source (SEGD) DFM: 122
· Extension (SEGD) DFM: 133
U
DFM: 134
AF
· Extension Block 1 (SEGD)
Unit
· Extension block 2 (SEGD)
· serial number (SEGD) DFM: 142
DFM: 137
· type (SEGD) DFM: 142
· Extension block 3 (SEGD)
DFM: 139 Units
R
· Extension block 4 (SEGD) · spacing X, Y (SPS) DFM: 12,
DFM: 140 DFM: 13, DFM: 23,
· Extension block 5 (SEGD) DFM: 24, DFM: 52,
D
DFM: 141 DFM: 53, DFM: 64,

· Extension block 6 (SEGD) DFM: 65
DFM: 142 Updating
· Extension block 7 (SEGD) · stake ID FM2: 118
DFM: 145 Uphole
· Extensions (SEGD) DFM: 121, · time (SEGD) DFM: 123
DFM: 134 · time (SPS) DFM: 15, DFM: 26,
· SEGD DFM: 133 DFM: 55, DFM: 67
Traces URL
· total number of DFM: 122 · opening a session FM1: 4
Traces, number of
· Aux DFM: 122
· Dead seis DFM: 122

Index
> 21
V WTU
· parameters, loading FM2: 93
VE464 · position, load to Position
· connecting IM: 38 FM2: 167
Vertical WTU assignment
· datum description (SPS) DFM: 9, · Automatic checks FM2: 183
DFM: 19, DFM: 49, WTU list
DFM: 60 · import from PFT FM2: 286
· Stack (SEGD) DFM: 121 WTU parameters
Vibrator · group, create FM2: 89
· type (SEGD) DFM: 117 · summary FM2: 73
Vibroseis (SPS) DFM: 13,
T
DFM: 53
View Y
· Topo, Complete window Year (SEGD) DFM: 113
FM2: 107
AF
· Topo, Data Harvester FM2: 314
VP
· Process FM2: 41
R
W
Wake up
D
· time, WTU FM2: 85

Water
· depth (SPS) DFM: 15,
DFM: 26, DFM: 55,
DFM: 67
· gun (SPS) DFM: 14, DFM: 54
Weathering thickness (SPS)
DFM: 14, DFM: 25, DFM: 54,
DFM: 66
Weekly calendar FM2: 84
Window
· TB DFM: 122
Working hours FM2: 84
692

508XT V2 1 Functional DRAFT

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

508XT V2 1 Functional DRAFT

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

XT

Ref. 10048016 AA February 5, 2020

Figure 2-1 My Sercel Homepage

Click here to request a My Sercel account. http://customer.sercel.com or use the

Toulouse, France Manufacturing & Repair

Import and Export.

Intellectual property rights, patents and copyrights to Software.

Date of Chapters or Description of revision or reason

Jan. 2020 AA Initial Release 508XT v2.1

2 508XT HCI Perspectives

Set Vib Fleet view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Update Custom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

13 Data Harvester CX-508

14 Sercel 508 Launcher Application

19 Case Study: Autonomous Functionality in 508XT

20 Case Study: Use of 508XT Transition Zone

508XT Functional Manual

508XT System Documentation

Opening a user session

Figure 1-1 Start Client shortcut button

- Wait until the launcher bar appears.

Figure 1-3 Connection menu

• Connection: used to log on to the server. See Connection (page 19).

- localhost if you are connecting as “Local user” on the server computer

Figure 1-6 Advanced Parameters

Look & Feel

Figure 1-8 Regional Settings

508XT Launcher bar

Administration Configuration Remote Server Control

Figure 1-11 Launcher bar

Server Field Operation VE464 Field Tester / Date of Message Question

Figure 1-14 Graphic View Functions

Figure 1-16 Admin 508

Remote Server Control

Figure 1-17 Example 1

Server is locked with 1 or

• Initial State: Server Stopped (Without issues)

Figure 1-19 Example 3

• Status Messages Panel (page 60)

508XT Functional Manual

What’s New in 508XT V2.0

Graphic Interface Panel

Navigate Bookmarks View Background 2D /3D Reduce

Figure 2-2 Check mark indicating view registered

Figure 2-4 Display Bookmarks

Contextual Menus (Right-Click)

Figure 2-6 right-click menu example

Locate on Other Views

See also, Detour (page 134).

Object / Instrument Properties

Figure 2-8 Concentrator Attributes (Instrument Info.)

Figure 2-10 Concentrator Attributes (Instrument Properties)

Figure 2-12 Measuring Distance example

3. Double-click the left-mouse button to complete the measurement.

In the example below, a perimeter has been defined in Figure 2-14.

Figure 2-14 Position 1

Select multiple objects

State Tools Panel

Figure 2-17 State tools panel

Sensor Tools Panel

Show test results

Battery Tools Panel

Figure 2-20 Battery Tools Panel

Figure 2-21 Battery icons